Home

Results - Hayeshelp.com

1. the selected alignment Hi 202c N 1 853 710 E 4 a N 1 451 473 E New opens the Edit Alignment screen as N 1 041 534 E N 1 451 473 E where a new alignment can be created from scratch Edit opens the Edit Alignment screen where the details of the selected alignment can G7 j T be edited Delete is used to delete the selected alignment The power button opens the following routines R 68 Job Menu e Create Points opens the Create Points screen Page R 440 where points can be stored that coincide with the selected alignment e Import RD5 File opens the Open screen and lists all the RD5 alignment files in the Jobs directory Select the desired file and tap amp e Export RD5 File opens the Save As screen where the current alignment can be saved to a RD5 file Edit Alignment ob Edt Alignments Edit or The Edit Alignment screen is used to edit an existing alignment or create a new one Edit Alignment Screen HAL Tab Edit Alj gnm ent The HAL Horizontal ALignment tab in the Ha va Jeo Jerr O aae SES aT Edit Alignment screen is used to enter or modify only the horizontal details of an alignment Insert opens the Edit Segment screen where a new horizontal alignment segment can be inserted prior to the selected segment Edit opens the Edit Segment screen where the selected horizontal segment can be modified na
2. R 168 map card R 167 results card R 164 Video Card 0068 R 165 remote elevation259 R 155 R 229 remote mode stake points R 279 stake to line R 285 traverse sideshot R 129 CUT COu ence R 163 repetition siete 113 repetition settings 114 R 53 repetition shots R 130 resection 66 125 R 153 restore JOD ccceeeeeeeees R 27 road profile R 407 road report 000s R 405 road slope staking R 421 road stakeout R 415 road station and offset R 424 road templates R 400 roads tod ec ceeded a R 403 rotate eeseeeesee 161 R 433 VOCAL ON ise a 258 rover setup R 188 R 205 RIK iiia 235 data collection 264 stake out seeen 270 video SCAN s es R 150 EX Setting oiri R 97 settings screen 066 27 setup group sesessesesseseese 256 S shoot from two ends120 R 151 SAVE AS ecceeccesecesceeeceeeeeees R 14 SNOLCUUS snura 14 SAVE point sees R 154 show station 00 R 314 scale 158 258 R 430 show station and offsetR 343 scale factor 202 204 R 46 side Shot cccceesseceeseeeees 61 elli 0 lt 0 6 leper ne ee 278 site UID euiintt sce elt atetiteer 272 mapping plane 204 278 SKY VIEW R 175 scale factor calculator 278 slant HI uu eee R 441 scroll button 008 13 slant HR a
3. 0ccceeeceeees R 354 point to point inverse R 350 point to polyline inverseR 352 points on DTM layer R 84 1056 id 06 0 lt n 44 polylines R 64 post process cc 00s R 174 post processing 235 270 data collection R 199 file management R 243 office procedure 273 Settings R 107 power button 006 13 predetermined areal47 R 370 hinge method 147 parallel method 148 projection cc cece eee R 205 Lambert Conformal Conic E EEEN EET 203 Oblique Mercator 203 stereographic 204 205 Transverse Mercator 203 projection calculator R 241 projection mode 210 R 179 projection utilities 274 Q quick pick editor R 442 R radio settings R 100 radius point COMPUTE cc eee R 381 raw data ALOI E o ee eee R 80 VIEW anah R 79 raw data file 0 30 receiver antenna R 184 receiver information R 235 I 6 Basic GPS iccicvssiccancss R 256 receiver S SS10N R 202 receiver settings232 305 R 94 general card R 103 receiver Card 6 R 97 receiver Setup 066 R 95 record mode 06 R 152 refractiONn cccccceeeeee R 45 register modules R 32 registering ceecceeceeeeeeees 4 remote control 131 R 156 R 162 AICA Ed ashe nen R 168 foresight card
4. sssssssssssrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrnnrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrnns 235 Adjust with Projection sssesssessnssnresrnsrnnernnnsrrnsrnnnsrnnennens 236 Projection CalCUuralol arinean an An 241 iv Fe Management snena 243 Survey M enu Basic GPS ssssssssnnsnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 245 GPS Stat S aiaiai a a a a ae 246 Sta GPS SUEY Oyama a 246 Data CONNECCION nean 253 Go G10 6 Ie 2c 0 g Roo mae nas nr ne ne tanta nT nea rnEn AN a T 254 POSE P FOCCSSI N nrane ao 255 POE Oli n N eases 255 Receiver TNFOFMAC ON cceccccccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeueeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeees 256 FIle ManaGeMnent siviiickntwiviniaciiiinmninahiadaidenniiinn 256 Ee Mi CHU E E E E 257 sadec Create OOD rnr A 258 DPC TESE eene cates D maetestectiaatiscaded enact easaes 268 AQUOS CHE aaan 269 Leveling Remote Control cc cccssscsssssssssessseeesssenesseeees 2 1 STAK COUT M nu siocair aaa aaa a aada 273 Stak POINUS ee Or a ee 214 Stake LISt OF POINES STEEN rinni ia 280 Ake 1 A ae a E 282 OSCE SAKIN Gaa 286 SOPE AKIN G acadiana a 293 PONE SIOPE SAKIN iiicinnradmutvinnrntap avetsidianstetlanniqeamensiate 299 Stake Line and Offset se crscscostessiveshoascee seecreathan chutaslanbicdenntowataierwiscibesitus 303 Stake Curve and Offset mic cindtuninidivnsselonwientoduatodcardbeeiean 306 Stake Spiral and OFFSEL ccccsssesssteesssteessseesssrensssnensseees 310 POW Feio A Pee eh EE E eee 314 sore OSE Sn ne a a ee OP 316 EEC
5. 2007 Tripod Data Systems Inc All Rights Reserved TRIPOD DATA SYSTEMS SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT IMPORTANT BY OPENING THE SEALED MEDIA PACKAGE YOU ARE AGREEING TO BE BOUND BY THE TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF THE LICENSE AGREEMENT AND LIMITATIONS OF LIABILITY Agreement THIS AGREEMENT CONSTITUTES THE COMPLETE AGREEMENT BETWEEN YOU AND TRIPOD DATA SYSTEMS INC Licensor CAREFULLY READ THE AGREEMENT AND IF YOU DO NOT AGREE WITH THE TERMS RETURN THE UNOPENED MEDIA PACKAGE AND THE ACCOMPANYING ITEMS including written materials and binders or other containers TO THE PLACE WHERE YOU OBTAINED THEM FOR A FULL REFUND LICENSE LICENSOR grants to you a limited non exclusive license to i install and operate the copy of the computer program contained in this package Program on a single computer one central processing unit and associated monitor and keyboard and ii make one archival copy of the Program for use with the same computer LICENSOR retains all rights to the Program not expressly granted in this Agreement OWNERSHIP OF PROGRAMS AND COPIES This license is not a sale of the original Program or any copies LICENSOR retains the ownership of the Program and all subsequent copies of the Program made by you regardless of the form in which the copies may exist The Program and accompanying manuals Documentation are copyrighted works of authorship and contain valuable trade secrets and confidential information proprietary to LICENSOR Y
6. selected point Shoot defines if you want to perform a Direct shot only or Direct amp Reverse shots to the foresight HI is the distance that the total station is 7 iD uw Z E sparja dew BI above the ground HR is the length of the rod x opens the Smart Target options Page R 449 M Store Pt When checked the elevation of the point specified here will be replaced with the computed elevation Take Shot computes the elevation for the point that had an unknown elevation and optionally writes that elevation to the specified Store Pt Results OCC Elevation displays the elevation for the occupy point FS Elevation displays the elevation for the foresight point R 155 Survey Pro Reference Manual Check Point The Check Point screen compares the rod location with an existing point in the project This routine is similar to the Check Backsight routine Page R 122 and is used to verify that the rod and or the total station is over the correct point This routine does not store a new point Point is the point from the project that willbe fenmen Q compared to the observed point rod location occ 1 Hr 550 ps ceno on y Height of Rod is the length of the rod Paint M Backsight opens the Backsight Setup screen HR 7 00 it E M Page R 118 Observed 5 010 000 ifeet Take Shot takes a shot and displays the 5 000 000 ifeet deltas between the observ
7. Horz Dist is the horizontal distance from the Occupy Point to the Foresight Point Vert Dist is the vertical distance from the Occupy Point to the Foresight Point Point is the name of the stored point Desc is the description of the stored point Location N is the Y coordinate of the stored point Location E is the X coordinate of the stored point Location Z is the elevation of the stored point R 125 Survey Pro Reference Manual Traverse Now or Later After taking a shot with the Traverse button Uigeiise ikea isin wy the Traverse Now or Later dialog box will You can either traverse to the new point now or open where you can specify if you want to later by pressing the Traverse button again traverse now or later Traverse Now expects you to move your total station to the next occupy point before any additional shots are taken The occupy foresight and backsight points will be updated accordingly Traverse Later allows you to take additional side shots before moving the total station to the next traverse point This is useful is you want to take side shots from the current occupy point but perform the traverse shot as the first shot of the current set up to ensure the highest accuracy Traverse Point 391 Traverse Now Traverse Later When you have finished taking side shots tap the Traverse button again You can then select and set up on the next occupy point or selec
8. Note The choice made above determines which fields will be available below Bearing is the direction to move the selected points Horizontal Distance is the horizontal distance that the selected points are moved Vertical Distance is the vertical distance that the selected points are moved From is where the first point or location is defined that is used to compute the direction and distance that the selected points are adjusted To is where the last point or location is defined that is used to compute the direction and distance that the selected points are adjusted R 431 Survey Pro Reference Manual gt Point gt Location allows you to enter either a point name or location coordinates Solve adjusts the selected points in the same direction or distance as defined from the From point to the To point or by the direction and distance entered Information will be written to the raw data file detailing the adjustment R 432 Adjust Menu Rotate The Rotate screen will rotate selected points around a specified point This is useful to correct a survey where an incorrect backsight was used during data collection Tap Points allows you to select points by tapping them from a map view i l d lias ja To From Opens the Point List screen Page __H M R 443 where a point list can be created Rotation Point M Rotation Point The selected points will be Simple an
9. stores a side shot using the data from the last shot taken This will not take a new shot Turn Gun available with robotic total station turns the total station toward the design point lt Back returns to the second screen Stake Next gt returns you to the second Stake Road screen without storing a stake point where the Design point is advanced by the Increment value Stake Road Screen Five This screen is used to describe the stake point before it is stored and select if the Results screen should be displayed described next Point is the point name for the stake point Description 0 25 000 R 20 0 being stored Show Results on OK Description is the description for the stake point being stored The default description is the station side and distance from the centerline for the design point Show Results on OK When this checkbox is checked a Results screen described next will open after tapping amp from this screen R 419 Survey Pro Reference Manual Note This screen will not appear if the Write Cut Sheet Data Only No Store Point checkbox is checked in the Stakeout Settings screen although the Results screen will still appear if the Show Results on OK checkbox was never unchecked from this screen It is checked by default Stake Road Stakeout Results This screen shows detailed cut fill values which may be needed when marking a road or Stakeout Results Ta
10. Add to Map opens the Add to Map screen Page R 369 where the map data entered in the list can be added to the current job as a polyline Results Area is the area that the boundary encloses If the start and end points are in different locations the area is computed as if a line joined these two points Length is the length of the boundary from the first point to the last point Perimeter is the length of the boundary from the first point to the last point plus any additional length between the last point and the first point R 367 Survey Pro Reference Manual Error dist is the distance between the last point and the first point Error azm is the direction from the last point to the first point Precision is the ratio between the Error distance and Perimeter Add Edit Line The Add Edit Line screen is used to enter a new line to the list prior to the selected line segment gt Bearing is the direction of the Add Edit Line Pem Soom Length is the length of the line in feet or Beu M meters N 1 enters the line to the list closes the screen without entering any new line data Add Edit Curve The Add Edit Curve screen is used to enter a new curve to the list prior to the selected line segment Radius The distance from the radius point to p d Edit Curve the curv ras pen Te Delta The internal angle from center to Poeta lv tangent points Pray oom
11. Datum Type e Transverse Mercator e Lambert 1 Parallel Grid and Azimuth Parameters e Lambert 2 Parallel Northeast crid South west Grid e Stereographic Oblique Stereographic e Oblique Mercator Angle Datum Type is where you select what kind of datum to use for the new zone You can choose e Pick from database Choose this option to add a data base datum and ellipsoid to the new zone e Custom Molodensky Choose this option to use a custom 3 parameter datum transformation with either a custom ellipsoid or a data base ellipsoid e Custom Similarity Choose this option to use a 7 parameter datum transformation with either a custom ellipsoid or a data base ellipsoid Grid and Azimuth Parameters is where you select the grid azimuth and the positive coordinate direction e North Azimuth is where you set a north azimuth for your new zone e South Azimuth is where you set a south azimuth for your new zone R 221 Survey Pro Reference Manual e North East Grid is where you set the coordinates increasing positive in the north east direction e South West Grid is where you set the coordinates increasing positive in the south west direction Key In Zone Mapping Plane Parameters The Key In Zone Mapping Plane Parameters screen is used to enter the values for the map projection zone The parameters required depend on the zone type They will include Key In Zone 3 f fone Parameters e Central
12. Elevation Offset Shoot Line Horiz L Offset R SRN Shot2 _ ao oa I DA Offset Elevation Offset Corner amp Offset Foresight is the name of the point that will be stored Description is the description for the point that will be stored HR 0 000 shows that no rod height will be used with this routine since all shots are direct reflectorless Horiz Offset is the horizontal distance on the line from Shot 1 to the new point Select L if the new point falls to the left of Shot 1 or select R if it falls to the right Perpendicular Offset is the horizontal distance perpendicular to the reference line from the line to the new point see diagram A positive value extends away from the total station where a negative value is closer to the total station Elevation Offset is the vertical offset from the line to the new point See diagram A positive value will result in a new point above the reference line and a negative value results in a new point below the reference line Shoot Line will prompt you to take two shots on the horizontal reference line Note Each shot can be in any location on the reference line Shot 1 can be to the left or the right of Shot 2 but the Horiz Offset is always measured from Shot 1 R 141 Survey Pro Reference Manual Backsight opens the Backsight Setup screen Page R 118 where the current backsight can be modified Not
13. R 351 Survey Pro Reference Manual North is the Y coordinate on the specified line tangent to the perpendicular offset East is the X coordinate on the specified line tangent to the perpendicular offset Elevation is the elevation on the specified line tangent to the perpendicular offset Inverse Point to Polyline The Inverse Point to Polyline screen computes the offset distance from a known point perpendicular to a polyline Inverse Point is the known point that the offset to a polyline segment is computed Inverse Point to PolyLine Begin Station is the starting station assigned Inverse Paint ly to the beginning of the polyline which is used Begin Station 7 to compute the Station in the results TORETE E E ae ee eee a Tap Polyline allows you to tap an existing polyline from a map view v lv Editor opens the Polyline Editor Page R 65 x LI Store Point lv where a new polyline can be created or an existing polyline can be modified Tap Points provides a map view where you can tap any existing points to create a temporary polyline To From Opens the Point List screen Page R 443 where a point list can be created synsex ig LEW B M Store Point When checked will store the first solution where a perpendicular offset intersects with a polyline using the specified point name If additional solutions are found the following solutions will be stored using consecutive point
14. e Selected Antenna is displayed when you have entered new antenna measurements using the Receiver Antenna screen Page R 184 e Antenna Set is displayed when you have already set the base in Survey Pro and this receiver was used as the base Measured is where you enter the height of the antenna measured to the location specified on the Receiver Antenna screen Page R 184 Offset displays the vertical and or slant offset values for the selected antenna Entering antenna offsets is explained on the Receiver Antenna screen Page R 184 Setup HR opens the Receiver Antenna screen Page R 184 where the details of the base antenna are defined Next gt opens the final Base Setup screen The final screen depends on the base point you choose e Ifthe base point has existing geodetic coordinates or if they can be computed from 3D plane coordinates and the latest projection solution the final screen allows you to SET the receiver with the known position e Ifthe base point does not have geodetic coordinates or if geodetic coordinates cannot be computed for this point the final screen is used to GET an autonomous position and set the receiver R 183 Survey Pro Reference Manual Receiver Antenna The Receiver Antenna screen is used to define Base Receiver Antenna ea the parameters of the antenna used with the Antenna Type Demo1 current receiver This screen may be opened as the Base Receiver Antenna
15. 7 e Angle Side Angle Two angles and the lv side between them are known foe e Side Angle Angle Two angles and one side that does not lie between those angles are known synsey i dey e Side Angle Side Two sides and the angle between them are known e Side Side Angle Two sides and one angle that is not between those sides are known will solve for the unknown parts of the triangle Results Side a b c displays the length of each side Angle A B C displays the corresponding angle Area displays the area of the triangle in square feet and acres or in square meters and hectares R 366 Map Check 42 0 00 00 L 100 42 90 00 00 R 3 42 180 00 00 R 42 180 00 00 L 4z 270 00 00 R Az 0 00 00 R 32 Cogo Menu Map Check The Map Check screen is used to manually enter boundaries from a map to check for closure and other information related to the boundary Edit opens the appropriate editor screen where you can edit the selected line or curve from the list Delete deletes the selected line segment Clear clears all line entries Closure opens the Results page Add Line opens the Add Edit Line screen Page R 368 where a new line can be added T e h E prior to the select segment Add Arc opens the Add Edit Curve screen Page R 368 where a new curve can be added prior to the selected segment
16. Parity is the parity used for communication with the instrument This must match the parity setting configured within the total station PI N applicable only when using Bluetooth with a Recon and a supported total station is the Personal Identification Number that R 38 Job Menu was entered in the total station These numbers must match for successful communications Bluetooth applicable only when using Bluetooth with a supported total station accesses the Bluetooth configuration screen that comes with the Bluetooth driver software where you can quickly check or change the virtual COM port and favorites Note See the User s Manual for more information on configuring Bluetooth with a supported total station Defaults will set the Serial Port Baud Rate and Parity to their default values based on the selected total station Instrument Settings accesses the settings that are specific for the selected total station Send to Instrument applicable only on specific total stations will send the selected instrument settings to the total station This is particularly useful with robotic total stations after the total station has been reset R 39 Survey Pro Reference Manual NOTICE The settings that are available after tapping the Instrument Settings button directly control the settings that are built into the selected total station Since total station manufactures release new models ever
17. Rect will compute and store the fourth and final point that forms a rectangle or parallelogram after three points are stored with a description associated with Rect Note At any time the line type for any linework command can be changed while collecting linework for a particular feature For example a feature called FENCE might primarily use the Line linework command but might also contain a curved section To adda curve to the fence you would use the Ctrl L Quick Pick to open the Auto Linework screen and toggle Line to R Crv prior to storing the first point of the curve Once the second point of the curve is stored the curve is defined and appended to the FENCE polyline This routine is enhanced with the Props command described below M On When checked activates the associated linework command If a particular polyline is created and then this is unchecked for that linework command future points stored with the same description would not result in any change to that polyline But if this is then activated again later all future points collected using the same linework command will be appended to the original polyline End Toggles between the following two functions giving you control in collecting data for two or more separate features that use the same linework command i When the map icon is displayed for this button a polyline has been created for the associated linework command Tapping the button will then allow you
18. Screen Three Station to Stake is the station that will be Slope Staking Q staked next i station 1000 0 7 pon E fe Station I nterval is the value that is added to the Station to Stake after the Next Station nee button is pressed aa 20ee Next Station advances the Station to Stake by the Station Interval Cut Slope Fill Slope Segment Fill HP 2 Ji Note If the Stake Corners option is selected in the Stakeout Settings screen the Next Station button will also stop at any horizontal or vertical alignment node that falls within the interval Fill Slope is the desired slope calculated from rise over run between the hinge point and catch point when the area requires a fill Cut Slope is the desired slope calculated from rise over run between the hinge point and catch point when the area requires a cut Segment Fill HP when the terrain requires a fill you have the option to compute the hinge point from either side of the second segment The option to use segment 1 can simplify the situation R 294 Stakeout Menu where a ditch meets an area requiring a fill which would otherwise result in an area with two similar or identical negative slopes lt Back returns to the previous screen Stake CP gt opens the next screen Slope Staking Screen Four The fourth screen is used to perform the actual slope staking shots Slope oe f Height of Rod is the rod height
19. Select Database opens the Select Database screen where you select the coordinate system database to use Delete Zone Deletes the currently selected site or zone Note This delete function cannot be undone Also you cannot delete system database records If you select a protected record you will be prompted that the record cannot be deleted Key In Zone gt opens the Key In Zone screen where you can create a custom map projection zone ellipsoid and datum accepts the currently selected zone and opens the Adjust with Projection wizard After the preview of the adjustment results the new coordinate system is set and the raw data is written Select Database Select Zone Select Database The Select Database screen is used to select Change Database Pu 0 the coordinate system database to use This Please select new Coordinate System Database screen will list all of the coordinate system f ced file form the list below database files csd you have in the Survey Pro application Current North America csd North America csd WS HGH csd R 220 Survey Menu GPS Module Key in Zone Key In Zone Setup The Key In Zone Setup screen is used to pick the zone and datum type for the new zone as well as set the azimuth orientation and grid direction for the new zone Key In Zone Zone Type is where you select what kind of map projection to use for the new zone You zone Type ambert 2 can choose
20. Slope from a Paint more information on the EDM modes that it Start Point 337 Northing 654 996 supports Easting 42 372 Elevation 750 000 e Results This will open the Slope aape nection anaes Staking Results screen listing detailed Catch Point information for the current setup and last shot Note The button is only available from the Store Catch Point screen when using GPS or Remote mode which is accessed after tapping Store gt The button described below selects which information is displayed in the screen from the following options e gt Vertical Map displays a cross sectional view at the current station Note When you tap a map view an expanded view of the same map will fill the screen Note The Vertical Map will show an X at the location of each previous shot This can be useful in determining if the current terrain will never intersect the slope no catch point ss e Horizontal Map displays an overhead view of the job HP Data e gt Shot Data displays the shot data for the last shot Angle Right 5 30 00 zene 30000 The button described below selects the type of slope that will be Slope Dist 50 300 ai used from hinge point to the catch point from the following options R 301 Survey Pro Reference Manual e Automatic Slope selects the slope that is nearest to the current rod position e Force CUT Slope forces all computations to be based on a c
21. Stakeout Menu Rod Elev displays the elevation at the rod s location computed from the last shot Change is used to modify the current design elevation which will also modify the associated CUT FILL value for the current station being staked Shot takes a shot to the prism and computes come go cut fill information Shot data displays the measurements from the last shot Store opens the next screen Store Tape opens the Stake Out Point Tape Offset dialog box Page R 309 where the staked point can be stored that includes a specified offset The default value is the appropriate distance correction to the design point Topo SS stores a side shot using the data from the last shot taken This will not take a new shot Turn Gun available with robotic total station turns the total station toward the design point lt Back returns to the second screen Stake Next gt returns you to the second Stake Road screen without storing a stake point where the Design point is advanced by the Increment value R 291 Survey Pro Reference Manual Offset Staking Screen Six This screen is used to describe the stake point before it is stored and select if the Results Stake Out Point screen should be displayed described next o Point Point is the point name for the stake point Description pinsan ann naa being stored Show Results on OK Description is the
22. The Inverse Point to Line screen computes the perpendicular offset distance and direction from a known point to a continuous line defined by two points or one point and a direction Inverse Point is the known point that the offset information to a specified line is computed Begin Station is the beginning station value that corresponds with the Start of Line which is used to compute the inverse station in the results Start of Line is the first point that defines the line from which the offset is computed gt Point gt Direction is the second point or known direction that defines the line from which the offset is computed dew pal synsay in M Store Point When checked will store the coordinates for the point located on the specified line tangent to the offset Solve will compute the distance and direction of the offset from the known point perpendicular to the specified line Results Inv Station is the station on the specified line where the perpendicular offset occurs starting from the Begin Station Offset is the horizontal distance of the perpendicular offset between the Inverse point and specified line Offset is indicates if the Inverse point is located to the Right Left or on the specified line as you occupy Point 1 and face the second point or direction of the line Azimuth pt to line is the azimuth of the offset from the Inverse point toward the specified line
23. opens the Choose Polyline screen where a polyline can be selected that defines No boundary the boundary of the DTM Exclude points or breaklines outside of the boundary from DTM Layer Exclude points will move any points that Discard the boundary when a new point or exist outside the selected boundary to the breakline outside of the boundary is added Auxiliary layer Ifa point is later stored to DTM Layer outside the boundary they will also be moved to the Auxiliary layer Discard the boundary will initially move any points that exist outside the boundary to the Auxiliary layer If a point is later stored outside the boundary the selected boundary is automatically unselected Clear will unselect the selected boundary and move it to the Auxiliary layer R 80 Ei eRilecin AM o G D Select DTM Layer Job Menu Breaklines will open the Add Edit Break lines screen where DTM break lines can be added or edited Points will open the Points on DTM Layer screen where the points on the DTM layer can be viewed new points can be imported and existing points can be deleted moved to the Auxiliary layer 3D View will open the 3D View screen where the DTM can be viewed from any angle Layers for Staking DIM The Layers for Staking DTM screen is used to select the non reference DTM layer and an optional layer where invalid objects are stored Layer Ra Select DTM Layer is the
24. s a dialog box wher station can be entered Once amp is tapped the Seg profile at the entered location is shown in the Road Profiles screen Prof opens the profile Details screen and lists several details about the road s cross sectional profile at the current station Seg opens the segment Details screen and lists information related to the selected segment at the current station Road Alignment Properties Screen Roads Edit Roads New or Edit Road Set PoB The Road Alignment Properties screen is used to change information about the current alignment R 407 Survey Pro Reference Manual Description is the name of the current ReereCnmcnmorica amp amp alignment A new name can be assigned to the alignment from this field Description Point Location depending how this button is toggled you can change the POB of i Heute ooo it i the alignment by entering a new point number East 3000 0 ift or new coordinates Elev io it fe Start Station replaces the existing starting SS eee ha station of the alignment with the starting station entered here The Templates Card New or Edit The Templates card of the New Road screen is used to add existing templates to the road The screen displays a list of left and right templates that are currently assigned to the road When a particular template is selected a cross sectional
25. slope staking the road a Station Interval 25 0 ift Station is the station to be slope staked H Map Map Slopes Fill Hinge Points q 4 gt Station I nterval specifies how far to advance l Segment Type Line from the current station to the next station Templates Next Station advances the current station by Left T4 the Station Interval Right T1 Note If the Stake Corners option is selected in the Stakeout Settings screen the Next Station button will also stop at any horizontal or vertical alignment node and the beginning and end of any widening and super elevation that falls within the interval Backsight opens the Backsight Setup screen Page R 118 lt Back returns to the previous screen H Map Card The H Map card displays information about the horizontal details of the road at the current station Segment Type displays the type of horizontal section at the current station Left Right is the description of the left and right templates that are being used at the current station V Map Card The V Map card displays a graphic of the cross sectional profile of the road at the current station The hinge points and slopes are also displayed R 422 Lett _ Cut Slope bo _ Fill Slope ko Lett Right H Map v Map Slopes Fill Hinge Points Slopes Fill Hinge Points Cut Hinge Points 4 gt Pick
26. 5 009 88 ift the stake location this button will take a final Slate eet shot before proceeding to the next Stake Point Horiz Dist 10 000 Vert Dist 1 500 screen Screen Three described above Update HR on Instrument HF 17 00 ift 7 Take Final Shot gt R 278 Stakeout Menu Remote Staking Solve gt Performing stake out in remote mode is different from running in a non remote mode because the feedback is continuous and provided in the rod s point of view instead of the total station s point of view When staking in remote mode the first four shots taken in a row where no distance is returned will result in a Remote Staking out im Standby beep to warn that the instrument has possibly lost track of the prism 11 225 8 606 There are three different graphic displays of 0 045 the Remote Staking screen depending on how close the rod is to the stake point Each screen is shown here F Design Location Current Rod Location Done when you are satisfied with the Direction to Gun ea location of the prism this button will open the Stake Point screen see Page R 274 Display when prism is more than where the staked point can be stored 3 meters from the target Remote Staking P ir x Remote Staking To ow x Standby Standby 2 903 g g 0 000 4 306 0 000 0 022 0 000 Fa Design Location Fa Design Location Ei current Rod Location P a BQ current Rod Location D E Dire
27. Map The Map card is used to determine which intersection points were computed and are labeled with a XX and You can then return to the Input card to select which of these points to store Intersection a PA T t den B R 360 Cogo Menu Offset Line The Offset Line screen is used to view store a polyline or store an alignment that is at a specified perpendicular offset to an existing set of points a polyline or an alignment Tap Line allows you to tap an existing polyline or alignment that the offset will be computed from To From Opens the Point List screen Page R 443 where a point list can be created Offset defines the offset distance and which ea o side the offset occurs The right or left side is eee fo x referenced from the first point that defines the n a e View result only allows you to view the resulting line in the Map view without saving anything Offset Line To a Center Line to Offset EA J ot ne B andur Gi View result only e Save to job as an alignment when checked the computed offset line will be saved as a new alignment under the name specified in the Description field e Save to job as a Polyline when checked the computed offset line will be saved as a new polyline under the name specified in the Description field Note Spiral curves cannot be generated in a new offset alignment If the original centerline contains any sp
28. Survey Menu GPS Module Projection Details Projection Details Region US State Plane 1983 Zone Nevada East 2701 Projection Parameters gt fone Parameters zone Record Nevada East 2701 zone Type Transverse Mercator Origin Lat 34 45 00 00000 N 115 35 00 00000 Wi Save System to Database Save System To Database will save the current projection record to a coordinate system database file First the current database file is checked for a matching record and if found you will be prompted that you need not save the current coordinate system If no matching record is found then the current coordinate system will be saved as a new record If a different record with the same name is found you will be prompted to rename the current record before you can save Localization Set Zone The Localization Set Zone screen is used to manually configure the parameters of the localization reference stereographic projection It is also used to select the geoid model to use with localization coordinate systems Localization Set Zone Site Name Joboz2 Setup Group 1218124130 Origin Latitude 4453081636 Origin Longitude 123 160595157 Origin Height 213 252457 ift Vse geoid cARIBo Caribbean Pick from Database Reset Projection Zone Site Name displays the name of the current initialized localization zone or the solved localization site Setup Group is where you enter the set up eroup of
29. The Remote Elevation screen is only available when a geoid model is used for the vertical projection the horizontal projection is already solved and the base and rover are set Base Point displays the current base point number and elevation details Info opens detailed information about the base point Add Benchmark Elevation when checked a new point will be created in the job file with the entered elevation We will calculate N E from the GPS measurement lat lng and store the new point with the entered Elevation Elevation When Add Benchmark Elevation is checked this is the elevation of the new point Select Point New Point is the existing or new benchmark point name that you will occupy Set HR displays the current antenna measurement and measure to setting You can change the antenna measurement by entering a new value in the edit box This new antenna height will be sent to the receiver with your next data collection point You can change both the antenna measurement and measure to setting by tapping on Set HRI to open the Receiver Antenna screen Page R 184 Accept Updates the projection with the vertical solution calculated from the control point observation and opens the Adjust with R 229 Survey Pro Reference Manual Projection wizard to update all job file points including the base point with the latest vertical solution Occupy Benchmark opens the Occupy Control Point screen
30. a la eles cee eco If Yes is displayed in the H or V column it ware Hv wer eer ver indicates the corresponding control point will EE WES SEE aS Ee be included in the horizontal or vertical Yes 0 035 0 195 localization solution respectively These can 1e ae eae nan PE DO Lane a be toggled between Yes included or blank not included by tapping them If the blunder Se detector detected any poor quality control it will automatically turn off that control before this screen opens The possible outcomes of the solve localization and blunder detection are e Green Light If the localization solved and no blunders were detected you will see a green light and the status line will R 251 Survey Pro Reference Manual show the root mean squared RMS error of the horizontal and vertical solution e Yellow Warning Triangle If the localization solved and no blunders were detected but some of the points used have a large residual error you will see a yellow triangle and the status line will show the point with the largest horizontal and or vertical residual e Red Stop Sign If the localization solved and blunders were detected that could not be clearly identified or if you were prompted to remove blunders and you said no then you will see a red stop sign and the status line will indicate there are possible blunders in the solution e Yellow Arrow If the localization solved but the control points are not spaced fa
31. added to your list of known receiver Activate Selected Receiver makes the selected receiver the currently active receiver in Survey Pro Delete Deletes the selected receiver profile from the list of known receivers Import imports an receiver profile from a file that was previously loaded on the data collector Export saves the selected receiver profile to a file which can then be transferred to another data collector and then imported Receiver Setup or or Connect to Receiver or Connect to Receiver The Receiver Setup screen is used to create or modify a receiver rofile Receiver Setup OK P eae Name The name of the receiver to appear in your known receiver list Brand Trimble Brand The brand of this receiver Model Trimble 5800 Model The model of this receiver DZ Port Bluetooth Device 5800 0440117721 Trimble 008037 gt Data Collector Port The data collector port used to communicate with the receiver Defaults Bluetooth Refresh List R 95 Survey Pro Reference Manual Note Some receivers support Bluetooth wireless communication If the data collector is set to use Bluetooth then the next two settings are hidden Baud Rate the baud rate used for data collector to receiver communications Parity the parity used for data collector to receiver communication Defaults sets the communication parameters to the default for this brand and model Aut
32. cleared for the point and the previous screen is open If Nol we leave the control point source and go back to the selection screen Finish See the section on Finish below Multiple Point Results This screen displays the values to be used to create the new GPS control points New GPS Control Points to be Created For GPS Import Control all of the selected points this list box shows the New GPS Control Points to be Created new NEE location the existing LLH location ne GPSI 102 175 851 2 200 023 108 79 227 and the existing NEE location GPS 102 175 851 2 280 023 108 79 227 Show Details Shows the same details for the al o mBo ee selected point as the Single Point Results screen shows described above Tap Finish to create the control points listed above and then take the following action Re Enter Clears the control point source for the selected point in the list box and returns to the previous screen lt Back Returns to the selection screen Finish See the section on Finish below Finish The finish behavior will be one of three cases 1 Create the control points solve the localization with all job file control points launch the projection readjust wizard and apply the updated localization to the map projection zone 2 Create the control points and open the solve localization wizard 3 Create the GPS control points and exit the wizard R 234 Survey Menu GPS Module Receiv
33. computed coordinates for the occupy point PT 422 N 5 000 000 E 5 000 000 Ele 100 000 Description is the desired description for the T point that will be stored Description This point will be set as your new Occupy Point stores the new point and automatically sets the point as the current occupy point exits the dialog without storing a new point Results Resection OC N is the computed northing of the Occupy Point OC E is the computed easting of the Occupy Point OC Z is the computed elevation of the Occupy Point Residuals dRMS is the average distance residual from all shots performed aRMS is the average horizontal angle residual from all shots performed FS is the foresight name dHD is the distance difference of the measured shot and the computed shot d H orizontal D elta dHA is the angle difference of the measured shot and the computed shot d H orizontal A ngle R 154 Remote Elevation Known Elevation Is C Occupy Survey Menu Conventional Mode Remote Elevation The Remote Elevation screen will compute the elevation for the occupy point by shooting a foresight with a known elevation or it will compute the elevation for a foresight when the occupy elevation is known Known Elevation Is is where you specify if the Occupy point or the Foresight point has a C Foresight known elevation Elevation ly Elevation is the known elevation for the Shoot X sme Pt
34. ey Conventional Te GPS and Leveling Tapping this icon will open a list of options to do any of the following Conventional Switch to Leveling nl Eran e Switch to another instrument mode e Select a different instrument profile e Quickly access the Instrument Settings screen Page R 38 Map View A map view of the current job can be displayed by tapping the button This screen is described on Page R 444 OK amp This button performs the desired action then closes the current screen Cancel amp This button is red in color and closes the current screen without performing the action intended by the screen Close amp This button is green in color and closes the current screen Settings This button opens the Settings screen associated with the current screen R 4 Main Menu GPS Status This is used to view the current status and access the settings for a GPS receiver when using the GeoLock feature Page R 162 It is only available from the Remote Control and Remote Shot screens when using a Trimble or Geodimeter robotic total station File Menu The File Menu contains routines to transfer files between the data collector and another device Open New Save As Import Export Control Panel Backup Restore Job Transfer Register Modules About Survey Pro Exit Tomoe Huug Oo Pe Survey Pro Reference Manual Open New The Open New screen is used to open an existing j
35. gt is displayed when the point list has changed Tapping solve will recalculate the parameters and display new residuals or misclosures for the control point list Next gt advances to the Solve Localization Results screen R 212 Survey Menu GPS Module Solve Localization Manual Parameters The Solve Localization Manual Parameters screen is used to input localization horizontal and vertical parameters by hand This can be done to copy a localization solution between data collectors in the field or to recreate a localization solution from a raw data printout Horizontal Card The Horizontal card is used to manually enter Solve Localization the six parameters of the horizontal Horizontal Yertical localization solution Scale Scale is where you enter the scale factor Rotation Rotation is where you enter the rotation angle Translation Origin j j Translation N E is where you enter the M M horizontal shift N E from the intermediate E E map projection to the local coordinate system Origin N E is where you enter the horizontal coordinate N E of the localization control points Vertical Card The Vertical card is used to manually enter the five parameters of the vertical localization solution Slope N is where you enter the slope of the inclined plane along the local north grid axis in parts per million Solve Localization Horizontal Vertical Slope N 6 953 022F pam Slope E
36. indicates if the rod must Slopecist 9 993 Topo SS move to the right or left from the total station s Stage Wee point of view EDM This button can be toggled to shoot in various EDM modes The options available depend on the total station being used Consult the total station s documentation for more information on the EDM modes that it supports CUT FILL displays the required amount of cut or fill to bring the stake point to the design point s elevation Rod Elev displays the elevation at the rod s location computed from the last shot R 276 Stakeout Menu Change is used to modify the current design elevation which will also modify the associated CUT FILL value for the current station being staked Shot takes a shot to the prism and computes come go cut fill information Shot data displays the measurements from the last shot Store stores the stake point Store Tape opens the Stake Out Point Tape Offset dialog box Page R 309 where the staked point can be stored that includes a specified offset The default value is the appropriate distance correction to the design point Topo SS stores a side shot using the data from the last shot taken This will not take a new shot Turn Gun available with robotic total station turns the total station toward the design point lt Back returns to the second screen Stake Next gt returns you to
37. is where you enter the slope of the Slope E 27 45459364 ppm inclined plane along the local east grid axis in Separation 17 921706 m m parts per million Origin North 9063 100904 m m Separation is where you enter the separation between the inclined plane and the local elevation Origin N E is where you enter the local origin north east of the inclined plane Solve gt updates the localization solution using the values entered on the Horizontal and or Vertical cards Origin East 3169 060008 m m R 213 Survey Pro Reference Manual Localization Calculator This sub section describes a feature available only in Ground TDS Localization mode Solve Localization The Localization Calculator is used to enter the Horizontal vertical horizontal localization parameters using the Scale 1 000006523 Calc Scale pre Survey Pro 3 5 procedure Rotation 1 123392198 Cale Rotation Scale is where you enter the scale factor used to transform distances on the localization Base Station Local Coordinate mapping plane to your project coordinate North 7647 791842 m tem Occupy Control East 5229 385343 rm Note Using versions of Survey Pro after 3 5 the localization scale should be very close to 1 0 See the user s manual for a more detailed explanation of localization scale values Rotation is where you enter the rotation angle used to transform the orientation of the local
38. location R 47 Survey Pro Reference Manual Note If the specified offset extends beyond the end of the road profile the cut fill value is always computed from the design elevation of the node you are staking to M Write Cut Sheet Data Only No Store Point When checked as built points are not stored to the JOB file when staking points only the raw data is written to the RAW file M View from Gun to Rod non remote When checked the move left or right information will be presented from the rod person s point of view When unchecked it will be presented from the total station s point of view This option only applies when a robotic total station is selected in the Instrument Settings M View from Rod to Gun remote When checked the move left or right information will be presented from the rod person s point of view When unchecked it will be presented from the total station s point of view This option only applies when a non robot total station is selected in the Instrument Settings M Prompt for Layer When checked a prompt to select a layer will appear before any new point is stored from only the routines under the Stakeout menu M Prompt for Attributes When checked a prompt to select feature information will appear before any new point is stored from only the routines under the Stakeout menu This also requires that a feature file be selected from the Files Settings card described earlier Note There i
39. specified interval by using the and buttons and then re computed with the button End Elevation is the elevation at the point where you want to compute the station Layout performs the computation and displays the results Results Station is the current station Elevation is the elevation for the current station R 394 Curve Menu Spiral The Spiral screen will compute the details of a spiral curve given the spiral length and radius ae z Spiral Length e Solve computes the details of the spiral curve Layout opens the Spiral Layout screen Page R 396 where the location of stations on the spiral curve can be computed Traverse opens the Traverse on Spiral screen Page R 397 Spiral length is the length of the spiral curve Radius is the circular curve radius pm D i i tu fa Results X of Throw is the distance along the tangent where a perpendicular line intersects with the radius point Y of Throw is the minimum distance between the tangent and the extended circular curve X is the distance from the TS to the SC along the tangent Y is distance from the SC to the tangent Delta is the angle between the tangent and the line between the PI and SC R 395 Survey Pro Reference Manual Spiral Layout The Spiral Layout screen is used to compute station locations on a spiral curve Radius is the radius of the circular cu
40. such as 11 00 2 Likewise when keying in an ahead station you must append it with a 2 to indicate it is an ahead station Road Name Displays the name of the current ae alignment Back Defines the stationing on the back Back alignment where the stationing change occurs Ahead Ahead Defines what the new stationing is for the same location defined in the Back field Forward Direction Increase O Decrease Increase indicates the stationing should increase as you move forward past the location where the stationing changes Decrease indicates the stationing should decrease as you move forward past the location where the stationing changes Note When Stake Corners Not J ust Even Intervals is checked in the Stakeout settings the location where the stationing change occurs is considered a corner and will be included as you advance R 427 Adjust Menu The Adjust Menu contains routines to perform a variety of adjustments A Scale B Translate C Rotate D Traverse Adjust R 429 Survey Pro Reference Manual Scale The Scale screen will scale the distances of a range of points relative to a specified base point This is useful to correct a survey where a scale factor was inadvertently applied during data collection Tap Points allows you to select points by tapping them from a map view 5 points selected NE To From Opens the Point List screen Page R 443 where
41. will hide all the lines that occur behind other surfaces in the La 3D View The image shown here is identical to the TE aoan image shown on Page R 85 except the hidden lines E caine AN FR TS are not removed it f AVi VN ANY a it CH TK yi uN WN W i M Display the Difference This applies only to DTM stakeout When checked the vertical portion z axis of the 3D View screen is computed by the elevation differences between the non reference DTM surface and the reference DTM surface This will result in any objects that occur above or below the reference DTM to clearly stand out as hills and valleys and the volume information provided in the 3D View screen will be between the staked points and the reference DTM ew CZ When unchecked the Datum field can be set to a reference elevation Cut and fill volumes in the 3D View screen will then be based on the difference of a horizontal plane at the elevation specified here and the non reference DTM surface Datum When the Display the Difference checkbox is unchecked cut and fill volumes will be computed in the 3D View screen based on the difference of a horizontal plane at the elevation specified here and the staked points View Direction from view point to the center allows you to specify the exact horizontal and vertical angle in which to view the DTM R 86 Job Menu Manage Layers The Manage Layers screen is used to manage the layers for the cu
42. will import be imported to points alignments and parcels to layers Layer Options named by the group name for the data in the C On specified layer source file If the group name is an invalid Layer Points layer name e g it is empty or contains invalid characters the data will be stored to the active layer Next gt opens the second configuration screen O On different layers by groups Use group name as layer name npr pol ylines augue ana parcels Import Land ML File When this is checked polylines alignments Eae and parcels will be imported as well as the Import polylines alignments and parcels points When unchecked only the points will Points will always be imported be imported _ Import parcels to the specified layer fi Layer Import parcels to the specified layer When this is checked imported parcels will be stored _ rPaint and Line Descriptions to the selected layer If unchecked parcels will Use As Line Description be stored to the layer specified in the previous screen i P Use AS Point Description For more information on how parcels are imported consult the User s Manual Point and Line Descriptions You can select what information to use as the description for imported lines and points in the corresponding two fields R 20 File Menu Lines can either be assigned the name or description from the source file and points can either be assigned the description or code from
43. 0 454007 I 70 30 0 661095 Michigan N 87 00 0 722790 C 84 20 0 706407 S 84 20 0 680529 Minnesota N 93 06 0 741220 C 94 15 0 723388 S 84 20 0 700928 Montana N 109 30 0 746452 C 109 30 0 733354 S 109 30 0 714901 Nebraska N 100 00 0 673451 S 99 30 0 656076 nZ n Zn Zna z z jnaginanrkwne OV Z Reference Manual New York 74 00 0 654082 Long Island S 100 30 0 729383 S 82 30 0 634520 S 98 00 0 567617 S 120 30 0 684147 Pennsylvania N 77 45 0 661540 S 77 45 0 648793 South Carolina N 81 00 0 564497 S 81 00 0 544652 South Dakota N 100 00 0 707738 S 100 20 0 689852 0 579536 0 545394 0 515059 0 489913 0 454007 0 659355 0 640579 0 612687 0 624118 0 606925 0 744520 0 726396 0 637773 0 618195 0 721371 0 705577 0 687103 Utah Virginia Washington West Virginia Wisconsin Index 2 peg test csuscscenacescteuse R 268 procedure 0ccc eee 185 2D 3D points 000 42 DID VIEW i n R 85 3D view settings R 85 A about Survey Pro R 33 add edit break lines102 R 82 adjust with projection274 R 236 projection calculator 278 prompt adjust 277 resultin 278 select coordinate system276 select points 06 275 adjustment 066 R 269 angle 162 164 R 436 compass rulel63 164 R 437 rotate 161 R 433 scale wo eee 158 R 430 translate 159 R 431 alignment properties R 407 ali
44. 2 0 mM to Slant measure Starting a Static Session During timed stop and go session Store point in is used to select how to store this session You will always get a session recorded in the post processing log file Select Receiver and job file to store a point record in the Survey Pro JOB file as well By default post processing points will go on the layer selected on the Job Settings Post Process screen Note If you are using this screen with the RTK rover you can only store points in the post processing log file from this screen Use the RTK Data Collection screen to store points in Survey Pro simultaneously with points logged to the post processing file Point or Site ID is where you enter the station name for the static session or stop and go point R 202 Survey Menu GPS Module Note If you are storing this point in Survey Pro the screen will look like the picture above and you can pick points using the Survey Pro compound point control If you choose an existing point you will be prompted to rename or overwrite just like RTK data collection If you are storing this point in the receiver file only then the point control is replaced with a simple edit box When storing to receiver only you can reuse an existing point name without modifying that point in the Survey Pro job file Description is where you enter the description for the static session or stop and go point Log Until Stop is where you sele
45. AdU Tee aa 434 M iscelaneous Screens sssssssssssnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 439 FASE SSUES ea EN 440 Create POINTS SCOOT a aaa a 440 Trimble Slant HR gt HR l nesssssssssssssssnnnnnnnnnnnnnrnnnnnnnnrnnnnns 441 Convert Slant HI toH leenena 441 QUICK PCE CUO aana 442 POINCLISCEGIO neran a a 443 MDNI Na 444 Map Display ODUON Sanica 446 Manage BasemMaDSs erson a E taut 447 EGE BASING S a Ea a Ean A 448 Smart Targets sisses a a as 449 Disable TOUCN SCrECN ccscccssccsssseceeeeeeeeeeueeeeeeessssesseseeneanees 453 Appendix A Transverse Mercator ZONGS cccccccsscesssscssseseeeeesseeseeeenneeeens A 1 Lambert Zones eee nee ane oe ee ee Oem Oe See A 2 Welcome Congratulations on your decision to purchase a Tripod Data Systems product TDS is serious about providing the best possible products to our customers and know that you are serious about your tools We are proud to welcome you to the TDS family The TDS Survey Pro team is continually improving and updating Survey Pro Please take a few minutes to register your copy so that you will be eligible for upgrades You can do this either by completing and returning the product registration card or by visiting our Web site www tdsway com Main Menu a A The Main Menu is the starting point where Ham il AE ia im lat os a TO A 2 all the other Survey Pro screens described in a Open New this manual are accessed The area at the top
46. Adjust only points with geodetic coordinates use this setting when you want to update only geodetic points The method used to adjust geodetic points is described on the Select Points page Note The display of these controls will vary depending on the difference between the old and new coordinate system First if you change the coordinate system in only one dimension the display title will indicate which dimension the setting is for Second depending on how you change the coordinate system the option to adjust all or geodetic only may or may not be available If the choice is not available you will see some text describing which points will be adjusted Third if you change both dimensions and only one dimension would allow this choice to be active then the display title will indicate which dimension the setting is for Do Not Adjust Job is where you choose to not adjust the job points with this change of coordinate system Details displays a description of the change between the two coordinate system records Adjust with Projection Results The Adjust with Projection Results screen is used to preview the results of the adjustment Adjust With Projection E before it is applied to the job file points The following points would be updated Show All Points when checked the results list will show all points selected for the adjustment including points that are not adjusted or which did not change location with the adjust
47. BS Point gt BS Direction is the point or direction of the backsight where the total station is facing Fixed HR at Backsight is selected when a second prism is set up over the backsight The rod height entered here is then used independently of the other rod height when checking the backsight by distance and when shooting the backsight during repetition shots Backsight Circle displays the backsight circle value which is set using the Backsight Circle button described below R 118 Survey Menu Conventional Mode Note The backsight circle angle is subtracted from all horizontal angles that are read during data collection and the resulting points are adjusted accordingly This is usually only done when surveying in true azimuths This value can be change from the Backsight Circle or Backsight Solved screens Current BS Direction displays the azimuth of the current backsight Check opens the Check Backsight dialog box Page R 122 which is used to help confirm that the total station is facing the correct backsight This routine can also be performed from the Backsight Solved screen Circle opens the Backsight Circle dialog box Page R 123 where the backsight circle can be changed or the circle reading on the total station can be set remotely without re solving the backsight This function will automatically be available after solving the first Backsight Setup screen Solve solves the
48. Backsight opens the Backsight Setup screen Page R 118 lt Back returns to the previous screen Solve gt opens the next screen Offset Staking Screen Four The fourth Offset Staking screen displays the information needed to aim the total station toward the selected design point Station displays the current station and section of the roadway being staked and the current line segment type from the polyline that describes the centerline If staking the center and an offset was specified To L or To R is also displayed to indicate if the offset is to the left or right of the centerline respectively Slope 3 000 610 93 59 Offset displays the offset that is applied to the design point OCC a57 HE Sob 2S 0S0 00 Circle Zero Slope displays the slope of the road at the section being staked From Gun to Design Point displays the angle and distance information from the total station to the design point plus offset if specified Circle Zero is used to modify the circle on the total station so that the angle right reading will be zero when it is facing the current target which can sometimes be easier than turning to an obscure angle value When this button is tapped the following actions will occur R 289 Survey Pro Reference Manual 1 Anew backsight circle value is computed sent to the instrument and stored in the raw data 2 The Angle Right value is changed to zero
49. CONE ANJE cena A 364 COMPUTE ATO sna E wvetnales 365 TELA GIS SOUION Sarea 366 Map CCG sisistindecuadutdialietasei win igndwasdiakaies deastutnanainndpsedienatarnieieli 367 Predetermined Area sssssssssssssrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrinrrnnrrnrrrrrrrrrrrrrnrns 370 AD MDSD ZA nanna ee eC 372 as BY 727 0 6 AY aa eee men rn Or aCe cP de 373 AJU CONVE SION eakas a daia 374 Curve Men ivansccsaacteatiisincanecersccesiicswsSceuaniiicadeanestentaaceueaeanistcaimanettecancnns 375 C rve SONU OIA sagrei eiriaa a aai ee dou ces 376 Known PI and Tangents sseesssesssessenserresrrnsrrnnrrrnsrensrnnn 378 Three Point CUNY C sccsstcctive diacetate Uieueuentteeeuticaeieceed 379 Compute Radius POIT aisciai ana 381 Line Tangent to CIrcle ccscccsssscssssecssseessseessseessseeseseeees 383 CUrve Loyo tosca seatcsdincastebedascetesienicdieanccactancte 384 Traver seon CUNO arna 388 ParapolG C UFV Oneroa a a a 390 Parapolic LayOU tsaa AO 392 vi SU aIG AE GLOGS a a n 394 O es E E a 395 SPIA Say OU Tana 396 TRAVELS on Spirala a aA 397 FS M enU naian aaa aaa a aaa 399 Add EGIL TEMP lal nn 400 EGIAN S naa a a 403 POG ECIG ROS otic ctctedcstacbtcncracc tte ecetectiancseeeeeetencnass 403 Rad SUK COG aaraa a 415 ROaQ SIONE SAKIN koaren a 421 Road Station and OFFSEC wc ececcsceececccseeeeeeeeesssssseeseeeceetteneees 424 Stat ON E GUAU ON eanan 427 AdJuUSEM ENU scies a a ai 429 2 Gi e E AE E E EEE TEE EAE E N me 430 FranS e E 431 ROEE TEE T 433 Trag Sc
50. D for the current foresight Results Map Aim Foresight Foresight n 5 001 917 E 4 994 763 z LOO 206 EDM Mode IR Tracking T R 168 Survey Menu Conventional Mode Sky P O t available only when using GeoLock Sky Plot The Sky Plot screen displays the relative location of the visible satellites in the sky as well as if they are being used to calculate a position GPS Status Satellites with a usable signal are shown with red flashing indicators Key The Elevation Mask is the minimum angle above the horizon where locked satellites are used for a solution This area is indicated on S Lock 9 the screen by the inner circle Elev Mask 10 Inside Circle R 169 Survey Pro Reference Manual GeoLock Settings Settings or The GeoLock Settings screen is used to enable disable GeoLock and configure the receiver communication settings Enable GeoLock When checked enables the GeoLock Settings GeoLock feature t Enable GeoLock Model Only Generic NMEA can be selected aes which works for most GPS receivers that Model Generic NMEA output NMEA data Serial Port com2 Serial Port is the serial port on the data Baud pat oeoa e collector used to communicate with the GPS ity IN receiver an Use 30 GeoLock b liable with an L1 Bluetooth Available only when using a H cn a oe le ere nee Bluetooth GPS receiver and Bluetooth is selected f
51. Descriptions When checked allows General Location Geodetic you to change all the selected point s descriptions to the Description entered in the next field Description is the new description that will _ Description E replace the existing descriptions for the Points selected points Change Layers When checked allows you to move the selected points to the layer selected in the next field Layer is the layer where the selected points will be moved R 59 Survey Pro Reference Manual Edit Multiple Points Location Elevation when checked this allows you to enter an elevation that will be applied to all selected points Edit Point General The General card of the Edit Point screen is used to modify the description layer and feature information for the selected point Point Name displays the selected point s Edit Point 374 name General Location Geodetic Description is the description for the selected point Point Layer is the layer for the selected point Description fo Feature displays the feature assigned to the Layer selected point which can be modified using the i Feature lt N Attributes Attributes button sature lt None gt Attributes opens the Point Feature Attributes screen Page R 61 where the feature attributes for the point can be modified R 60 Job Menu Point Feature Attributes General Attributes The Point Fe
52. Direction from Two Points is used to compute the azimuth or bearing from the reference point to the offset point by occupying a second reference point on line with the offset point Once tapped a prompt opens for the name to store the reference point followed by the Occupy Data Points screen Page R 194 After measuring the coordinate at the on line point you will return to the Offset Shots screen where you will be prompted to pick the direction to the offset point gt Vertical Dist is where you enter the zenith angle or vertical distance from the occupied point to the offset point Offset Point is the point name of the offset point to be stored Description is the description of the offset point to be stored Slope Dist Horizontal Dist is where you enter the slope distance or horizontal distance from the occupied point to the offset point Occupy GPS is used to occupy the GPS reference point A prompt for the name of the GPS reference point is followed by the Occupy Data Points screen Page R 194 After measuring the coordinate at the occupied point you will return to the Offset Shots screen where new points can be stored with a direction and distance from the occupied point Shoot Laser triggers the selected active conventional instrument to take a shot to the offset You can select from a number of laser R 193 Survey Pro Reference Manual ranger finders available on the Job S
53. Directions As Azimuth Type International Feet North Azimuth ha The Units Settings card defines the units that are used within the software sent from the total station entered from the keypad and displayed on the screen You can select the following settings for your project from the following dropdown lists Units for Distances defines the units used for length as Meters International Feet or US Survey Feet R 41 Survey Pro Reference Manual Note You can enter a distance in any distance field in units other than what is set for the job by appending the distance value with the following characters e for ftor ift International Feet e usf or usft US Survey Feet e ior in Inches em Meters e cm Centimeters MM Millimeters e Cor ch Chains Once the cursor leaves that field the distance will be converted automatically A space between the value and the unit abbreviation is optional Warning When creating a new job it is important that the Units for Distances field be set to the correct units This allows you to seamlessly switch between different units in mid job Problems can arise if these units are inadvertently set to the incorrect units when entering new data For example assume a new job was created by hand entering a list of coordinates where the job was set to International Feet and the coordinates being entered were in US Survey Feet Now assume you created another new job and correctly set it to
54. E Degree Arc The internal angle equivalent to ee a 100 ft arc length Right Degree Chord The internal angle equivalent to a 100 ft chord length C Left Length The arc length The chord length Tangent The distance from the PC or PT to the PI R 368 Add to Map Cogo Menu Mid Ordinate The distance between the curve and the chord at the center of the curve s length External The minimum distance between the PI and the curve Bearing defines the direction of the curve tangent at the PC Turn defines if the curve turns to the Left or Right while viewing the curve from the PC Point appends the curve to the list Add to Map The Add to Map screen is used to add the existing line and curve data to the current job as a polyline Description is the name that will be assigned t O tothe new polyline that will be added to the Description ee Where Does Your Polyline Begin POB or Location p Location can be used to manually enter the coordinates for the first point of the polyline gt Point can be used to define the starting Point Ra location of the first point of the polyline by an existing point start Storing Points at co O Store Points Store Points is the first point name that will be used for the new points that are needed to add the figure to the current job All additional points will be incremented from this point adds the
55. End Eeo Closed Loop Name A Begin CBM Pt Desc Start Eley 100 0 ift The Adjustment routine allows you to perform a simple arithmetic elevation error adjustment to an existing closed loop You can choose to distribute the error equally to each setup or apply a weighted adjustment proportional to the distance between each setup You also have the option to adjust any side shots that were performed in the selected loop Weigh by of Setups This option divides the computed error equally among each setup selected in the loop Weigh by Length of Setups This option distributes the error where each setup is adjusted by an error proportional to the length between R 269 Survey Pro Reference Manual them so setups that are farther apart will carry a larger portion of the error adjustment than the setups that are closer together Adjust Affected Sideshot Points When checked any side shots will be adjusted by the same amount as the setup that was occupied when the side shots were performed Adjust Loop From Begin To End This option includes every setup of the selected level loop in the error adjustment Adjust Loop From a Specific Point To End This option will only adjust the setups starting from an alternative benchmark specified in the Begin CBM Pt field to the end of the loop Closed Loop Name is where you select the loop to adjust from the dropdown list Only closed loops are available Begin CBM Pt Th
56. Feature opens the Feature Collection screen where various automatic and manual data collection options are available Offset opens the Offset Shots screen where a point can be collected and stored at a specified offset Point opens the Occupy Data Points screen Page R 194 used to occupy and store a new point Feature Collection Screen The Feature Collection screen is used when you wish to set up automated continuous data collection dose Points to be Stored displays the starting point name and description of the group of points to be stored Method is where you select the method of continuous data collection The available methods are described below e Time Interval After accepting the first point additional points will automatically be stored after the specified time interval in seconds has elapsed Each successive point name is incremented to the next available name e Distance Interval 2D 3D After accepting the first point additional points will automatically be stored after traveling the specified horizontal or 3D distance Each successive point name is incremented to the next available name e Hold Still For After accepting the first point additional points are automatically stored when the pole is held in the same spot for the specified interval of time in seconds R 191 Survey Pro Reference Manual e Manual prompt once stores points in the same way as tapping from t
57. Left CUT SI ba Eje eee EDM This button can be toggled to shoot in Des Na 3 000 various EDM modes The options available 11304 depend on the total station being used a Consult the total station s documentation for 4 902 more information on the EDM modes that it A7 supports 0 599 21 177 The first button selects the type of slope that meN will be used between the catch point and hinge point from the following options e Automatic Slope selects the slope based on the current rod position Ifthe rod is above the hinge point a cut slope is computed Ifthe rod is below the hinge point a fill slope is computed e Force CUT Slope forces all computations to be based on a cut slope e gt Force FILL Slope forces all computations to be based on a fill slope The second button selects which information is displayed in the lower corner of the screen from the following options e gt Vertical Map displays a cross sectional view at the current station Note When you tap a map view an expanded view of the same map will fill the screen R 295 Survey Pro Reference Manual Note The Vertical Map will show an X at the location of each previous shot This can be useful in determining if the current terrain will never intersect the slope no catch point e Horizontal Map displays an overhead view of the job e Shot Data displays the shot data for the latest shot Left Right dis
58. Menu Edit Alignments Edit Alignments or Edit Alignments The Edit Alignments screen is used to create an alignment that defines the centerline of a road containing both horizontal and vertical elements Editing alignments is fully described starting on Page R 68 Add Edit Roads The Add Edit Roads screen is used to define your road This is where the templates are added to the alignment and any widenings and super elevations are defined All existing roads are listed in this screen If an existing road is selected the overhead and profile view of that road are also displayed Add Edit Roads New Opens the New Road screen where a new road can be defined Example Edit Opens the Edit Road screen where the selected road can be edited The Edit Road screen is identical to the New Road screen Delete Opens the following prompts to delete the selected road s e Are you sure you want to delete the selected Roads Answering Yes to this prompt will disassociate the selected road s from the current job so they are no longer displayed in the Add Edit Roads screen In this case the road can still be re associated with the routine Answering No to this prompt will return you to the Add Edit Roads screen without making any changes R 403 Survey Pro Reference Manual e Delete alignment a ignment name Answering Yes to this prompt will delete the selected alignment s from the current job s
59. R 441 SD ZA to HD VD R 373 slope stakingR 293 R 299 R select point s 16 R 443 339 Server Mode annii R 31 VOAG aa R R 421 set origin EE E 256 smart targets 19 R 449 setting SNapshot ccceeeeseeeeeees R 29 Basic GPS 066 R 110 solar observation 127 R 157 settings Lestat S T R 94 solve localization 247 connections R 110 spiral and offsetR 310 R 342 data modem R 98 spiral curve eee R 395 date time R 54 R 55 spiral curve layout 154 E EEIE EES R 44 spiral layout R 396 PORTING eaaa R 43 stake curve and offset R 306 general ceecee R 56 stake DTM 97 R 319 R 345 instrument R 36 stake line and offset R 303 Javad neersien R 104 stake list of points aas R 280 job sea eaa e a EE n 8 stake offset R 286 level notes sessen R 260 stake points R 274 leveling inn algeesiseinmiasauie cate R 50 remote mode R 279 measure mode R 106 stake spiral and offset R 310 post processing 235 R 107 stake to line R 282 R 336 WAC1O Shai cdi ies Mutaabistant R 113 remote mode R 285 receiver 232 305 R 94 SUAKECOUL aoan 65 repetition 114 R 53 road seiiicoviectvlecessodaines R 415 REPE rire ee aoe eee 235 stakeout settings Silent ahs R 47 rxR 97 start Basic GPS surveyR 246 stakeout c cece R 47 start Basic GPS survey wizard SUTVEY
60. Segments Used For Fill Slope Roads Menu Slopes Card ldap The Slopes card is used to specify the cut and fill Right mites ors te be aa ig Tae ees ocation of the catch point e default values Eee Ea are the slopes stored in the template for the Fill Slope ko section being staked To override a default slope check the appropriate box and key in the new slope The new slope entered will always be used regardless of the values stored in the templates Changes to slopes will be reflected in the V Map card graphic Cut Slope is the left and right slope respectively used when the terrain requires a cut the hinge point is located below the terrain s surface Fill Slope is the left and right slope respectively used when the terrain requires a fill the hinge point is located above the terrain s surface Cut Fill Hinge Points Cards The Fill Hinge Points tab and the Cut Hinge Points tab are used to select the segment where you want the hinge point location to be computed from in situations requiring a fill or a cut respectively The hinge point will occur at the node of the selected segment furthest from the centerline The hinge point can also be defined at different segments for the left and right sides of the road Sidewalk Ditch Ex Left Right is the specified left and right segment respectively to compute the hinge point Changes to these fields will be reflected in the V
61. Serial Port Baudrate 9600 Par ity Mone Receiver Settings Data Modem G Moder Configure Serial Serial Port 1 Modern Settings Serial Port Channel oO 2 Sensitivity Medium Pac Crest or OEM Radio Cell Phone or IP Modem Data Modem is where you select the type of modem There will be several options here depending on your brand and model If the R 98 Job Menu GPS Module modem you are using is not in the list of known devices you can choose Generic Serial to set the communication parameters to work with just about any external data modem Serial Port displays the current settings for communication between the receiver and the modem This includes Baud Rate displays the baud rate the receiver will use to communicate with the modem Parity displays the parity the receiver will use to communicate with the modem Serial Port displays the serial port the receiver will use to communicate with the modem Note The following settings will vary depending on your choice of modem You may see one of the following Configure Serial Configure Opens the Modem Serial Comms screen Page R 100 where you can change the settings for communication between the receiver and the data modem Modem Settings Displays the settings last used by Survey Pro for this modem type This includes Channel Displays the last radio channel when applicable Sensitivity Displays the last radio sensitivi
62. Sky Plot opens the Sky Plot screen Page R 169 e Settings opens the GeoLock Settings screen Page R 170 e Reset Resets the GPS localization solution e Sats is an output only field that will display one of the following messages which will change along with the color of the satellite icon o green icon On Ready GeoLock is active and a localization solution exists o yellow icon On Collecting Data GeoLock is active but a localization solution does not yet exist o red icon No GPS Data or GeoLock requires Backsight set No NMEA data is available or the backsight has not yet been set o gray icon Off GeoLock is not enabled Results Card The Results card displays live angle data from the total station and live distance data is displayed depending on the current EDM mode HD VD ZA SD Toggles the data displayed from the total station between HA HD and VD or HA ZA and SD R 164 MEASURING Survey Menu Conventional Mode Video Card This feature is only available when using a supported total station with a USB or supported radio connection and only on data collectors running Windows Mobile 5 The Video card displays a live video image from the total station and allows you to adjust the camera video settings take a photo or turn the Map Aim IKO ea total station Tapping anywhere within the video image will turn the total station to that location Existing points are overla
63. Taplin To From Opens the Point List screen Page R 443 where a point list can be created Backsight opens the Backsight Setup screen Page R 118 OCC 1 HI 5 50 BS 0top og Stake gt takes you to the second Stake Points screen described below Begin Station ooo oo R 282 Stakeout Menu Stake to Line Screen Two The second screen is where the staking is performed The graphic display of this screen will change depending on how close the rod is to the specified line The initial screen that is displayed before a shot is performed shows the position of the total station the line of the backsight and the specified line to stake Each type of graphic is displayed below Stake to Line 9 ar HR is the rod length HR 6 000 ift E lv Results Meas EDM This button can be toggled to shoot in EDM ae ead various EDM modes The options available Heer GrLine depend on the total station being used Consult the total station s documentation for more information on the EDM modes that it supports BACK FORWARD is the distance that the rod must travel BACK away from the total station or FORWARD toward the total station in order to occupy the specified line LEFT of Line RIGHT of Line ON LINE is displayed if the rod is to the left or right side of the line or is on the line The LEFT and RIGHT side is determined as if occupying the Start Point and facing the Fores
64. This is only available while taking Face 1 side shots for the first set Shoot BS is used to shoot the current point If the shot was already performed the button will be enabled Tapping again will throw out the results of the last shot and re shoot it Next gt is used to take the next required shot in the routine The button label will contain additional information to help indicate which shot is required next R 133 Survey Pro Reference Manual Distance Offset Shot The Distance Offset screen is used to store a new point that is a known distance away from the rod location This screen is useful when the rod cannot occupy the new point s location a is a shortcut to the Surveying Settings screens Page R 45 Distance Offset OCC 1 HI 5 50 ES 410 GF boon Foresight is the point name that will be er A stored cc Side 1 Left Right direction From GUN to ROD ones OL F HR is the length of the rod P oer e e opens the Smart Target options Page R Elevation Offset e Offset is the offset distance that is to the left when L is selected or right when R is selected of the prism l from the total station s point of view 3 ft right DJa 1 ft back Horz Dist Offset is the offset distance that is beyond the prism positive value or in front of the prism negative value from the total station s point of view Elevation Offset is the offset distance that is below the prism neg
65. US Survey Feet If you then imported the hand entered points from the other job they would be converted to different units when no conversion should have taken place Depending on the magnitude of the imported coordinates the error after the conversion could be significant Units for Angles defines the units used for angles as Degrees or Grads gons Display Directions as will display directions as a Bearing or Azimuth Azimuth type defines if you are using a North Azimuth or a South Azimuth R 42 Job Menu Format Settings The Format Settings card defines the number of places beyond the decimal point that are displayed for various values in all screens and how stations are defined All internal calculations are performed using full precision Northings Eastings will allow you to display Settings from zero to six places passed the decimal point for northing and easting values Morthings Eastings i Elevations allows you to display from zero to Elevations six places passed the decimal point for Sq Feet Meters 1 234 125 ig elevations 7 Acres Hectares Sq feet meters allows you to display from Distances Lec4 les zero to four places passed the decimal point for Angles Hla square feet or square meter values Station uda Acres Hectares allows you to display from zero to four places passed the decimal point for acre or hectare values Distances allows you to
66. WEST displays the distance the rover must move in an east or west direction to reach the design point R 335 Survey Pro Reference Manual Note The Display Directions As field in the Stakeout Settings screen configures the format for the text that directs you to the design point CUT FILL displays the required cut or fill between the current elevation and the design point Ref 0 00 00 opens a screen where you can select a reference azimuth or point which will then be displayed on the navigation graphic as a blue line to assist in orienting yourself When Auto Snap to Reference When Close is checked in this screen and when using the navigation method the navigation method will automatically switch to the method when you are within 3 meters of the design point Checking this box while in using the navigation method has no effect gt OCCUPYING ROVING switches from ROVING to OCCUPYING mode When ROVING the receiver is in dynamic mode and will calculate your position as you move to the point When OCCUPYING the receiver is switched to static mode depending on settings and will calculate the most precise position for the staked point Topo SS allows you to store a side shot measurement during stake out Accept opens the third and final Stake Points screen where the current stake point can be staked and optionally stored When post processing and in Occupying mode this button will be lab
67. activated all surveying is performed without being connected to an instrument and all shot data must be entered manually R 36 Job Menu Note When running in leveling mode the nstrument Settings can be selected for Manual Mode to open the Level Method screen described on Page R 41 Instrument Settings opens the next Instrument Settings screen where the settings in the selected instrument profile can be modified Note When editing an existing instrument profile you cannot modify the instrument brand or model Create New Instrument opens the next Instrument Settings screen where you can configure the settings for a new instrument and create a new instrument profile Activate activates the selected instrument profile GeoLock opens the GeoLock Settings screen Page R 162 Delete deletes the selected instrument profile Import imports an instrument profile from an instrument profile file that was previously loaded on the data collector Export saves the selected instrument profile to a file which can then be transferred to another data collector and then imported Warning Performing a hard reset on the data collector will result in all the user created instrument profiles to be deleted It is recommended that all instrument profiles be exported to files so in the event of a hard reset they can be recovered using the Import routine R 37 Survey Pro Reference Manual Instrument Se
68. add a straight horizontal line segment in the alignment Length is the horizontal length of the line E M Make this segment tangent to previous When checked the specified line will be tangent to the ending tangent of the previous li segment H L_ Make this segment tangent to previous mime A R 71 Survey Pro Reference Manual Note When making a new horizontal segment tangent to the previous segment the new segment will appear in the Edit Alignment screen tagged with a P This means that if the previous horizontal segment is edited or deleted where the orientation changes all subsequent horizontal segments that have the P tag will also be adjusted so they will remain tangent to the previous segments Bearing is used to enter a known azimuth or bearing of the line adds the line to the current horizontal alignment Edit Segment Arc Horizontal Curve Card The Arc card is used to add a horizontal curve to the alignment The curve can be defined by two of the following Edit Segment Line Arc e Radius The distance from the radius Po e M e Delta The internal angle from center Rd to tangent points Turn 2 Left Right e Degree Arc The internal angle ss equivalent to a 100 ft arc length L Make this segment tangent to previous Degree Chord The internal angle ly equivalent to a 100 ft chord length Length The arc length The chord le
69. allows you to view additional settings BS1 BSn gt FS1 FSn This sequence requires that you take all the shots for each set to the Settings backsight turn to the foresight and then shoot all the shots for each set to the foresight 8S1 BSn gt FS1 FSn Sequence BS1 FS1 gt FS2 BS2 n A single set in this B51 F51 gt F52 BS2 h sequence requires that you shoot the backsight Nurnber of Sets iny turn and shoot the foresight shoot the I OU foresight again turn and shoot the backsight Y Distance Tolerance 0 065617 ift Repeat for all remaining sets i H Distance Tolerance 0 328084 ift Number of Sets n is the number of sets you want to shoot from each setup Tolerance for Error Checking Stadia Constant is the scale of the upper and lower stadia wires in the telescope The vertical distance measured between these stadia multiplied by the value entered here usually 100 equals the horizontal distance to the rod V Dist Tolerance is the maximum change in vertical distance that can occur between all the shots to any specific point from a single setup If this value is exceeded a warning will occur R 50 Job Menu H Dist Tolerance is the maximum change in horizontal distance that can occur between all the shots to any specific point from a single setup If this value is exceeded a warning will occur M BS FS Sight Length lt Per Shot When checked a warning will occur whenever the horiz
70. are grouped together to reduce clutter show Lines Show Basemaps C Show Only This Layer O Names will show the point name for each point that is in view Descriptions will show the point description for each point in view L_ Save as Default Display Options Show Lines will show all the polylines that are on the DTM layer Show Basemaps will display any basemaps selected for the current job Show Only This Layer When checked will show only the selected point data that exists on the specified layer When unchecked point data from all layers is displayed Manage Layers opens the Manage Layers screen Page R 87 where the layers can be configured Manage Basemaps opens the Manage Basemaps screen described below where basemaps can be added to the current job Save as Default Display Options When checked will save the selections made to this screen as the default selections R 446 Miscellaneous Screens Manage Basemaps From the Map View tap The Manage Basemaps screen is used to select the basemaps to display in the map view for the current job Consult the User s Manual for more information on using basemaps The main portion of the screen lists the names Manage Basemaps of all the basemaps that have been added to the tds dxf Yes Corvallis1 SIF Yes Corvallis2 SIF Yes current job The other columns display if each basemap is visible and the number of elements in the v
71. between Serial serial and Bluetooth and access other Osluetooth Pi asi i Bluetooth tools Base Serial Windows Bluetooth Settings Opens the O Bluetooth etRxo1007 oo08ACcos5028 1 Windows Bluetooth Settings screen where Bluetooth devices can be configured You will typically only use this screen when configuring a Bluetooth cellular phone for Internet base corrections as described in the Radio Settings screen on Page 112 Verify Bluetooth Choices Opens the Verify Bluetooth Choices screen described below Verify Bluetooth Choices Change Settings Verify Bluetooth Choices Gari hieloetaotn Chores EET 0 The Verify Bluetooth Choices screen performs u a scan to quickly verify that the Bluetooth adaptors listed are connected to the Rover BtRxO1O04 corresponding receivers or if a serial cable is Summary BtRxO1004 is verified as a Rover connected Be sure all receivers are powered on with the appropriate Bluetooth dongle s connected to Port 2 on the receiver s and any Base BiRxXOLOO serial cables are attached before starting the Summary BtRxO1O0 is verified as a Base scan Finished Checking Receivers R 111 Survey Pro Reference Manual Bluetooth Setup Wizard Bluetooth Setup Wizard The Bluetooth Setup Wizard uses a series of Bluetooth Setup Wizard 7 Ho screens to walk you through the process of scanning for nearby Bluetooth receivers and configures their conne
72. calculates position L Use Acceptance Criteria assuming no motion and applies H PME m advanced averaging techniques for the most precise solution WS pom e Dynamic always Receiver is left in dynamic mode for all point occupations Accept Solution Quality is where you control the solution quality acceptable for storing measurements You have two options e Fixed RTK only Allows storage of fixed solution only e Code Float or Fix Allows storage of any differential solution Acceptance Criteria is where you select to apply criteria to measurement acceptance When checked only measurements with RMS and or PDOP values below the threshold will be accepted To use less than all three criteria check this box but enter 0 0 for the criteria you do not wish to apply e HRMS is the horizontal RMS threshold for automatic acceptance or warning on point acceptance e V RMS is the vertical RMS threshold for automatic acceptance or warning on point acceptance e PDOP is the PDOP threshold for automatic acceptance or warning on point acceptance R 106 Job Menu GPS Module Automatically accept data collection is where you select to automatically accept data collection points when the criteria are met When checked both the data and Offset Shots screens will automatically accept points once the measurement is better than the specified criteria Data collection routines will always collect at least 5 seconds worth of
73. change the antenna measurement by entering a new value in the edit box This new antenna height will be sent to the receiver with your next data collection point You can change both the antenna measurement and measure to setting by tapping on to open the Receiver Antenna screen Page R 184 Traverse opens the Traverse Base screen described below Control opens the Control Points screen Page R 195 Topo SS stores a point with a single epoch of data The current position is checked against the criteria and if acceptable the point is stored Note The function never puts the receiver in static mode so the precision of the rapid side shot will be less than a point occupied in static mode R 253 Survey Pro Reference Manual Feature opens the Feature Collection screen Page R 191 where various automatic and manual data collection options are available Offset opens the Offset Shots screen Page R 193 where a point can be collected and stored at a specified offset Point opens the Occupy Data Points screen Page R 194 used to occupy and store a new point Traverse Base The Traverse Base routine provides an easy Traverse Base method to collect a point and then move your ee ee base to that point or to ree sae base to any Move base receiver to a known point and set it existing point in the current job broadcasting corrections from new location Traverse Base gt This prompts you to m
74. control point This is done when you want to verify the quality of the coordinate system solution Coordinates displays the local coordinates computed using the current measurement and the latest projection solution Coordinates Northing 4 995 866 Easting 948 027 Elevation 91 893 Solution Quality Solution Fixed Mum Sve T H Precision 0 015 Y Precision 0 020 Solution Quality displays the quality of the current measurement the solution type the number of satellites used and the horizontal and vertical precision computed by the receiver These values are explained with the GPS Status screen Page R172 Errors displays the differences between the computed local coordinates and the known coordinates for the control point R 196 Check Control P Ei Ba Errors dh 0 001 dE 0 032 dEl 0 004 Session Time 0 19 Count Status Measuring Ht 45 894 Solution Quality Solution Fixed Mum Sv i OTT MORRO Settings cancel Geodetic Coordinates Lat 449 93 07 55671 W Lng 123 16 08 89750 W H Precision 0 015 Y Precision 0 020 Survey Menu GPS Module Note Ifthe Errors are larger than the measurement precision of the instrument you probably have a problem with your projection solution Session Time displays the total occupation time so far for this measurement Count Status displays Measuring when you have current coordinates from
75. data before automatically accepting points based on criteria Epoch Averaging is where you set a number of epochs to average in Survey Pro If this number is greater than one Survey Pro will use the number of epochs specified to calculate the final position using a simple non weighted average Note This function is not appropriate for every receiver Some receivers when dynamics are set to static use Kalman filtering and other superior techniques to calculate an average position In this case the position returned from the receiver is better with each epoch and you may actually degrade your result by averaging with Survey Pro You should check with your receiver manufacturer for specific recommendations on field procedure Post Process Settings Settings Post Process or Connect to Receiver Receiver Settings The Post Process card is used to configure the settings for logging post processing data and the collecting and storing of post processing points in Survey Pro Recording Interval is where you set the period for logging GPS raw data for post processing Set it to Off to disable post processing data collection in Survey Pro RTK Autonomous Points is where you specify action to take when accepting autonomous points during RTK data collection There are three options R 107 Survey Pro Reference Manual e Do not store this option will prohibit Settings acceptance of autonomous points in RTK data collection
76. display from zero to six places passed the decimal point for distances Angles allows you to include from zero to four fractional seconds with angle values Stations allows you to display stations in any of the following formats e 12 34 123 displays stations where the number to the left of the advances after traveling 100 feet or meters e 1 234 123 displays stations where the number to the left of the advances after traveling 1 000 feet or meters e 1 234 123 displays standard distances rather than stations R 43 Survey Pro Reference Manual Files Settings Description File allows you to select a description file to use with the current job M This file uses codes check this box if the Settings Description File description file contains codes and associated J rose This File Uses Codes descriptions Leave the box unchecked if the description only contains descriptions no codes Feature Code File Feature Code File displays the selected feature code file to use with the current job See the User s Manual for more information on feature codes Browse Allows you to select a file to use with the current job Simply tap on the filename and then tap Open Clear closes the currently selected file so that it is no longer used with the current job R 44 Job Menu Surveying Settings The Surveying Settings card allows you to select various options that affect how data co
77. eta eeu i Station I nterval is the distance between the Description Offset Points Points stations where offset points are stored Center oo Let Side ight Side B Iv Edge of Pavement k Edge of Pavement Note If the Stake Corners option is selected in Curb H Curb the Stakeout Settings screen offset points will lt Back store also be stored where ever the horizontal or vertical section of the road changes R 317 Survey Pro Reference Manual Start Point is the point number that will be assigned to the first offset point that is stored Each stored point that follows will be assigned the next available point number Description is the description that will be assigned to all the offset points that are stored M Center Line offset points will be stored at locations on the centerline when checked M Edge of Pavement offset points will be stored at the end of the first segment the edge of the roadbed on the left and or right side when checked M Curb offset point will be stored at the end of the second segment the end of the curb or ditch on the left and or right side when checked Unselect All quickly un checks all the checkboxes lt Back returns to the previous screen Store stores all the offset points based on the information provided R 318 Stake DTM Stakeout Menu Stake DTM The Stake DTM routine allows you to stake an area and get cut fill information between the po
78. exist and the Increment value 1 the Design Point is advanced to the next existing point Height of Rod is the length of the rod Backsight opens the Backsight Setup screen Page R 118 Solve gt takes you to the second Stake Points screen where the distance and direction to the design point is displayed see below OCC 1 HI 5 50 BS 2 0 00 00 R 274 Stakeout Menu Stake Points Screen Two Stake Points P is Design point displays the name of the design Design Paint 3 point that was entered in the first screen Description 55 From Gun to Design Point Description displays the description assigned Angle Right 10 00 00 to the design point Horz Dist 10 000 Angle Right is the horizontal angle to turn to vert Dist 1 500 face the design point ZE to Rod 90 00 00 Horz distance is the horizontal distance from OCC 1 HI 5 50 BS 2 0 00 00 the occupy point to the design point Vert Distance is the vertical distance from the occupy point to the design point ZE to Rod is the zenith angle required to face the prism over the design point Circle Zero is used to modify the circle on the total station so that the angle right reading will be zero when it is facing toward the design point which can sometimes be easier than turning to an obscure angle value When this button is tapped the following actions will occur 1 Anew backsight circle value is computed sent to
79. first observation from the current set up most of the details will be unknown Next gt opens the Take Shot screen Page R 262 where the required shots are performed If the shots are taken to an existing point such as when shooting the closing benchmark the Point Exists screen described next will open where the loop can be closed R 266 Level Menu Point Exists The Point Exists screen will appear after shooting a benchmark that is already stored in the current job and is used to overwrite the point create a new point or access the Close Loop screen to close the loop Point Exists Overwrite Allows you to overwrite the eg 1 is a leveling control benchmark It coordinates of the benchmark with the new cannot be overwritten What do you want coordinates This option will not be available Store New Point _ when the benchmark entered in the Turn to Existing 1 Benchmark screen was the same as the starting benchmark Use Next allows you to create a new point using the coordinates entered in the Turn to Paes ale ani cal Bene E Benchmark screen and the elevation measured from the previous shots This option should not be selected when shooting the closing benchmark Close Loop By Existing Point opens the Close Loop screen described next Close Loop The Close Loop screen lists the notes for the current level loop and allows you to close the current loop This is the only scr
80. for the foresight point are computed from an average of data gathered at each occupy point Shoot From 2 Ends P wv x OCC 1 AL S 50 BS 411 4272927 a rest fd o o Jepa je A Number of Sets dew Ey sunsew id Ef is a shortcut to the Surveying and Repetition Settings screens Page R 45 and R 53 respectively Foresight is the name given to the next stored point Description is the description given to the next stored point HR is the length of the rod opens the Smart Target options Page R 449 Number of Sets is the desired number of sets required when shooting each foresight You must select at least one set Move To Other End uf Setup on the New Traverse Point and Enter the New HI and HR alues He 7 00 ift E e You Will Be Prompted to Setup Your New Backsight at the End of this Routine Traverse will prompt you to shoot the Foresight point After each set is performed the Move To Other End dialog box will open shown here and prompt you to set up on the new point and enter a new instrument and rod height The New Occupy Point dialog box Page R 127 will open and inform you of the updated points BS Setup opens the Backsight Setup screen Page R 118 where the current backsight can be modified R 151 Survey Pro Reference Manual Record Mode When running in Record Mode all control of the total station is performed from the tota
81. is changed to zero to reflect the change The instrument now needs to be turned horizontally to zero to face the design point 3 To prevent errors the backsight set up is invalidated when exiting the Stakeout dialog if this button has been used A circle zeroed on a design point is meaningless once the design point has been staked R 308 Stakeout Menu Note The button is not available when using a robotic total station lt Back returns to the previous screen Stake gt opens the next screen which is identical to the third Stake Points screen described on Page R 276 Screen Summary Screen One is used to define the primary curve to determine the location of the curve to be staked and the station associated with the PC Point Screen Two is used to define the offset distance and location the station to be staked and the station interval Screen Three provides the distance and direction information to the current station to be staked from the occupy point Screen Four is used to stake the current station Stake Out Point Tape Offset The Store Point Tape Offset dialog box allows you to store a point at a specified offset from the stake point resulting in a point that is either closer to or further away from the total station Point is the name assigned to the new offset Stake Out Point point o Point 424 7 ee Description is the description assigned to the ption 1 00 000 15 000 i Descri
82. name if set Base Height 64 999 m e Latitude displays the current latitude of the base point set in Survey Pro Antenna Measured 0 000 Offset 0 000 e Longitude displays the current Measured to Get from Base longitude of the base point set in Survey Pro e Height displays the current height of the base point set in Survey Pro Antenna displays information about the antenna if it is available Set New Base prompts you to choose a base receiver to connect to and opens the Base Setup wizard where you can set the RTK base and configure the base reference position in Survey Pro The Base Setup wizard is described as part of the Start GPS Survey wizard Page R 182 Clear clears the existing base setup This is usually not done but may be required if you wish to edit the base point using the Edit Points screen from the Job menu You will have to reset the RTK base and rover in Survey Pro before you collect more data R 204 Survey Menu GPS Module Rover Setup The Rover Setup screen is used to set an RTK rover to begin receiving differential corrections and to configure or check the base reference position in Survey Pro The Rover Setup screen is described as part of the Start GPS Survey wizard Projection Projection Projection Ground TOS Localization Mapping Plane Start a survey to set the TDS Localization No Zone Selected for job coordinates Use local ellipsoid heights for elevation
83. names R 352 Inverse Menu Solve will compute the distance and direction of the offset from the known point perpendicular to the polyline Note There is no solution if a perpendicular offset does not occur within the extents of any selected polyline segments Results Station is the station along the polyline where the offset occurs starting from the Begin station Offset is the horizontal distance of the offset Offset is indicates if the Inverse Point is located to the right left or on the specified line as you occupy the beginning of the polyline and face the end Segment Type shows if the segment is a line arc or spiral Beg Pt if applicable this is the first point selected that defines a line End Pt if applicable this is the second point selected that defines a line R 353 Survey Pro Reference Manual Inverse Point to Multiple Points The Inverse Point to Multiple Points screen will calculate the distance and direction from an existing point to one or more other points Inverse point is the reference point used to Inverse Point to Multiple Poi REE compute the distance and direction to the other E points C Inverse Point Tap Points provides a map view where you Select Multiple Points to Inverse can tap multiple points 3 points selected m To From Opens the Point List screen Page Tap Pointe ToFrom M R 443 where a point list can be created Solve will
84. non reference DTM layer used for stake points that are stored and Select Auxiliary Layer other objects that exist on the surface you are Layer ly staking These points will be used to generate a Automatically place points or breaklines unsuitable for TIN generation on the selected surface auxiliary layer DTM surface to compare to the reference DTM Select Auxiliary Layer if this is checked and a point is stored that is located outside the selected DTM boundary the point is automatically stored on the Auxiliary layer If left unchecked a prompt will appear when storing a point outside the boundary where you must specify the layer to store the new point Layer Auxiliary is the layer that all points will be stored to if they cannot be stored to the DTM layer R 81 Survey Pro Reference Manual Choose Polyline The Choose Polyline screen is used to select an existing polyline that defines a boundary for your non reference DTM surface Choose sia Allis Pron oor Boundary 426 434 2 aa All the polylines in the current job are displayed Select the appropriate polyline and tap amp Add Edit Break lines The Add Edit Break lines screen is used to select edit create or delete the break lines that will be used when computing the DTM The break lines that will be used when 403 428 429 434 computing the DTM are listed in this screen Steam 163 165 156 148 Edit opens the Edit Polyline
85. of the screen is called the command bar The small buttons in the command bar are used as follows Online Help Survey Pro Main Menu Tapping the button opens the online help l which allows you to access information Main Menu a F File Menu similar to the information you would find in Job Menu the reference manual for each screen Survey Menu urvey Menu for GPS Module a urvey Menu for Basic GPS Module Leveling Menu Qu ick Pick ST Stakeout Menu Stakeout Menu for GPS amp Basic GPS The Quick Pick button is used to quickly Inverse Menu eT access any of a variety of commonly used Survey Pro routines The list of routines available is customizable using the Quick Pick Editor Page R 442 The User s Manual also contains more information on using the Quick Pick button and Quick Pick Editor Battery Level ma The battery icon indicates the condition of the data collector s rechargeable battery The icon has five variations depending on the level of charge that is remaining Ml 100 Hl 75 E 50 E 25 and 5 R 3 Survey Pro Reference Manual Tapping the battery icon is a shortcut to the Microsoft Power Settings screen You can view the online help for this screen on a Ranger 300X 500X by tapping then telp or on a Ranger by tapping Surveying Mode amp Ta ei The instrument icon indicates which collection mode the software is running in There are three possible surveying modes
86. on the data collector This file will have the same filename as the current job only the Backup extension is appended to the name For example the backups for a job with a filename of Smith Job will be stored in a file called Smith Job Backup New Archive opens the New Archive dialog box where a name is entered for the new backup archive being created Once created an empty archive will be listed in the main Backup Restore screen which can then be selected to backup the current job Delete Archive opens a prompt asking if you are sure If you select Yes at the prompt the archive selected from the main Backup Restore screen will be deleted R 27 Survey Pro Reference Manual Properties opens the Archive Properties screen Backup when selected tapping will begin the backup routine where the data for the current job will be stored to the selected archive Restore when selected tapping will begin the restore routine where the data from the selected archive will be restored overwriting the current job Next gt opens the next screen Backup Restore Archive Properties The Archive Properties screen lists the files Archive Properties stored within the selected archive along with 4rchive name Backupi other information Archived on 1 1 2005 r r Files archived 2 The file sizes listed in this screen are in bytes Jarthiyesize 13481 Since all backup archives are compressed
87. polyline Screen Two New Polyline The second screen is used to define all of the points that are used in the polyline Any curve information will be entered later but the end points must still be selected at this point The current polyline is shown on color displays with bold red lines and all other polylines are shown using thin black lines Only the current polyline data can be edited Tap Points opens a map view where the points in your polyline can be tapped They must be tapped in the order that they occur in the polyline Opens the Point List screen Page R 443 where a point list can be created New Polyline R 64 Job Menu Edit Opens the third screen described next where the current polyline can be modified Clear removes the current polyline Screen Three Polyline Editor Once the initial points are selected for the current polyline the third screen allows you to modify the polyline and define any curve and grade information for the polyline sections Selecting any point in the left column of the 7 screen will select that point and the line segment that follows it up to the next point N The selected section is then highlighted in the map portion of the screen Any edits will occur on the selected section Remove will remove the selected point and the line segment that follows it The previous line segment will be automatically joined to the following poi
88. radio configuration or configure a cellular phone as a data modem for Internet base corrections The choice made from the upper radio buttons determines the remaining options on the screen Base Rover Radio RTK should be selected when using a local base receiver radio configuration Use CMR Station Index should be checked in situations where more than one base is in range of the rover allowing it to distinguish one from the other Enter a unique value from 0 31 in the corresponding field Change Radio Settings opens the Change Radio Settings screen described below Internet Single Base NTRIP RTK should be selected when using a cellular phone as a data modem for connecting to the Internet to receive Single Base NTIP corrections Dial Up Connection is where you select any existing dial up connections that have been added from the routine Manage Connections is a shortcut to the Windows Start gt Settings gt Connections gt Connections screen where you can add manage modem cell phone connections Tapping the button from that screen will open the help for it For more R 113 Survey Pro Reference Manual information on adding a modem connection see Using a Cellular Phone in the Basic GPS Module section of the User s manual e IP Address of Base is the IP address of the base as provided by the Internet service e Port Socket of Base is the socket number of the base as provided by the Internet servi
89. receiver is not computing a solution e Autonomous we are receiving a stand alone solution accuracy is about 100 meters R 172 Survey Menu GPS Module e Code the receiver is calculating a code differential solution precision is about 1 to 10 meters e Float the receiver is calculating a carrier phase differential solution with float ambiguities precision is typically within 0 1 m to 0 5 m e Fixed the receiver is calculating a carrier phase differential solution with fixed ambiguities precision is typically within 15 mm H Precision displays the root mean squared RMS error of the horizontal solution reported by the receiver It is displayed in project units V Precision displays the RMS error of the vertical solution reported by the receiver It is displayed in project units Note This value is supplied by the receiver and Survey Pro displays the receiver s value without modification Most manufactures report this value at the 2 or 3 sigma level However since different manufacturers use different statistical methodology it is not necessarily valid to compare the RMS values between brands or even between models with different firmware HDOP displays the Horizontal Dilution of Precision It is a measure of the geometrical quality of the solution DOP has no units and lower numbers indicate better solution geometry VDOP displays the Vertical Dilution of Precision It is a measure of the geometrical qu
90. routines Recording Interval e Prompt for layer this option will RTK Autonomous points prompt for layer 7 prompt the user whenever an Layer Autonomous autonomous point is accepted The j Select Layer Session Monitor layer specified will be the default layer ee cy to store autonomous points but the C warn re if user can over ride at the prompt HDOP is above e Store on selected layer this option px memory is below o ke will automatically store autonomous points accepted during RTK data collection routines on the specified layer Layer displays the layer selected to store autonomous points Select Layer opens up a layer prompt to allow you to select an existing layer or create a new layer to store autonomous points Session Monitor is where you select to use the session monitoring thresholds when collecting data with the Static Rover Session screen To have Survey Pro display warnings during post processing data collection check Warn me if and specify threshold values for the number of SV HDOP and memory R 108 Job Menu Basic GPS This section describes the Settings menu item from the Job Menu for the Basic GPS Module See Page 93 for a description of the Job Menu for when running in GPS mode with the standard GPS module Only the Settings menu item in the Job Menu contains screens that are unique to the Basic GPS module References are given for all the other Settings screens t
91. screen where the selected polyline can be modified or a new polyline can be created Delete will move the selected polyline to the Auxiliary layer Add Existing will display all the polylines in the current job Selecting a polyline and tapping amp will move the selected polyline to the DTM layer Note If a boundary is defined only polylines that fall within the boundary can be added New opens the New Polyline screen which is identical to the Edit Polyline screen and is used to create a new polyline R 82 Edit Polyline Job Menu Edit Polyline Job View DTM Breaklines Edit or The Edit Polyline screen is used to perform some preliminary editing to a polyline prior to accessing the polyline editor with the key Tap Points allows you to tap points to define Tap Points a new polyline If a polyline was already selected prior to accessing this screen it will be replaced by the polyline being created To From allows you to define a range of points that define a polyline If a polyline was already selected prior to accessing this screen it will be replaced by the polyline being created Edit opens the Polyline Editor described on Page R 65 where the polyline can be further To Erom Edit Clear Properties edited Clear will permanently remove the selected polyline from the job Properties opens the New Line dialo
92. status anncnterais R 172 export coordinates 112 cell modem card R 173 position card R 177 F post process card R 174 feature collection 268 R 191 receiver card R 172 features cic helactine R 61 sat info card R 176 field label ccc ec eee eeee es 3 sky view card R 175 TONGS sist ee eee 3 grid N to geodetic N 279 input eR A ans 12 grid to ground TPE EEEE E 278 output E E E ARRA 12 ground coordinates R 226 fieldwork c eccsceseeees 51 key in origin ae R 227 file location sceninis R 228 ASO eara 29 LTOSUIIES eeen R 228 TAW aatinaa are 30 seale s marenea R 227 file management R 243 ground to gTid ee 278 file settings R 44 file transfer o e R 31 H files HAD oannes 46 R 69 control oiis 31 R 26 HARN ninna 197 description eeeeeeeseeeee 33 HD VD to SD ZA R 372 DaI SA E Godan 264 hinge method 147 R 370 fixed solution 0 190 horizontal angle offset123 R float solution 6 190 135 POPE SIS NG xcciccet cstieceess 228 horizontal curve layout149 R format settings R 43 384 horizontal curve solutionR 376 G horizontal datums 195 general settings R 56 HAR Nyereren 197 geodetic N to grid N 279 NAD Toza a 195 geoid model 004 207 NADIS aen 195 Select 237 R 180 WOS BA asun 195 Reference Manu
93. the instrument and stored in the raw data 2 The Angle Right value is changed to zero to reflect the change The instrument now needs to be turned horizontally to zero to face the design point 3 To prevent errors the backsight set up is invalidated when exiting the Stakeout dialog if this button has been used A circle zeroed on a design point is meaningless once the design point has been staked R 275 Survey Pro Reference Manual 4 The dialog shown here will be displayed the first time Circle Zero is zeroing the circle on the design location will rae ve a stakeout session to warn modify your backsight setup that the original backsight reference m will be lost Survey Pro Are YoU sure you want ta proceed Note The button is not available when using a robotic total station lt Back returns to the first screen Stake gt opens the third and final Stake Points screen where the shots to the stake point are performed Stake Points Screen Three Height of Rod is the length of the rod Stake Points f From GUN to ROD Design Elev displays the current design l BACK 0 007 elevation which can be modified with the GoLEFT 0 001 puton EDM Inst EDM w HR 7 00 ift_ hd FORWARD BACK indicates if the rod must ee ee move forward toward the total station or Timman Store backward away from the total station Angle Right 10 00 12 o l Zenith 90 00 00 SE e Go RIGHT Go LEFT
94. the PI Three Point Curve The Three Point Curve screen will compute the details of a curve when three points of the curve are specified the PC PT and any other point on the curve or the PC PT and radius point First point is the first point from the current job that defines the curve The specified point Ras can be either the PC or the Radius Point by gt N ORE selecting the appropriate radio button gt J Store Rp Note The selection made for the first point determines the available choices in the remaining fields gt L Store FI Point on Curve i Pr ayout j der gt snsex a Pt on Curve is any point that lies on the curve between the PC and PT PC is the point that defines the beginning of the curve Point of Curvature PT is the point that defines the end of the curve Point of Tangency M Store RP When checked the radius point will be computed and stored with the name specified here R 379 Survey Pro Reference Manual Solve will compute the curve based on the selected points Traverse opens the Traverse on Curve screen Page R 388 where the curve can be included in a traverse Layout opens the Curve Layout screen Page R 381 where the location of points on a curve can be computed at any station interval Results Radius is the distance from the radius point to the curve Length is the arc length Chord is the chord len
95. the Sideshot screen Page Rod 2 000 Hi 102 000 R 263 where the required information is entered to perform a side shot Stakeout gt Stakeout gt opens the Stakeout screen Page R 265 where the required information is entered to perform a stakeout shot Turn to Benchmark gt opens the Benchmark screen Page R 262 where the required information is entered to shoot either a closing or non closing benchmark Turn to Turning Point Opens the Take Shot screen described next where you can immediately begin taking the necessary shots for a turning point Notes displays all the notes for the current level loop R 261 Survey Pro Reference Manual Leveling Shots This screen is also accessed when taking shots for any other observation type The Leveling Shots screen is used to perform the required shots to whichever observation you are shooting The specific shots you are prompted for depends on the observation type n B3 gt F1 F3 the number of sets and the shooting sequence Shooting the BS Ft 1 Press the Take Shot button when you are ready You will only be prompted to shoot a backsight while shooting the first observation from any given setup Take Shot The top line indicates if you are shooting your backsight or foresight and which point you are shooting in relation to the entire loop The box on the second line tells you which shot to take next The term B1 means to sh
96. the circle on the total station so that the angle right reading will be zero when it is facing toward the design point which can sometimes be easier than turning to an obscure angle value When this button is tapped the following actions will occur 1 Anew backsight circle value is computed sent to the instrument and stored in the raw data 2 The Angle Right value is changed to zero to reflect the change The instrument now needs to be turned horizontally to zero to face the design point R 312 Stakeout Menu 3 To prevent errors the backsight set up is invalidated when exiting the Stakeout dialog if this button has been used A circle zeroed on a design point is meaningless once the design point has been staked Note The button is not available when using a robotic total station lt Back returns to the previous screen Stake gt opens the next screen which is identical to the third Stake Points screen described on Page R 276 Stake Spiral and Offset Screen Summary Screen One is used to define the primary spiral curve used to determine the location of the curve to be staked and the station associated with the Start Point Screen Two is used to define the offset distance and location the station to be staked and the station interval Screen Three provides the distance and direction information to the current station to be staked from the occupy point Screen Four is used to stake the current statio
97. the distance units for the imported data or the current job were set incorrectly This situation can most commonly occur when working with International Feet and US Survey Feet where the conversion from one to the other is not always obvious Usually the difference between International Feet and US Survey Feet is negligible 2 parts per million but when dealing with State Plane or UTM mapping plane coordinates which are often very large in magnitude the difference can be considerable if the coordinates are converted from one format to the other If importing coordinates from a source where you are not sure if the units are in International Feet or US Survey Feet into a job that is set to International Feet or US Survey Feet you will usually just want to import them without any conversion being performed To do this be sure to select the same distance units for the source file as those set for the current job Store Point is the starting point number if points are stored during the staking process Future points are stored with the next available point names HR is the rod height a opens the Smart Target options Page R 449 M With Centerline When checked offset and stationing information from the selected centerline to the stake point is also provided in the DTM Shot screen Choose a Centerline will open the Select Line screen described next where an existing polyline or alignment can be selected that describes
98. the name specified Station ome Orern M SERRER in the corresponding field Tap Line opens a window where any polyline or alignment in the current job can be selected To From Opens the Point List screen Page R 443 where a point list can be created Solve computes the location of the offset point and optionally stores the point des E gt synsery i R 363 Survey Pro Reference Manual Corner Angle The Corner Angle screen provides information on the horizontal angle created from three known points Backsight is an end point of the angle to be Corner Angle solved Begin Point Middle Point is the corner point of the angle Middle Paint to be solved End Point Foresight Point is the other end point of the angle to be solved Select from Map Allows you to quickly select all of the above points from a map view The first point tapped is entered in the Backsight field the second in the Middle Point field and the third point tapped is entered in the End Point field Solve will compute the following results that describe the angle defined by the three points provided x Ol uw _ in dew E Results Angle left is the horizontal angle created as you occupy the Middle Point face the Backsight and turn counterclockwise to the Foresight Point Angle right is the horizontal angle created as you occupy the Middle Point fac
99. the receiver and the screen is updating with the latest measurement If you are using Epoch Averaging Averaging is displayed after you tap while the number of epochs is averaged in Survey Pro Suspended is displayed if you are not receiving valid data from the receiver GPS Status opens the GPS Status screen Page R 172 Accept writes the results to raw data and returns you to the Control Points screen Occupy Control Point Screen Control or Data Collection The Occupy Control Point screen is used to add geodetic coordinates to a known project point The most common use of this screen is to measure control points for the localization solution This screen is also used by the Localization Calculator routine Page R 214 for one point localization setup Geodetic Coordinates displays the geodetic coordinates measured at the current local point Control Point Use this point Horizontal Solution Quality displays the quality of the current measurement the solution type the Session Time 4 08 number of satellites used and the horizontal Golly SiE and vertical precision computed by the Measuring receiver These values are explained with the GPS Status screen Page R172 R 197 Survey Pro Reference Manual Control Point is where you select if the current point is to be used for Horizontal control and or Vertical control by tapping the appropriate checkboxes Session Time displays the total
100. the reference stereographic mapping plane Origin Latitude is where you enter the origin latitude of the reference stereographic mapping plane This is usually set at the latitude of the first base location Origin Longitude is where you enter the origin longitude of the reference stereographic mapping plane This is usually set at the longitude of the first base location R 207 Survey Pro Reference Manual Origin Height Origin Scale is where you enter either the height or the scale factor used to reference the localization system to ground level Same as Base updates the values with the coordinate and set up group of the GPS base station Use Geoid is where you choose to use a geoid model with this zone When this box is checked you can select a geoid model from the dropdown list to use with the coordinate system When this box is unchecked no geoid will be used with the coordinate system You can pick a geoid model from the database using the drop down box Pick from Database opens the Select Coordinate System screen Page R 209 where you can pick a reference stereographic map projection zone or a solved localization site from the coordinate system data base file csd Reset Projection initializes a new localization reference stereographic map projection with the input parameters Note To simply assign a geoid to use with the TDS Localization coordinate system which will be set up automat
101. to Circles circles the computed line will be tangent to as Tangent Line you occupy the 1st Radius Point and face the i int ill i low E Pt He 2nd Radius Point See illustration below Poa e Lst 2nd Radius Pt defines the points around Eloi which the circles are computed Radius defines the radius of the circles that are used to compute the Tangent Line M Store Tan Pt When checked will store the 2nd Radius Pt Es SE lv wis ook sd lt Dwe tnes be di computed tangent points Solve computes the location of the tangent line and optionally stores the two tangent points S Ea synsag im ond Tangent Results a e RON TP 1 displays the coordinates for the first Poom H a tangent point Ve ond Radius Pt TP 2 displays the coordinates for the second vy _ tangent point s l D Azimuth is the azimuth of the tangent line from I the first tangent point to the second i P Distance is the length of the tangent line N 7 Line Tangent to Circles solution illustrating the location of a Left Left Tangent Line R 383 Survey Pro Reference Manual Curve Layout The Curve Layout screen is used to assist in the layout of a horizontal curve by computing the direction and distance to points on the curve using a variety of Curve Layout methods Method Method The method determines how the M points on the curve are laid out Each method is de
102. to detach future points using this linework command from the current polyline resulting in future points being added to a new polyline R 77 Survey Pro Reference Manual El If the button is blank and the current job contains at least one polyline you will be prompted to select an existing polyline Once selected future points stored with this linework command will be appended to the selected polyline Props A single polyline can contain different line types The Props command will open the Auto Linework Properties dialog box shown here where when the checkbox is checked the Switch to Default on Completion linework command will always switch back to the specified default linework command after changing and storing a different line type for a particular feature UUROMM N aise a meecmaie 2 gt O E Add allows you to create a new linework command Remove removes the selected linework command Remove All removes all the existing linework commands Note All linework shots require at least two points with a particular linework command before a polyline segment is created If only the initial point has been stored no polyline segment is yet created R 78 Job Menu View Raw Data File The View Raw Data File screen displays the raw data file of the current job and allows you to append a note or current time entry View Raw Data Tapping any line in the raw data file will toggle SP PN3 LN 1948 8208
103. to each point that is overlaid on the sh l ow Only This Layer 2 video screen The color for the text can be selected with the corresponding color button Manage Layers Smart Point Labels when checked some point names will automatically be hidden if they overlap other point names in situations where several points are crowded together For the names that are shown the associated point graphic will be displayed with a bold border When unchecked all point names will be displayed whether or not they overlap other point names Show All Points when checked all points in the job will be shown if in view on the video display Show Points From Current Setup when checked only points that were stored from the current backsight setup will be shown Show Only This Layer when checked only points that are stored on the selected layer will be overlaid on the video screen Manage Layers opens the Manage Layers screen Page R 87 where the layers can be configured R 166 Survey Menu Conventional Mode Video Settings or Job Settings Instrument Instrument Settings The Video Settings screen is used to configure the quality of the live video image and stored photos Settings S6 V8 Quality is used to configure the quality of live video image where Fine produces the best T image quality but takes more time for the video image to refresh Quality Snap Shot results in small images being st
104. to the point is not possible but Description HR 0 000 two points on two intersecting lines can be E amp E shot Point 1 of Line 1 Angle Right 4202027 deg Foresight is the name of the point that will be Zenith g0 25 55 deg Ea t d Slope Dist 14 173 feet af oe Description is the description for the point that will be stored HR 0 000 shows that no rod height will be used with this routine since all shots are direct reflectorless Shoot Line 1 will prompt you to take two shots on Line 1 which intersects with Line 2 at the point you want to store Note Each shot for a line can be in any location on the same line Shot 1 can be to the left or the right of Shot 2 Shoot Line 2 will prompt you to take two shots on Line 2 which intersects with Line 1 at the point you want to store Corner amp 2 Lines Note After all shots are done the computed elevation is displayed for the new point You can either enter a different elevation or tap amp to accept the computed elevation Backsight opens the Backsight Setup screen Page R 118 where the current backsight can be modified R 139 Survey Pro Reference Manual Corner amp Angle The Corner and Angle screen is used to store a point that cannot be shot on a reference line using a reflectorless total station where two other points on the same line can be shot Foresight is the name of the point that will be fnit m Fitis stored O
105. to the receiver as well as updating Survey Pro s settings R 185 Survey Pro Reference Manual Base Setup Two SET This final Base Setup screen is used to SET the receiver as an RTK base using the job file point as the reference position and to configure the base location in Survey Pro This screen is shown when the base point has measured or computed geodetic coordinates in the job Base Point displays the base point name chosen in the previous screen Latitude displays the WGS84 latitude of the job file point Latitude 44 33 07 69000 N Longitude 123 16 06 57000 W Ellipse Height 55 0000 m Base Setup Base Point moni Longitude displays the WGS84 longitude of the job file point Ellipse Height displays the WGS84 height of the job file point lt Back returns to the previous Base Setup screen SET sets the receiver as an RTK base and configures the base reference position in Survey Pro If there is a Recording Interval set on the Job Settings Post Process page a file will be opened and logging of raw GPS measurements for post processing will start The base name and antenna measurement will be recorded in the file for this static session Base Setup Two GET and SET This final Base Setup screen is used to GET an autonomous HERE position from the receiver SET the receiver as an RTK base and configure the base reference position in Survey Pro This screen is shown whe
106. was shot R 284 Stakeout Menu Remote Stake to Line The contents of the Stake to Line screen when running in remote mode is nearly identical to running in non remote mode except the graphic portion of the screen looks and behaves differently Point the data collector toward the total station for proper orientation and the graphic tells you the direction to travel to reach the line in the shortest distance If the Use Manual Updating Remote Control field is checked in the Stakeout Settings screen Page R 47 a Shot button will be available which allows you to manually control when shots are taken ae r to Line rI to Line r FORWARD RIGHT of Line Offset Dist 25 292 Station 0 32 830 BACK 0 659 LEFT of Line Offset Dist 0 659 Station 0 08 968 Fill 0 380 3 407 LEFT of Line Offset Dist 3 303 Station 0 07 429 Fill 0 380 FORWARD 0 009 Offset Dist 0 009 Station O 10 061 Fill 0 368 ae 1 00 ifeet Prism is on the line or within the horizontal distance tolerance specified in the Stakeout Settings screen Page R 47 fea 1 00 ifeet Prism is within 1 foot of line R 285 Survey Pro Reference Manual Offset Staking The Offset Staking screen is used to stake the center of a road the road edge the curb ditch edge or any offset at fixed intervals An existing polyline alignment or a specified point range can define the centerline of the road The first Offset Sta
107. 118 Next gt takes you to the next Stake Road screen where a specific point on the road can be selected to stake Stake Road Screen Two The second Stake Road screen displays a cross sectional profile view of the road at the current station Any particular point on this view can be selected and staked Station I nterval is the value that is added to the Station to Stake after the Next Station button is pressed R 415 Survey Pro Reference Manual Next Station advances the Station to Stake by RN aievet gt amp the Station Interval Stake Station Note If the Stake Corners option is selected in Right 1 Roadbed the Stakeout Settings screen the l button will also stop at any horizontal or eee L subgrade L vertical alignment node and the beginning and end of any widening and super elevation that falls within the interval y lt lt gt gt These buttons are used to select the particular node or an offset to it from your road profile that you wish to stake The segment name at the selected node is also displayed If staking the centerline with an offset the side of the road that the offset occurs is also displayed Offset When checked allows you to specify a horizontal offset distance away from the centerline to stake as opposed to staking the actual node locations Note A positive value offset is applied at the specified distance from each node away from the centerline A nega
108. 2 449 to the design point ZE to Rod 989 49 00 Circle Zero is used to modify the circle on the OS 2357 _HI 5 50 BS 0 00 oo total station so that the angle right reading will be zero when it is facing the current target which can sometimes be easier than turning to an obscure angle value When this button is tapped the following actions will occur 1 Anew backsight circle value is computed sent to the instrument and stored in the raw data 2 The Angle Right value is changed to zero to reflect the change The instrument now needs to be turned horizontally to zero to face the current target location 3 To prevent errors if this button is used the backsight set up is invalidated when exiting the Stakeout dialog A circle zeroed on a design point is meaningless once the design point has been staked Note The button is not available when using a robotic total station lt Back returns to the previous screen Stake gt opens the next screen which is identical to the third Stake Points screen described on Page R 276 R 298 Stakeout Menu Point Slope Staking The Point Slope Staking routine is a simplified version of the Slope Staking routine described on Page R 293 Point Slope Staking D g The Point Slope Staking routine determines From Point the location of the catch point from a known hinge point and a specified horizontal direction ly from the hinge point whereas the Slope l Staki
109. 28 E 2409 687953 EL100 bookmark is shown as a green circle An SP PN372 N 1906 33582 E 2472 987831 EL100 0 inactive bookmark is shown in red SP PN373 N 2028 239491 E 2448 843998 EL 100 SP PN374 N 2044 268072 E 2659 241502 EL First jumps to the first line of the file amp SP PN375 N 6 06913 E 38 290869 EL SP PNS76 N 0 664263 E l2 145756 EL Last jumps to the last line of the file SP PNS77 N 9 6636 12 E 6 7 241907 EL Prev jumps to bookmark above the active bookmark Next jumps to the bookmark below the active bookmark Clear All clears all bookmarks Time appends the current date and time in the form of a note to the end of the raw data file Note opens the Raw Data Note screen where any note up to 127 characters can be appended to the raw data file R 79 Survey Pro Reference Manual Raw Data Note Enter any note to append to the raw data file You can use the buttons to insert common line xSkaM Elsi eit Enter a Note of Up to work commands 127 Characters When finished tap to append the note to the end of the raw data file ec View DTM Before viewing a DTM the Setup DTM 3D screen will open where the DTM layers must be defined This screen is also used to define other parameters for the DTM Layers opens the Layers for Staking DTM Setup DTM 3D screen where the DTM layers are selected a DTM Points Auxiliary O Boundary
110. 4 local coordinate system at ground level with no projection and no datum from the database You can choose one of two projection modes depending on the requirements for your survey Use Ground TDS Localization gt sets the horizontal projection mode to Ground TDS Localization and opens the Choose Base Setup screen Use this mode when you want to do a ground level survey when there is no projection and no datum to relate your local coordinate system to any geodetic coordinate system Select a Mapping Plane Zone gt sets the horizontal projection mode to Mapping Plane and opens the Select Coordinate System screen Page R 209 Use this mode when you want to use a conformal map projection selected from the coordinate system database file mapping plane coordinate system with a geodetic datum chosen from the database Select a Mapping plane zone gt Choose Base Setup The Start GPS Survey Choose Base Setup screen displays your three options to configure the RTK base receiver This screen is always part of the wizard _ Start Survey Wizard survey Pro Base Point Mo base set Start with a new base or remote base Start Survey Wizard Survey Pro Base Paint Base Point 2 Set new base Connect to a GPS receiver and set it as an RTK base Use remote base station Lise Remote Base gt broadcasting ATK corrections Choose Base no base set Se
111. 9 998 fill slope based on the last shot and the o a corresponding hinge point i To Slope Direction Offset On Slope HD to HP is the horizontal distance from the rod to the hinge point Cut to HP Fill to HP is the cut or fill required to bring the current rod location level with the hinge point To Slope Offset is the perpendicular offset between the rod location and the horizontal line from the hinge point to the catch point Direction CW or CCW is the horizontal angle clockwise or counterclockwise respectively that the rod must turn around the hinge point for it to be over the line from the hinge point to the catch point Below DS Above DS is the vertical distance that the rod is located below or above the design slope If the option is selected this will be the distance to the nearest slope otherwise it will be the distance to the selected cut or fill slope Toward HP Away HP is the estimated horizontal distance the rod must move toward or away from the hinge point before it is over the catch point Note The computed horizontal distance is based on the observed terrain computed from the last two shots If only one shot has been taken this value will be blank R 300 Stakeout Menu Slope Staking Results EDM This button can be toggled to shoot in Slope Staking Fill various EDM modes The options available aie aoe depend on the total station being used Consult the total station s documentation for
112. Alignments Edit Roads Road Stakeout Slope Staking Show Station Road Station and Offset 7H OOF R 399 Survey Pro Reference Manual Add Edit Templates The Add Edit Templates screen is used to edit an existing template or create a new template Templates describe the cross sectional profile of a roadway They can contain information such as the road width its slope a curb and or a ditch Each separate portion of a template is called a segment All templates must have at least one segment and all templates of a particular road must have the same number of segments Any template can describe either the left or right side of the road s cross section they re reversible If a road s left and right side are identical only one template needs to be created the other side can use the same template or be mirrored later when the road is defined All of the saved templates are listed displayed in this screen including each template s name number of segment cut slope and fill slope An image of the selected segment is also displayed in this screen New opens the New Template screen where Add Edit Templates a new template can be created This screen is i i Hew Edit Copy Delete Import identical to the Edit Template screen except most the buttons are initially deactivated Template cut Slope Fill Slope Ti 4 3 000 4 000 Edit opens the Edit Template screen where the selec
113. Angle of the sun at zero hour Universal Time Greenwich on the current date DeclO is the declination of the sun at zero hour on the current date GHA24 is the Greenwich Hour Angle of the sun at zero hour Universal Time Greenwich on the following day 24 hours later Decl24 is the declination of the sun at zero hour on the following day Solar Semi Diameter is the semi diameter of the sun expressed in minutes and seconds R 158 Survey Menu Conventional Mode Shots Solar Observation Oe Number of sets is the number of sets that will a a Reverse Shots be taken to the celestial object Jor azimuth uTitime Hange Reverse Shots M When checked reverse z neno oo shots will be required with each set When go 10 o4 21 54 36 000 353 10 23 unchecked only direct shots are required Shoot opens the Enter Shot Data screen described below where the shot data is entered for the selected observation Toss Incl will toggle the selected observation so that it will be hidden or un hidden respectively When an observation is hidden it will not be used when calculating the final azimuth incr 90 Us 17 21 54 56 000 353 10 27 Note The buttons perform the same function as checking un checking the checkbox in front of each observation Note A backsight observation cannot be tossed Del permanently deletes the most current observation if it is selected allowing you t
114. CC 1 HI 5 50 BS 410 0 00 00 Description is the description for the point a Foresight M that will be stored Description HR 0 000 HR 0 000 shows that no rod height will be Point 1 of Line used with this routine since all shots are direct geRight 0 00 A deg reflectorless zenith 67905 26 deg Slope Dist 21 424 ifeet Shoot Line will prompt you to take two shots on a line that intersects with the point you want to store Note Each shot can be in any location on the line Shot 1 Sine Aim at target Shot 1 can be to the left or right of Shot 2 G no shot Aim at Corner will prompt you to aim at the corner the point that you want to store Although no shot is taken the angles to the point will be used to compute its location Note After all shots are done the computed elevation is displayed for the new point You can either enter a different elevation or tap amp to accept the computed Corner amp Angle elevation Backsight opens the Backsight Setup screen Page R 118 where the current backsight can be modified R 140 Survey Menu Conventional Mode Corner amp Offset The Corner and Offset screen is used to store a point using a reflectorless total station for a point that cannot be shot directly but the offset s to the point can be measured from a reference line that can be shot Corner amp Offset OCC 1 HI 5 50 BS 410 o 00 oo o Foresight Perpend Offset
115. Calculator The Projection Calculator wizard is used to calculate scale factor or convergence rotation for any point on the selected mapping plane You can use the computed values for calculations from the Past Results power button option Projection displays the current mapping plane settings Select Point is where you enter the name of the reference point where the rotation or scale is to be computed Calc Rotation gt opens the Projection Calculator screen where the rotation is computed Calc Scale gt opens the Projection Calculator screen where the scale is computed R 241 Survey Pro Reference Manual Projection Calculator Rotation Convergence displays the computed rotation from geodetic north to grid north Rotation displays the computed rotation from erid north to geodetic north lt Back returns you to the first Projection Calculator screen Accept copies the two computed values to past results and returns you to the first Projection Calculator screen Projection Calculator Scale Height Correction Ellipsoid Height is where you enter the WGS84 ellipsoid height for your current location This value will be used to calculate the height above the terrain component of the scale factor This is sometimes referred to as the sea level correction lt Back returns you to the first Projection Calculator screen Solve gt takes you to the final scree
116. Centimeters mm Millimeters e cor ch Chains Once the cursor leaves that field the distance will be converted automatically A space between the value and the unit abbreviation is optional Units for Angles specifies if angles will be entered in Degrees or Grads M Adjust for Earth Curvature Refraction when checked the elevations recorded from all shots will be adjusted to compensate for earth curvature and refraction M User Scale Factor when checked all horizontal distances when taking shots will be adjusted by the scale factor entered here Next gt opens the final screen which can be one of two different possible screens depending on if a control file is being imported R 10 File Menu Create a New Job 4 Imported Control File This screen will only open when a control file is being imported Create a New Job amp Create a New Job Enter First Point _ Enter First Point Point Name po Job points will be imported from control file Built in Northing 7000 0 ift Storage Survey Pro Jobs TDS job Elevation ooo O Description start o Screen when checkbox is unchecked Screen when checkbox is checked Enter First Point when this box is checked the additional fields will appear allowing you to create a new point Note Although all new jobs must have at least one point creating a new point when importing a control file is optional since points are already being loaded in
117. Confirm that the start station for each super elevation is less than the end station Confirm that no two super elevations overlap Confirm that the start and end of each super elevation either both hinge on the centerline or both hinge on the edge Confirms all templates widening and super elevations are on the alignment Confirms no more than one template exists at any particular station on the same side of the road Confirms the first segment of all templates is greater than 0 Checks for empty templates Checks for widenings with zero width Checks for overlapping parabolic transitions Checks for template widening width matching Checks for template super elevation slope matching Example Profiles Roads Menu Road Profiles Screen Roads Edit Roads New or Edit Road View Profiles The Road Profiles screen allows you to see information about the cross sectional profile of the road at any station after at least one template has been added to each side of the road lt lt gt gt these buttons move a red circle Station icon that starts at the centerline which is ners indicated by a green circle to each node of the 20 000 template at the current station Information a for the selected segment is displayed in the 000 000 Easting right portion of the screen The name for the Serer selected segment is shown between these 99 600 buttons Go opens a dialog box where a specific
118. Connected to Base Connected to Rover R 246 Survey Menu Basic GPS Module Base Rover Receiver displays information about the status of the receiver Measured To specifies the location on the antenna or receiver where the antenna height should be measured to Measured The distance from the ground to the Measured To location Serial is the serial number of the antenna This information is optional and written as a note in the raw data Next gt opens the next screen which depends on the type of receiver you are connected to and at what stage in the Start GPS Survey routine you are at Start Survey One Matching Base Point Start Survey Wizard This screen will open when the base is set up Auton Radio O Sw OF HRMS 12 48 Select a Base Point Found base point at on a point that potentially matches only one point in the job 1 Change gt opens the Start Survey No Matching Base screen Page R 248 where the base point can be redefined before continuing Next gt opens the Set Up Rover screen R 247 Survey Pro Reference Manual Start Survey More than One Matching Base Point This screen will open when the base is set up on a point that potentially matches more than one point in the job Change gt opens the Start Survey No Start Survey Wizard Matching Base screen Page R 248 where the Auton Radio 0 Sv O09 HRMS 9 293 base point can be redefined before cont
119. Corrections State Grid N map such as a U S G S 7 5 minute quadrangle EEn aeo sheet or collected with a handheld GPS unit Gi cg la Aim selects the portion of the celestial body Solar Semi Diameter 0 16129 that where you intend to aim You can select Left Edge of Center Center or Right Edge of soys ial R 157 Survey Pro Reference Manual Center Note Typically Left Edge of Center is selected when performing a sun shot in the northern hemisphere and Center is selected for star shots Corrections displays which corrections are Corrections currently selected with an N for no or a Y for Non Linear Declination Correction yes When tapped the Corrections dialog box eoeta oard lel Usezene constant opens where the following corrections are configured Center Meridian zone Constant e M Non linear Declination Correction applies a correction for the linear interpolation of the declination of the sun for the time that an observation is taken This error is usually negligible but is removed when this is checked This should only be checked when performing sun shots e M Correct to State Grid when selected the computed azimuth is referenced from the local State Plane grid rather than true north e Center Meridian Zone Constant these values are used to adjust the computed azimuth to the local State Plane grid Appendix A lists these values for the United States GHAO is the Greenwich Hour
120. DIK acetate ea sess ett a8 nae te E E A 319 SEAL ON STAKI NO catcisncidueiaiciapanhia aa iaaii 324 Definea Location ssssssssssssssrrrnrrrnrnnnnnrnrnnnnnnnnnnrrrnrnrrrrrrrrrrns 328 Whereis Next POint ueeesssssssssssssssssssssssnsssnnnnsnnnnnnnnnnnsnnns 330 Stakeout M enu GPS and Basic G PS sssssssssnsnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 333 ms Sok SSE Nee ee a ee ee ee oe 334 Sake tO LINE asin es aas 336 AOPE AKIN iaa A 339 ENTS AIG OSet aasi a a 342 Curve NO Scag sie ota ace na ccd aati accacentat scdeecceeoniatece 342 Spiral ANG OP SEE asna a 342 Show Station and Offset oo eeesecssssssessssesssssssssssseeeesseeeeen 343 SHORE OT SEE POIN sectors stars cesarean Gas access 344 stake lI eer een ne eee nen eRe Um mE SORBENT S 345 Whereis Next POI icorinitesuetideceieccilecese sieeve rnenctiencedleietdaaesiuies 347 lnvers M enU sisi cveneasccscivceucwusecaunavuccescusunssneucucdnsaacnuveweveneabanasiveeuunuveuan 349 lava se POLE O POIN enian na aera eet 350 Inverse Point to Line sssssssssssssssssssssssrsrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrnnnns 351 Inverse Point to Polyline sssssesssesressressererrresrrnsrrnnsrnnens 352 Inverse Point to Multiple POINKS cccssssssesssseeeseeeees 354 Inverse Point to Location PON cccccceseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 355 COJO M CI airosa aaia a ii 357 PNE MDI SHO aranea Ea Ei 358 NASR SE OM EE EA A AE EA E E A 359 ONS ELNE e ae Oe er ee SA PTE ne en 361 ONSE PORES aa 362 SHORN OT SEE aa N 363
121. DM This button can be toggled to shoot in various EDM modes The options available depend on the total station being used Consult the total station s documentation for more information on the EDM modes that it supports Take Shot triggers the total station to take a shot to the prism View opens the 3D View screen Page R 85 where a 3D view of the non reference DTM surface can be viewed from any angle as well as cut fill volume information between two selected surfaces Note The button is only available when Generate DTM with Staked Points is checked in the first Stake DTM screen and at least three stake points have been stored that do not lie on a straight line lt Back returns to the first Stake DTM screen Store will store a stake point for the last point that was shot using the point name shown in the Point field and the description in the Desc field A new shot is not taken from this button The Point field is then advanced to the next available point name R 323 Survey Pro Reference Manual Station Staking The Station Staking routine allows you to stake the stations offsets and surfaces built into a LandXML file The first Station Staking screen is used to load a LandXML file and view the details of that file The box on the left displays the horizontal view Birine akir Ane T o i of the centerline include within the LandXML f Alignment Description 202cl file and the box on the
122. Elevation is the known elevation for the location s on the parabolic curve where you want to compute the station s Solve computes the details of the vertical curve Sta decreases the Current station by the Interval Sta increases the Current station by the Interval Layout computes either the elevation at the specified Current station or the station s at the specified Elevation R 392 Curve Menu Results PVC sta is the station at the PVC PVI sta is the station at the PVI PVT sta is the station at the PVT elev is the elevation for the respective point Hi Lo sta is the station where the vertical curve has a tangent equal to zero the crest of the curve R 393 Survey Pro Reference Manual Straight Grade The Straight Grade screen will solve for the elevation at a specified station or a station at a specified elevation on a straight grade Begin Station is the station where the Straight Grade straight grade begins 7 Begin Station Begin Elev is the elevation at the Begin Begin Elev station Grade Rise Grade is the percent slope 100 Solve pun End station Solve for is where you select to solve for an Interval Elevation or a Station The choice made here determines which of the following selections are available End station is the station where you want to compute the elevation M Interval When checked the End station can be incremented by the
123. Gif one is used Clear clears the current external control file Browse opens the Open screen Page R 13 where an existing job can be selected as an external control file If any point names in the R 26 Backup Restore File Menu external control file are also used in the current job the control file cannot be used Backup Restore Job P yei The Backup Restore wizard is a series of screens that are used to backup or restore all S Backupl 1 1 2005 1 21pm 2 the files associated with the current job gaBackupz 1 1 2005 1 22pm 2 The routine also gives you the option of storing a snapshot of a customized map view to the archive This can then be used to visually identify an archive Delete Archive Properties Any number of backups can be created for a E Backup Restore particular job All the existing backups for the current job are listed in the main Backup Restore screen along with other information including the date the backup was created the number of files stored in the archive and if the archive includes a snapshot Archives that include a snapshot are shown with a icon while those without a snapshot have a B icon The icon is used when a new archive has been created but a backup has not yet been stored to it All of the backups for a particular job are physically stored to a single compressed file located in the Built in Storage Survey Pro Jobs directory
124. ING paani Rao aS R 253 TOPCOM anen ae R 104 start GPS survey 235 UNI S so esasiasteieeectnceeainacsds R 41 base SCCUP cccecceeceeees 239 VIDEO Wists accion R 167 Reference Manual choose base setup 238 choose one point setup 236 choose projection mode 236 connect to receiver 239 rover Setup 0000 242 start GPS survey wizardR 178 station and offset R 314 PO AG aana R 424 station equation 95 R 427 station offset R 363 stereographic projection 204 205 store offset pointsR 316 R 344 straight grade R 394 sun shot 127 R 157 super elevations R 412 surface scan 166 R 143 Survey menu R 171 surveying in azimuths 71 surveying settings R 45 T tangent offset 151 R 385 tape offset R 309 tape OU iin eta Ye 70 templates R 400 add edit R 409 AEE E E E E ere ay 229 three points on a curve R 379 time format 6 time date settings R 54 R 55 TIN ea aane 97 R 319 Topcon settings R 104 transie aaea R 31 translate 159 R 431 by coordinates 160 by distance 6 160 Transverse Mercator projection 203 204 traverse sideshot R 124 remote mode R 129 traverse adjustment R 434 1 8 traverse base R 254 traverse now or later R 126 t
125. Longitude Latitude is where e ema an you enter the geodetic origin of the map i Central Longitude 120 3000 projection False Northing e False Northing Easting is where you enter the coordinate offsets at the origin of the map projection False Easting 2500000 0 m N Parallel 46 0000 S Parallel 44 2000 e Scale factor is where enter the scale factor of the map projection e N S Parallel is where you enter the north and south standard parallels of the map projection e Azimuth is where you enter azimuth of the central line of the map projection Key In Zone Oblique Mercator Settings The Key In Zone Oblique Mercator screen is sued to set extra parameters when the Zone Key In Zone Type is set to Oblique Mercator Angle Azimuth at Azimuth At is where you enter the convention Equator for projection azimuth Your choices are e Equator Origin at E Equator 3 Center of Projection Origin At is where you enter the convention _ Rectify Coordinates e Center of Projection for projection azimuth e Equator R 222 Survey Menu GPS Module e Center of Projection Rectify Coordinates is where you set if the coordinates are rectified Coordinates are rectified if the local plane is rotated by the azimuth angle of the central meridian of the projection so that grid North lines up with geodetic north at the origin Key In Zone Ellipse The Key In Zone Ellipse sc
126. Map card graphic Stake CP gt opens the next slope staking screen The following slope staking screens are identical to non road layout slope staking screens and are described starting on Page R 295 R 423 Survey Pro Reference Manual Road Station and Offset The Road Station and Offset routine allows you to take a shot toa prism that is positioned anywhere on the road and compute the details of where that point is located in relation to the road This information can then be compared to the data from a grade sheet Tap Road opens the Tap on a Road screen where you can tap on any road in the job to select it Name displays the name of the selected road Pese sira cel Sicsae P x Begin Station displays the station assigned to Tap Road a H anm H the beginning of the road E End Station displays the final station in the Name Example road Begin Station 0 00 000 Use Station Equation When checked the End Station 3 78 540 current station equation will be applied to the _ Use Station Equation road OCC 1 HI 5 500 BS 0 00 00 Equation Settings opens the Station Equation screen Page R 427 where a station equation can be configured Backsight opens the Backsight Setup screen Page R 118 Next gt takes you to the next Road Station and Offset screen where the slope staking parameters are set up R 424 Roads Menu Road Station and Offset Screen Two The sec
127. Page R 197 where the measurement is taken by the rover on the remote benchmark The New Elevation field of the Remote Elevation screen will then display the calculated elevation for the base point to be set on tapping Accept R 230 Survey Menu GPS Module Import GPS Control The Import GPS Control wizard is used to merge an accurate NEE location control point source with a GPS collected point in the job file This point will then be designated as a GPS control point and can be used to solve a localization adjustment Solving the localization adjustment can be done automatically at the end of this wizard manually after the end of this wizard or at a later time There are three methods to import the control point source e Import from a text format OPUS Solution Report email e Import from a text format NGS Datasheet file e Key ina coordinate in NEE LLH WGS84 or LLH local Select Points and Import Source The first screen is used to select the job points you want to merge with accurate NEE coordinates to convert to GPS control and select how you will enter the control point source to get the accurate NEE To From opens the Select Point s screen where you can select points by specifying a point range GPS Import Control Tap Points opens a map view where you can Select one or more GPS collected points you wishto select points by tapping them on the screen make into GPS control points An accur
128. RD BACK indicates if the rod must Rod Elev 103 510 Shot move forward toward the total station or Stace i Shot Data ae backward away from the total station Angle Right 38 00 00 Sore Tape e th 00 00 Go RIGHT Go LEFT indicates if the rod must ate Dist ais te Topo SS move to the right or left from the total station s Back Stake Next gt point of view EDM This button can be toggled to shoot in various EDM modes The options available depend on the total station being used Consult the total station s documentation for more information on the EDM modes that it supports CUT FILL displays the required amount of cut or fill to bring the stake point to the design point s elevation Rod Elev displays the elevation at the rod s location computed from the last shot Change is used to modify the current design elevation which will also modify the associated CUT FILL value for the current station being staked R 418 Stake Out Point o Point O45 Roads Menu Shot takes a shot to the prism and computes come go cut fill information Shot data displays the measurements from the last shot Store opens the next screen Store Tape opens the Stake Out Point Tape Offset dialog box Page R 309 where the staked point can be stored that includes a specified offset The default value is the appropriate distance correction to the design point Topo SS
129. Receiver Tap Bluetooth if you wish to set the rover receiver as the Bluetooth favorite device Using Bluetooth to talk to the rover receiver Tap Connect Connect gt when you are ready Connect to Base Connect to Rover with Bluetooth Create New Receiver J opens the Receiver Setup screen Page R 95 where you can define a new base or rover receiver Receiver Settings opens the Job Settings Receiver and Post Process screens where you can change the settings for the current active receiver activate a different receiver or change the post processing settings Bluetooth opens the control panel Bluetooth settings application where you can set a recognized receiver as the Bluetooth favorite R 181 Survey Pro Reference Manual This button only shows when the selected receiver is using the Bluetooth port Connect gt sets the selected instrument as the current active instrument begins communicating with the device and opens the next setup screen in the Start GPS Survey wizard Note When the current active instrument is Demo Mode only the Demo Mode receiver will show up in the list If you are in Demo Mode and you wish to begin surveying with a real receiver tap Receiver or to activate the desired instrument Base Setup Base Setup One Pick Base Point The first Base Setup screen is used to pick the base point and set the antenna height Base Setup Base Setup Sel
130. Resect Points to Shoot is the number of known positions that will be shot from 2 to Shots per Resect Point I7 ae Shots per Resect Point is the required number of shots to shoot to each foresight when Direct Only is selected in the next field and is the required number of sets when Direct and Reverse is selected in the next field Sequence is the set order when shooting each foresight You can select either Direct and Reverse or Direct Only Solve opens the Resection dialog box described below where all of the shots are performed Resect Point 4 R esecti on Scr een Two Resect Point lv Resect Point is the known point that you will Option HR 7 co it B e Shoot Option allows you to select the type of data DRIV 5 030 5 001 100 650 of that is recorded when shooting the specified FENG 3 160 5 010 100 955 1 foresight You can select Distance and Angle or TOPO alib a035 102 902 A if shooting at least three foresights you can also select to record the Angle Only HR is the length of the rod w Opens the Smart Target options Page R R 153 Survey Pro Reference Manual 449 Take Shot Takes a shot to the prism at the specified foresight point After the last shot is performed the Save Point dialog box will open described next Save Point Once the final shot is completed the Save Point dialog box will open showing the save Point
131. Rover Receiver Measure To Slant measure mark Ra Antenna or the Post Processing Antenna screen Measured j 4m Serial Antenna Type is where you select the model of Radius fo 174 antenna to use The options available here Notch ji depend on the current receiver Offset i 009 rn Set Measure To is where you select method for antenna height measurements Most antennas have only two choices measure to bottom of mount or a visible slant measure mark Measured is where you enter the height of the antenna measured to the location specified in the Measure To field Radius is where you enter the distance from the antenna s center to the measuring mark on its outer edge Offset is where you enter the vertical distance measured from the Measure To location to the phase center Serial is the serial number of the antenna This information is only written as a note in the raw data Notch Is the notch number on the antenna that you are measuring to Note If your antenna type is Manual the Radius and Notch fields will not be available Set Updates the base antenna settings with the values selected on this screen R 184 Survey Menu GPS Module Vertical Offset Slant Offset m Radius oe Phase Center Point Slant Height Vertical Height Marker Note When this screen is used by the RTK rover for updates of antenna height during a survey the Set button will send the new antenna parameters
132. S Point Flags screen is used to select the advanced settings for the selected point Edit GPS Point Flags 7 O0 Set Up Group is the set up group of the point See the User s Manual for more information on Set Up Group No base station is set set up groups i ida GPS Control Point When checked will include GPS Control Points the selected point in the list of localization C GPS Control Point control points _ Use for Horizontal Control Use for vertical Control Use for Horizontal Localization When checked will use the point for horizontal control in the localization solution Use for Vertical Localization When checked will use the point for vertical control in the localization solution accepts the screen selections and returns to the previous screen R 63 Survey Pro Reference Manual Edit Polylines The Edit Polylines screen is used to add edit and delete polylines in the current job The first screen will display a list of all the Add Edit Polylines polylines that are stored in the current job Tew Delete Ze Selecting any of the polylines listed will display Description Points 3 32 36 a horizontal overhead and vertical side view of that polyline Routed 1 3 32 New will open the Polyline Editor where a new polyline can be created Edit will open the selected polyline in the New Polyline screen described below Delete will delete the selected
133. S point a W T5 5C C cs sT Right Left x Oses E X Cseren CS gt ST specifies that the curve starts at the curve to spiral and ends at the spiral to tangent der gt synsery im TS gt SC specifies that the curve starts at the tangent to spiral and ends at the spiral to curve Right Left specifies is the curve turns toward the right or left as you face the spiral from the TS or CS M Store SC ST When checked saves a point for the computed SC point M Store PI When checked saves a point for the computed spiral PI R 397 Survey Pro Reference Manual Results Tangent In the tangent direction entering the spiral at the TS or CS Tangent Out the tangent direction exiting the spiral at the SC or ST X of Throw is the distance along the tangent where a perpendicular line intersects with the radius point Y of Throw is the minimum distance between the tangent and the extended circular curve X is the distance from the TS to the SC along the tangent Y is distance from the SC to the tangent Delta is the angle between the tangent and the line between the PI and SC lt X gt lt X of Throw gt Tangent V Spiral Curve f Delta TS Tangent to Spiral Spiral PI SS Y of Throw SC Spiral to Curve Circular Curve R 398 Roads Menu The Roads Menu contains the routines used to perform road layout Edit Templates Edit
134. Scan Statistics screen R 144 Survey Menu Conventional Mode Surface Scan Statistics The Surface Scan Statistics screen displays details about the surface that was just defined Sip ace Goan Sia uSstEe Q Store Pts This box should be checked Rectangle Dimension Battery 16 to store the points that are shot during AW 1 780 ift x 4 1 700 ift the surface scan Enter the starting point number in the corresponding Total Number of Points to Shoot field 342 18 rows x 19 cols Estimated Time to Finish Back Returns to the previous screen 9 min s 5 secs Go gt Opens the Surface Scan Results a swere ft iy screen R 145 Survey Pro Reference Manual Surface Scan Results The Surface Scan Results screen contains two cards that detail the progress of the surface scan The Map card shows the points that were shot in green points that have not yet been shot in gray and rejected points in red Results card will stop the surface scan Map card Changes the orientation of the current view R 146 Surface Scan Results Elapsed Time 1 min s 10 sec s Remaining Estimated Time 14 min s 1 sec s Point Being Shot Surface Scan Results Battery 30 23 342 Row 2 18 Col 15 19 Shots Failed O w Done 6 Shots Rejected 0 Failed 0 000 Points Stored 23 Results Map Results Map uh uh Video Scan Ai Survey Menu Conventional Mode Video Scan Thi
135. See Page R 171 for a description of the Survey Menu if running in GPS mode Backsight Setup Traverse Sideshot Repetition Shots Multiple Sideshots Distance Offset Horizontal Angle Offset Vertical Angle Offset Auto Collect Corner amp 2 Lines Corner amp Angle Corner amp Offset Corner amp Plane Surface Scan Video Scan Shoot From Two Ends Record Mode Resection Remote Elevation Check Point Solar Observation Sn BAe OA Se FS aoe es ee eS a Remote Control R 117 Survey Pro Reference Manual Backsight Setup The Backsight Setup screen allows you to define your backsight prior to performing data collection or stakeout The screen is also accessible from any screen that requires a backsight Note all the information in the Backsight Setup screen is saved and will automatically be recalled if the job is reopened at a later time but the screen must still be re solved before you can begin surveying Occupy Point is the name of the point from Backsight Setup h job that th l ion i the current job that the total station is Occupy Paint lis v occupying panit 6 00 ift E HI is the height that the total station is above i a lw x a 8 the ground E HR is the distance that the backsight prism is H Fixed Backsight HR fo 00 it E above the ground Backsight Circle o 00 00 w opens the Smart Target options Page R Current BS Direction 240 44 18 449 emote gt
136. Stake Bisector of Non tangent Corners as from a straight section to a curve will also e Always Start Stakeout With Coarse Mode be staked when this is checked Use Manual Updating Remote Control _ Design Elevation tom Offset Segment M Stake Bisector of Non tangent Corners ER aE When staking an offset to a centerline that contains a corner this option when checked Turn Gun to Design Point SD HA 2A will stake the corner point where the two Cut Sheet Offset Stored offsets intersect M Always Start Stakeout With Coarse Mode When checked the EDM mode toggle button found in all stakeout screens will initially be set to coarse mode fast shot This instructs the total station to measure distances faster but with slightly less accuracy M Use Manual Updating Remote Control When this is checked a button in the stakeout screens must be pressed to take a shot When this not checked shots are continuously taken in the stakeout screens This is only valid when running in remote mode using a robotic total station M Design Elevation from Offset Segment Determines where the cut fill value is computed from in the Offset and Road Stakeout screens when the Offset checkbox is checked and a non zero offset is entered When checked the cut fill value is calculated from the design elevation of the node you are staking to When unchecked the cut fill value is calculated from the design elevation at the specified offset
137. Tap Set Zone to setup a mapping plane Show Details Reset Origin Geoid Mapping Plane Ground solve Localization Select Zone Solve Localization Switch to using a mapping plane fram the coordinate system database Switch to using Ground TOS Localization mode Switch to Mapping Plane Switch to TOS Localization Ground TDS Localization Mode Mapping Plane Mode The Projection Information screen is used to select and solve the horizontal and vertical projections which are used to transform GPS measured WGS84 coordinates latitude longitude height into local coordinates North East EKlevation The upper portion of the screen displays the status and details on the current projection mode The screen is also used to switch between mapping plane and localization mode The buttons available will vary depending on the current projection mode TDS Localization mode is described in detail starting on Page R 206 and Mapping Plane mode on Page R 218 R 205 Survey Pro Reference Manual Projection TDS Localization Mode The Projection screen is described below for when the horizontal projection mode is set to TDS Localization ae Projection Use this setting when you want ground level Ground TDS Localization coordinates and there is no projection and no Start a survey to set the TDS Localization datum to define a geodetic coordinate for jeuieouraiates transformation In this mode a default m
138. The Radial Sideshots routine combines the functionality of the Multiple Sideshots routine with the accuracy of the Repetition Shots routine It is used to perform repetition shots to a backsight and any number of foresights side shots from the same occupy point The routine consists of multiple screens Each is customized according to where you are in the routine Consult the User s manual for more information on using this routine R SS BS Dir 3 amp accesses the Surveying Settings screen Page R 45 and Radial Sideshot Settings screen which is identical to the Repetition Settings screen Page R 53 with the exception of the choices for the Shooting Sequence Select B gt F1 gt gt Fn F1 gt gt Fn gt B to shoot all Face 2 side shots in the same order as the Face 1 side shots or B gt F1 gt gt Fn Fn gt gt F1 gt B to shoot the Face 2 side shots in reverse order OCC 1 HE 5 200 BS 2 359959 58 Option Distance amp Angle Number of Sets Raw HA O O0 03 deg Raw Zenith 90 18 17 deg Raw Slope Dist 13 240 feet H yndur Gil gnsay een BI Option When shooting the first set measuring a distance and angle for each shot is required Shoot BS Next SsS Dj gt i but when starting all subsequent sets Angle Only can also be selected for this field Number of Sets is where the desired number of sets is specified Done with SS gt is used when you are finished shooting side shots
139. The Remote Control screen allows you to turn ee ere Oo B the total station in any direction using the Battery 95 IDLE Link GOOD arrow buttons on the keypad and control the Results video map aim ALH eN tacking functions i na 0 00700 The arrow keys are typically used to get the ar a oe as k total station to aim in the general vicinity of za 87 55 10 e e e e e e Sto the prism prior to initiating a search The total ___ eM station will continue to turn in the direction of the button as long as the button remains He 0 000 it E lv HI 5 000 pressed EDM Mode Standard EJ aims the scope upward aims the scope downward gt turns the scope to the right as you face the total station from the data collector lt turns the scope to the left GeoLock This button is available when GeoLock is enabled and when a supported total station has lost lock on the prism Tapping it will turn the total station to the area of the prism computed by the GPS solution followed by a prism search See the User s Manual for more information on using GeoLock Search starts the search routine where the total station searches in a specific pattern until it sees the prism and then stops R 162 Survey Menu Conventional Mode Lock puts the total station in track mode where it will track the movements of the prism Stop stops the total station from tracking or
140. This setting disabled for receivers that do not support user defined parity setting Defaults automatically sets all the selectable values to their defaults based on the current receiver hardware Receiver Set sets the selected modem communication settings for the specified port on the receiver Note The modem communication settings are also set in the receiver during the base and rover setup procedure Therefore you will not usually have to use the button on this page Radio Settings Screen The Radio Settings screen is used to configure settings of the base or rover radio modem All settings available are described below However not all radios support all of the described settings so if you do not see one of these fields it is because the radio type does not support it R 100 Radio Settings Current Settings 1 450st9600 Channel Mode Configure Channel p 464 5500 Mode 450s 9600 Trimble Internal Radio Job Menu GPS Module Radio Settings Current Settings Channel 9 Sensitivity Medium Baud arity 9600 Mone Configure Channel Sensitivity Med ium Pac Crest Radio Channel is where you select the channel the radio will use to communicate with the other radio Sensitivity is where you select the sensitivity of the radio Mode is where you select the transmit format used by the base radio The rover radio m
141. a a O amp Start Station is the location of the beginning Start Station k End Station Slone Parabolic Transition 110 0 ift po Hinge on of the super elevation on the alignment gt Length End Station is the length of the super elevation measured from the Start Station or it is the end station depending on how the button is toggled Note Keep in mind that the slope at the end of a super elevation will continue down the road unless another super elevation is entered to change the slope back again For example a curve will typically require two super elevations for each side of the road one at the beginning of the curve and one at the end Slope 1 2 is the starting and ending slopes of the road respectively The starting slope must match the current slope of the road at that station Parabolic Transition 1 2 is the length of the vertical curve that will lead in and out of the super elevation respectively Parabolic transitions are optional parts of a super elevation and result in a smoother change going into and coming out of a super elevation similar to how a spiral curve is used with a horizontal curve Note One half of the parabolic transition length will extend before and after the starting point and or the ending point of the super elevation This should be considered when using parabolic transitions near the end of an alignment since this length cannot extend beyond the limits of the roa
142. a centerline M Generate DTM with Staked Points will add any staked points to the non reference DTM layer and generate a DTM surface for all the objects on this layer This DTM surface will be updated when a new R 320 Select Line De Ridge Polyline Stakeout Menu point is stored to it You can also view this surface with live cut fill volumes at anytime from the 3D View screen Page R 85 Note Viewing the DTM during DTM Stakeout is a useful quality assurance technique to determine where additional points are needed Setup View DTM opens the Setup DTM 3D screen Page R 80 where the non reference DTM layers are configured and optionally viewed from the 3D View screen Page R 85 Backsight opens the Backsight Setup screen Page R 118 where the current backsight can be modified Next gt opens the next screen Choose a Centerline Stakeout Stake DTM Choose a Centerline 7 amp The Select Line screen is used to select a particular polyline or alignment that defines a centerline Separate overhead and side views are displayed for the selected polyline Simply select the desired line and tap amp R 321 Survey Pro Reference Manual Stake DTM Screen Two The second Stake DTM screen displays all Stake DTM relevant information for the current rod Data Result cel 4 gt position and a graphic that shows the reference pa 350200 gg DTM surface and its corners Once
143. a layer is selected The Delimiters source TXT file can contain either plane C2 Space Comma Tabs Other i coordinates or geodetic coordinates Units Delimiters is the character that separates Meters Int Feet US Survey Feet each column of text in the ASCII file Coordinates Units are the units that the distances in the Plane L Geadetic DMS Geadetic Decimal file were stored in C Skip the first row Coordinates is used to specify if the coordinates are plane coordinates geodetic coordinates in degrees minutes seconds format or geodetic coordinates in decimal format M Skip the first row should be checked if the first line in the ASCII file contains non coordinate information such as a heading Next gt opens the second screen R 18 File Menu Import TXT Coordinates Screen Two gt Name Column No Start Point Name Ascii Import Wizard When the first option is selected here the column number used for the name field in the TXT file is specified here When the second Columns Northing Easting Elevation Description option is selected it is assumed that the TXT file does not contain point names and will assign the first point the name specified here and increment to the next available point name for the remaining points _ Specify Missing Elevation Threshold Columns is where the column number for each specified coordinate exi
144. a point list can be created Base Point M Base point The distances to all the selected Scale Factor 7 points will be scaled relative to this point The coordinates for the base point will not change Scale Include Elevation in Adjustment 7 ive 7 Scale factor is the scale factor that is applied to the distances from the base point to the selected points M Include Elevation in Adjustment When checked the elevations to the selected points will also be adjusted by the scale factor relative to the Base point Solve will perform the adjustment on the selected points and change the coordinates accordingly Information will be written to the raw data file detailing the adjustment R 430 Translate Adjust Menu Translate The Translate screen will move a group a points horizontally and vertically by a specified distance and direction Tap Points allows you to select points by 5 points selected tapping them from a map view y To From Opens the Point List screen Page Translate by Coordinates R 443 where a point list can be created E M Translate by Coordinates When checked all of the selected points will be adjusted in the same direction and distance as between a specified From point or location and a To point or location When unchecked the selected points will be adjusted by the specified direction and distance The choice made here determines the options available below
145. a shot is ZA 90 00 00 taken the rod location and the occupied TIN sD 25 000 triangle are displayed Data shows the angle and distance information from the previous shot Point 43 Inst EDM Y HR2 134 m E 7 edaj a lt a Result shows the current northing easting and elevation of the rod as well as the computed elevation of the reference DTM at the current location and the cut or fill necessary to bring the a E elevation at the current location to the elevation of the reference OTM 30 199 DTM at the current location Fill 0 177 M 1 548 620 Note If the DTM and Cut or Fill fields are blank after taking a shot it indicates the rod is outside the reference DTM boundary Centerline shows the current station and offset information for the Centerline 4 gt rod location relative to the centerline selected from the previous screen The type of line segment in the polyline or alignment at the a ne current station is also displayed This card is only available if the Bane aan With Centerline checkbox was checked in the first Stake DTM screen Note Tapping anywhere within the map view will open a larger map view with zoom controls Point is the point name that will be assigned to the next stored stake point R 322 Stakeout Menu Desc is the description that will be assigned to the next stored stake point HR is the height of the rod v opens the Smart Target options Page R 449 E
146. a0 Kc gt ee ee er R 259 notes settings R 260 procedure eecce ees 175 remote control R 271 select 2 aceccigte ees aceeedete R 258 shot results R 263 SOUS aac oiircsuhsceton R 262 side shot 008 R 264 stakeout c eee R 265 level settings 08 R 50 leveling ooeec 171 leveling adjustment R 269 line and offset R 303 R 342 line tangent to circle R 383 linework cceceseceeeee R 75 localization cc ceeceee 204 default zone 215 horizontal card R 213 manual parameters R 213 ONE point 257 parameters 006 252 pick from database R 209 residuals 0006 R 212 set ZONE cceceeceeees R 207 SOLV Oasa aE R 210 solve for Basic GPS R 251 vertical card R 213 with control points 248 localization calculator R 214 M MAIN MENU 880 ee 9 R 3 manage basemapB6 R 447 manage layers R 87 map check 145 R 367 map display options R 446 map projection 6 202 map VIEW eeeceee 22 R 444 mapping ground coordinates E aoaneseneusser ase 221 mapping plane select zone 214 217 mapping plane scale factor204 278 measure mode settings R 106 mMenu ItEMS cceccceeeeees 9 modem serial commR 100 R 102 R 103 MOVE DASC ccceeeecceeeeees 285 mult
147. al WGS84 1996 0 195 I IPO T enaa 226 R 15 GPS coordinates R 17 JOB coordinates R 16 TXT coordinates R 18 LandXML coordinatesR 20 import control 112 import coordinates 108 import GPS control260 R 231 index card 14 input Medsen 12 input shortcuts 14 installation RECON cacani aa 4 instrument profile R 36 instrument settings R 36 instrument stakeout R 278 international datums 198 intersection 144 R 359 inverse point to line R 351 point to location R 355 point to multiple points R 354 point to point R 350 point to polyline R 352 J Javad settings R 104 job backup restore R 27 information R 88 DEN unione e n R 8 ODE a a R 13 Open NnewW sssseseseescesseess R 8 JOD settini ocs 8 K key in ZONG 00cce sees 218 datum from databaseR 225 4 datum rotation and scaleR 224 datum translation R 224 elliS nresnani R 223 mapping plane parameters NEELATA EEEE R 222 oblique mercator settingsR 222 results aniue R 225 Lambert Conformal Conic203 Lambert zones 06 A 2 lat Ing ht eee 200 layers for staking DTM R 81 MANA CC ersen R 87 level loop benchmark R 266 ClOSE EA PET R 267 create sesesesesesesese R 258 Method ccceeeeee R 41
148. ality of the solution PDOP displays the Position Dilution of Precision It is a combination of HDOP VDOP and Time Dilution of Precision It will always be larger than HDOP and VDOP Cell Modem The Cell Modem card displays information about the radio communications and allows you to disconnect or reconnect a cell phone of IP modem connection R 173 Survey Pro Reference Manual Receiver mode see the Receiver Status card Page R 172 GPS Status lt Receiver Cell Modem Sky View gt Receiver Mode Solution Modem Reception displays two values indicating the data modem signal quality This information is only displayed if the receiver is Modem Reception 1n rover mode Signal Latency Reception Signal Latency displays the age of the differential correction used in the current GPS solution This value should be one second or less for good RTK solutions If this value is consistently greater than one second check the data modem link Reception displays the receiver s estimation of the percent quality of the radio link Dial Dials the cell phone or IP modem using the configuration set in the Cell Phone Settings or IP Modem Settings screen respectively Hang up Disconnects the cell phone or IP modem connection Post Process The Post Process card displays information about GPS raw data logging for post processing GPS Status T Post Proces ama Note Some GPS receivers moni
149. already exist the point names can be entered in these fields without re shooting them Shoot 1 Shoot 2 Shoot 3 Shoots and stores the corresponding point Horizontal Distance I nterval is the horizontal distance between each shot taken during the surface scan Vertical Distance Interval is the vertical distance between each shot taken during the surface scan Angle Grid gt HA ZA Point Allows you to define the corners of your perimeter by taking a shot to measure the horizontal and zenith angles to each corner or enter them in by hand or by selecting existing points from the current job respectively Horizontal Angle I nterval is the horizontal angle that will be turned between each shot taken during the surface scan Vertical Angle I nterval is the vertical angle that will be turned between each shot taken during the surface scan HR is the rod height which should typically be set to zero since all shots taken are reflectorless no rod Show Outline This will cause the total station to scan the perimeter of the defined surface This is useful to visually check the perimeter of your surface when the laser pointer is activated on the total station Show Unit This will cause the total station to scan a single horizontal vertical interval This is useful to visually check your interval settings when the laser pointer is activated on the total station Next gt Opens Surface
150. an be entered to define the centerline Begin Station M Tap Line allows you to tap an existing polyline or alignment that defines the OCC 357 HI 5 50 BS o 0o oo centerline of the road To From Opens the Point List screen Page R 443 where a point list can be created Begin Station defines the station at the beginning of the centerline Backsight opens the Backsight Setup screen Next gt opens the next screen Slope Staking Screen Two Slope Staking Q The second screen is used to describe the 1 2 Road Width L r profile of the road X Slope L 7 1 2 Road Width is the horizontal width of Left and Right sides of the road respectively Stake Curb Ditch l He lost from the centerline to the nearest edge of the curb or ditch X Slope is the cross slope of the Left and Right sides of the road respectively The slope is Rise l computed from 100 A negative slope will R 293 Survey Pro Reference Manual cause water to run from the centerline toward the edge M Stake Curb Ditch When checked this allows you to include a curb or ditch in the road profile Height defines the height of the curb or depth of the ditch A negative value would be used to define the depth of a ditch Offset From Edge of Road defines the width of the curb or ditch lt Back returns to the previous screen Next gt opens the next screen Slope Staking
151. ap Use local ellipsoid heights for elevation projection is created with your first RTK base setup You collect GPS measurement on points with known local coordinates and solve a Solve Localization Localization adjustment The Localization Seine Using a epeina pene annie adjustment will translate rotate and scale the coordinate system database default map projection s y x into your local coordinates N E Show Details opens the Projection Details screen where the complete details of the localization solution reference map projection and Geoid model are displayed Reset Origin opens the Localization Set Zone screen Page R 207 where you can enter the parameters of the intermediate mapping plane to be used for the localization adjustment Note This step is usually not necessary since the intermediate mapping plane is automatically set up by default using the location of the first RTK base setup in this job However if the first base is far away more than 10km or it is considerably higher or lower 200m you may wish to enter the parameters of the intermediate mapping plane Solve Localization opens the Solve Localization wizard Page R 210 where control points can be selected and the horizontal and vertical localization are solved Switch to Mapping Plane switches the horizontal projection mode from Ground TDS Localization to Mapping Plane Page R 218 R 206
152. ap view d des Pa synsery i M Store Pt When checked will store a point for the location s entered Solve will compute the distance and direction from the Begin point or location to the End point or location R 355 Cogo Menu The Cogo Menu contains all of the coordinate geometry routines used to perform computations from the existing job data The following screens are available from the Cogo Menu Point in Direction Intersection Offset Line Offset Points Station Offset Corner Angle Compute Area Triangle Solutions Map Check Predetermined Area HD VD to SD ZA SD ZA to HD VD SPAS Ot Se Of S AU Conversion R 357 Survey Pro Reference Manual Point in Direction The Point in Direction screen will calculate and store the position of a new point after providing a distance and direction from a known point From point is the point name of the reference point used for locating the new point Bearing is the direction from the omeo Ee A reference point to the new point ly Angle is the angle added to the Azimuth oan M Bearing to modify the direction to the new Horz Dist lv point Joor E A e Note To subtract an angle from the specified Solve azimuth or bearing enter a negative Angle value Point In Direction der gt sinsey iim Horiz Dist is the horizontal distance from the reference point to the new point Vert Dist is the ver
153. arc length and the two edge radii Fillet is the area between the arc length and the tangents R 377 Survey Pro Reference Manual Known PI and Tangents The PI and Tangents screen is used to compute and store the PC PT and radius points when the PI point and the direction of both tangents are known along with one other curve attribute PI Point is the PI point Azm PI gt PC Brg PI gt PC is the direction of the tangent from the PI to the PC Azm Pl gt PT Brg PI gt PT is the direction of the tangent from the PI to the PT The remaining curve attribute can be defined gt Store Pc with one of the following selections x C Store RP L Store PT Radius is the distance from the radius point to the curve der E gt sainsex an e Delta is the deflection angle Degree Arc is the deflection angle that results in a 100 ft arc length e Degree Chord is the deflection angle that results in a 100 ft chord length M Store PC When checked will store the computed PC point with the specified point name M Store RP When checked will store the computed radius point with the specified point name M Store PT When checked will store the computed PT point with the specified point name R 378 Curve Menu Results Radius is the distance from the radius point to the curve Delta is the deflection angle Tangent is the distance from the PC or PT to
154. are occupying H Check this if the point has good horizontal coordinates to use for horizontal control when localizing GPS Control Point Choose a known point suitable as a GPS control point to solve the setup Font Use This GPS Control Point For H This point has a good horizontal NE location Yi This point has a good vertical Elev location Start Control Point Occupy V Check this if the point has a good elevation to use for vertical control when localizing Start Control Point Occupy Opens the Occupy Control Point screen described on Page R 255 Occupy Control Point The Occupy Control Point screen is used to add geodetic coordinates to an existing project point and is described on Page R 255 Resection for New Base Point Occupy Check gt opens the Collect Check Point Prompt screen to select an existing job file point and initiate an occupation to check the localization solved with the minimum amount and then create an extra GPS control point which will be used to re solve the localization and run the blunder detection routine Start Now gt starts surveying without checking the localization In this case the localization solved with the minimum control R 250 Start Survey Wizard Float Radio 100 Sw 06 HRMS 8 16 Check GPS Resection ta Occupy a known point to create Occupy Check gt a GPS control point to check the Base at known p
155. as the point occupied by the prism Note The prism only needs to occupy the location at the side of the new point A prism is not necessary when shooting the location directly in front of the new point R 135 Survey Pro Reference Manual Vertical Angle Offset The Vertical Angle Offset screen allows you to compute and store the location of a new point that exists directly above or below the rod location but cannot be occupied such as the top of a utility pole Vertical Angle Offset Pum The new point will have the same coordinates occ 1 HI 5 50 BS 410 0 00 o0 as the rod location but with a different Foresight hd elevation cen Siena J I iM is a shortcut to the Surveying Settings screen Page R 45 synsey mg anduy Eal Foresight is the point name that will be used when storing the new point Shoot Prism will take a shot to the prism Aim Zenith will read the vertical angle i _ measured by the total station which should be facing the Mae new point s location a Backsight opens the Backsight Setup screen Page R a 118 den B R 136 Survey Menu Conventional Mode Auto Collect The Auto Collect screen allows users with robotic total stations to automatically collect points either at a specified time interval or after the rod has moved a specified horizontal distance Note This routine only works when used with a robotic total station in rem
156. ass e No horizontal solution is displayed when there is no horizontal solution in Ground TDS Localization mode This happens when you tap Solve H and no control points are selected e Unadjusted Mapping Plane is displayed in Mapping Plane mode when there is a mapping plane zone selected but no horizontal adjustment is solved Scale displays the scale factor Rotation displays the rotation Delta N E displays the horizontal shift from the centroid of the control points on the intermediate map projection to the centroid of the control points in the local coordinate system Origin N E displays the coordinate origin of the localization control points This is the centroid of the control points on the intermediate map projection R 216 Solve Localization Horizontal vertical status Slope M Slope E Seperation Origin M Origin E Survey Menu GPS Module Vertical Card The Vertical card shows results of the vertical localization solution Status displays the status of the current vertical solution This will be one of the following Control points solution eens 0 561 4 976 mM 9 063 101 m 3 169 060 m e Control points solution is displayed when the parameters were calculated from the selected control points e Current vertical site is displayed when there is a vertical solution and Solve V was not selected on this pass lt Back A t e Unadjusted geoid model is displayed
157. asting coordinate of the ground origin Desired Local Ground Coordinate Morth 5000 0 m East 5000 0 m Ground Coordinates Results The Ground Coordinates Results screen is used to preview the values to be used for the ground Reference Point Location Local coordinate system This screen displays the ees eae esen parameters for the ground coordinate system Longitude 12301605 05157 Wy If the origin was set to use either Key in Height 64 999 coordinates to define origin or Pick point to define origin on the first page the values on this page are calculated from the parameters entered in the wizard If the origin was set at the ETE Mapping plane origin then you need to enter roind the scale and offsets in the edit fields on this page Ground Offsets displays the shift applied to the mapping plane coordinates to get the desired local ground coordinate at the selected origin Ground Coordinates Scale displays the ground scale factor R 228 eia EE 2 f f Settings Fix Radio 99 SV 07 HRMS 0 02 Base Point 6 Add Mew Benchmark Elevation 101 357 New Point Name bm201 M Set HR 2 0 imi to Slant measure mark Ellipse h 64 999 m Old Elevation 87 766 m New Elevation m Survey Menu GPS Module Remote Elevation The Remote Elevation screen is used to compute and store a new base point elevation and vertical site by occupying a known vertical benchmark at the rover Note
158. at displays the points that would be stored but without actually storing anything to the job This is useful for testing the routine before storing information M Store Nodes When checked computes offset points that correspond to each node in the selected alignment points where the horizontal or vertical alignment change or that correspond to the existing points in a selected line or point range M Sta Intervals When checked computes offset points from the beginning of the selected line or point range and at each specified station interval along the line or point range Description is the description that will be assigned to all points that are stored R 362 Cogo Menu Solve computes the offset points and stores them if the Store Pts checkbox is checked Station Offset The Station Offset screen will compute and optionally store a point at a specified station and offset to an existing polyline or alignment The elevation for the stored point will always be set to the elevation of the first node of the polyline or alignment Start Station is the station for the first node Station Offset of the selected line a Station is the station on the line where you f want to compute an offset point from Offset is the offset distance that is to the left una when L is selected or right when R is selected from the selected line M Store Pts When checked will store the computed offset point with
159. at the distance units used in the source file be specified It is not necessary to specify the distance units when importing coordinates from a JOB file since those units are written within the file If importing coordinates where the distance units in the source file are different than the distance units for the current job the imported coordinates will be converted to the current job s distance units when they are imported This is normally the desired result but it can cause a problem if any distance units were set incorrectly This situation can most commonly occur when working with International Feet and US Survey Feet where the conversion from one to the other is not always obvious Usually the difference between International Feet and US Survey Feet is negligible 2 parts per million but when dealing with State Plane or UTM mapping plane coordinates which are often very large in magnitude the difference can be substantial if the coordinates are converted from one format to the other If importing coordinates from a source such as an HP 48 where you are not sure if the units are in International Feet or US Survey Feet into a job that is set to International Feet or US Survey Feet you will usually just want to import them without any conversion being performed To do this be sure to select the same distance units for the source file as those set for the current job R 15 Survey Pro Reference Manual Coordinates from a variet
160. at the rod position Segment Roadbed Segment displays the name of the template s ae CL oe ean segment at the rod position Fill to Edge 2 102 z Cut Fill is the necessary cut or fill that will bring the rod position even with the road s surface Cut Fill to CL is the necessary cut or fill that will bring the rod position to the same elevation as the centerline at the current station Cut Fill to Edge is the necessary cut or fill that will bring the rod position to the same elevation as the outer edge of the last segment at the current station Shot Data Card Displays the angles and distance measured by Alignment Cross Section Shot Data the total station from the last shot Angle Right 12 00 00 zenith 90 00 00 Slope Dist 34 000 R 426 Station Equation Road Hame Example Roads Menu Station Equation Road Stakeout Equation Settings or Slope Staking Equation Settings or Show Station Equation Settings The Station Equation screen is used to configure the stationing for an alignment with stationing that changes at a specific location This situation might occur where the road you are staking merges with another road and once you stake past the point where the roads merge you want to use the stationing assigned to the other road Once you pass the location where the stationing changes all ahead stations are displayed with a 2 after it to differentiate between a back and ahead station
161. ate MEE location will be merged with the job file GPS location Select a method Is used to select from the following sources for accurate coordinates e OPUS Solution Results txt file 2 points selected 4 S si Select a method to imput the source for the e NGS Data Sheet txt file accurate location of the GPS point e Key In Coordinate Next gt Opens one of two possible screens depending on the choice made for the Select a Method field in the first screen NGS Data Sheet tst file R 231 Survey Pro Reference Manual Enter Control Coordinate OPUS or NGS Data Sheet The purpose of this screen is to pick a data GPS Import Control sheet point or OPUS solution file to use as the Select an OPUS solution report to create control for control point source This is the second screen Point 1 43 GPS1 Search this directory for files Built in Storage Survey Pro Jobs eae that appears when either OPUS Solution or NGS Data Sheet was selected in the first screen Point displays the name of the selected job Select the RINEX file for this control point point that the control point source will be 639915 1u 060 merged into Search this directory displays the path to look for OPUS or NGS txt files Browse opens a new screen where you can select a different path to search for OPUS or NGS txt files On amp all txt files in the specified directory are read and any valid data sheet points tha
162. ation you Shooting the shot al on point A are shooting The specific shots you are e prompted for depends on which rod you are shooting and the number of sets configured in ao a e E the Level Settings screen Take Shot The top line indicates if you are shooting the rod over Point A or Point B and if you are shooting the shots for the first or second setup Set 1 of 3 The box on the second line tells you which shot R 268 Level Menu to take next The term Al means to shoot the rod over Point A for Set 1 If the box showed B3 it would mean to shoot the rod over Point B for Set 3 Take Shot takes the shot indicated within the box on this screen Peg Test Results Peg Test Results Average Dist Dist Dist Dist Dist Dist Dist Dist ee ee ee 2 0003 200 000 3 2 0003 200 000 3 2 0003 200 00063 2 00063 200 00063 b2 a2 bial HD1 HOZ Adjustment Error Distribution Worst Residual 0 000 0 000 0 000 0 000 U Q000000000 The Peg Test Results screen appears after all the required shots are performed for a peg test The screen lists the details for all the shots taken and the computed error All the shots taken and the error are recorded only in the raw data file Adjustment J weigh by of Setups Weigh by Length of Setups _ Adjust Affected Sideshot Points Adjust Loop From Begin To End 2 Adjust Loop From a Specific Point To
163. ative value or above the prism positive value Description is the description for the offset shot that is stored x D uw i BE z oO Note multiple offsets can be applied simultaneously Shoot will take a shot to the prism apply the offset s entered and then store the new point Backsight opens the Backsight Setup screen Page R 118 where the current backsight can be modified R 134 Survey Menu Conventional Mode Horizontal Angle Offset The Horizontal Angle Offset screen allows you to compute and store the location of a new point that cannot be occupied such as at the center of large tree The routine shoots a prism positioned at the side of the new point and then reads the OCC 1 HE 5 50 BS 410 0 00 00 horizontal angle when aiming toward the a Foresight M center of the new point to compute the new 9 E eA E o Points location ia is a Shortcut to the Surveying Settings screen Page R 45 Horizontal Angle Offset Eaa x Foresight is the point name that will be used when storing the new point Aim Center will record the horizontal angle from the total station which should be facing the center of the new point Shoot Prism will take a shot to the prism which is located at the side of the new point Backsight opens the Backsight Setup screen Page R 118 dew synsary i Note The new point will have the same elevation
164. ature Attributes screen is Point Feature Attributes e o a x available from the above path or whenever a _ Recently Used point is stored when Prompt for Attributes is Type checked in the Surveying Settings screen Page R 45 Recently Used when checked will arrange the order of the available features so the most recently used features are listed first Any feature in the current feature file can be selected from the corresponding drop down list Type 1 4 In Soaker The content displayed in the main portion of the window fully depends on the attribute information associated with the selected feature Edit Point Location The Location card is used to modify the Edit Point 373 northing easting and elevation of the selected Location Geodetic point Easting Elevation 100 0 ift R 61 Survey Pro Reference Manual Edit Point Geodetic The Geodetic card applies primarily to Survey Pro with GPS users Refer to the GPS Reference Manual for more information on this card M Has Geodetic Data when checked this Edit Point 104 allows you to edit the geodetic coordinates fora General Location Geodetic point Has Geodetic Data Advanced will open the Edit GPS Point it WCS 84 LLH C3 Local LLH we n bee a the advanced settings for oe Longitude 123 160493813 Height 45 5299 mi R 62 Job Menu Edit GPS Point Flags Screen Edit Point Set Flags The Edit GP
165. be modified Tap Points provides a map view where you can tap any existing points to define the fixed sides of the boundary To From Opens the Point List screen Page R 443 where a point list can be created Sone M Store Pt 1 2 When checked will store a aus point at the location of the end point s of the computed boundary line i gt Bearing defines the direction of the boundary sides with lengths that are not yet known j Ie x Osmers fs der B 7 Results Point 1 2 Displays the coordinate of the end points of the computed boundary line Total Area is the total area of the boundary Plot Area is the area enclosed by the pre defined fixed boundary lines Difference is the difference between the Total Area and the Plot Area R 371 Survey Pro Reference Manual HD VD to SD ZA The HD VD to SD ZA screen will convert a vertical and horizontal distance to an equivalent slope distance and zenith angle Horz Dist is the horizontal distance from the EEA EE tE EIA occupy pent to the foresight point rae A Vert Dist is the vertical distance from the 3 vacot fs YI occupy point to the foresight point HI is the distance that the total station is HI He 7 00 ift _ M above the ground C Earth Curvature Adjust HR is the length of the rod Ad opens the Smart Target options Page R 149 M Earth Curvature Adjust When checke
166. between the two above angles Backsight Circle The Backsight Circle dialog box is used to modify the horizontal angle read from a total station so that the resulting angle is an azimuth This routine can also be performed from the Backsight Solved screen Backsight Circle is the angle that will be subtracted from all horizontal angles read from the total station or entered manually when data collecting in manual mode Set Sets the value entered in the Backsight Circle field as the backsight circle and returns to the previous screen Note Closing this dialog box without tapping the button will result in no changes made to the original backsight circle Read from Instrument Reads the current horizontal angle from the total station and puts that value in the Backsight Circle field where it can then be as the backsight circle This is typically performed when it is known that the total station is facing a direction with a zero azimuth R 123 Survey Pro Reference Manual Traverse Sideshot The Traverse Sideshot screen is the main screen used for data collection ia is a Shortcut to the Surveying Settings Traverse Sideshot screen Page R 45 OCC 5 HI 5 50 BS 1 240 44 18 Foresight is the point name that will be used o Foresight 391 for the next stored point eee Hp 6 00 it Description is the description for the next stored point HR is the height of the rod w opens the Smart Tar
167. ce Change Radio Settings Screen Change Radio Settings The Change Radio Settings screen is used to view the current base radio settings and PacCrest PDL Settings change the channel sensitivity Current Configuration Channel 1 Sensitivity Low Channel displays the last radio channel when Serial 38400 M applicable Sensitivity displays the last radio sensitivity Configure when applicable Channel Baud displays the baud rate the receiver will sensitivity use to communicate with the modem Parity displays the parity the receiver will use to communicate with the modem Configure is where you can configure the channel the radio will use to communicate with the other radio and the sensitivity of the radio Set sends commands to the radio firmware to configure the settings selected on this screen Note some settings on the radio cannot be modified with Survey Pro To fully program the radio modems you need to PC software that should be supplied with the radio R 114 Job Menu Basic GPS Module Measure Mode See Page R 106 Post Process See Page R 107 Units See Page R 41 Format See Page R 43 Files See Page R 44 Surveying See Page R 45 R 115 Survey Pro Reference Manual Stakeout See Page R 47 Date Time See Page R 54 Buttons See Page R 55 General See Page R 56 R 116 Survey Menu The Survey Menu contains the routines used for collecting data
168. ce exceeds the tolerance LJ Enable Automatic Repetition entered here during a repetition shot Shooting Sequence BS Fo FS gt BS i M Shoot Distance To Backsight When checked a distance will be measured to each shot to the backsight When unchecked only the angles are measured Settings M Do Not Shoot Reverse Distances When checked distances are not measured during reverse shots M Enable Automatic Repetition When checked all remaining shots after the first shot to the backsight and foresight will occur automatically when using a motorized instrument Shooting Sequence specifies the order that the shots are taken from the following options e BS gt FS FS gt BS Backsight Foresight flop Foresight Backsight e BS gt FS gt BS gt FS Backsight Foresight flop Backsight Foresight e BS BS gt FS FS Backsight flop Backsight Foresight flop Foresight e FS FS gt BS BS Foresight flop Foresight Backsight flop Backsight R 53 Survey Pro Reference Manual e FS gt BS BS gt FS Foresight Backsight flop Backsight Foresight e FS gt BS gt FS gt BS Foresight Backsight flop Foresight Backsight e BS BS gt FS FS Backsight flop Backsight flop Foresight flop Foresight flop Date Time Settings The Date Time Settings card is used to set the date and time in the data collector Date displays the current date Time displays the current time Format Select Local to dis
169. cified in the Stakeout Settings screen Note Tap the graphic portion of the screen for an expanded view GPS Status displays the current solution type the number of satellites used and the horizontal and vertical precision computed by R 337 Survey Pro Reference Manual the receiver If this area of the screen is tapped the epoch count stops and the GPS Status screen opens Page R 172 Go SOUTH NORTH displays the distance the rover must move ina south or north direction to reach the closest point on the line Go EAST WEST displays the distance the rover must move in an east or west direction to reach the closest point on the line gt OCCUPYING gt ROVING switches from ROVING to OCCUPYING mode When ROVING the receiver is in dynamic mode and will calculate your position as you move to the point When OCCUPYING the receiver is switched to static mode depending on settings and will calculate the most precise position for the staked point Results Current Location displays either the directions to the closest point on the line or the current local coordinate LEFT of Line RIGHT of Line ON LINE displays the position of the rover with respect to the line Left and right are relative to north ON LINE is displayed when you are within the Horizontal Distance Tolerance specified in the Stakeout Settings screen Page R 47 Offset Dist displays the perpendicular offset distance from the line to the ro
170. ck that can contain any number of values and buttons that perform various operations When a value is being entered from the keypad it is displayed in a special area called the active area This value is then place in Level 1 of the stack after tapping the Enter c D 5 ran rad gt a is i OQO OAE Tapping a button on the display performs the fr cr at Gn 2 in Se corresponding operation on either the last a Prop Eat Rs value in the display or the last two values depending on the operation Each button is explained below where the value in Level 1 is x and the value in Level 2 is y Adds x and y alculator x Multiplies x and y Swp Swaps positions of x and y in the stack Subtracts y from x Divides y by x Drp Drops removes x from the stack Moves the active value to Level 1 of the stack or duplicates Level 1 if there is no active value Changes the sign of x Clr Clears the stack Edit Moves the value in Level 1 to the active area where it can be edited mt Enters 3 141592654 to the stack x Squares x R 90 Job Menu Vx Square root of x x Raises y to the power of x 1 x Inverse of x Sin Sine of x Cos Cosine of x Tan Tangent of x 10 Raises 10 to the power of x e Raises 2 718281828 to the power of x Sint Arc sine of x Cos Arc cosine of x Tant Arc tangent of x Log Common logarithm base 10 of x Ln Natural logar
171. compute the distance and direction from the Inverse point to all selected points des gt synsay in Results Azimuth is the azimuth from the Inverse Point to the selected point Horz Dist is the horizontal distance from the Inverse Point to the selected point Vert Dist is the vertical distance from the Inverse Point to the selected point Slope Dist is the slope distance from the Inverse Point to the selected point North is the change in the Y coordinate from the Inverse Point to the selected point East is the change in the X coordinate from the Inverse Point to the selected point R 354 Inverse Menu Inverse Point to Location Point The Inverse Point to Location Point screen will calculate the distance and direction from any point or location to another point or location ee eed uelslmiohMee ieamas Begin is the reference point or location used to compute the distance and direction to another Begin point or location Paint M End North 1654 995782 ift End is the other point or location whose correlation to the Begin point or location is computed Each location is defined by one of the following methods Location when selected the coordinates for any location can be entered in the appropriate fields meee e x Osmer E 1 gt Point when selected any existing point name can be entered in the appropriate field or selected from a m
172. cribed next where a new custom target can be created Edit Opens the Edit Smart Target screen described next where the selected Smart Target can be modified Delete Deletes the selected Smart Target R 449 Survey Pro Reference Manual Activate Activates the selected Smart Target The active smart target is marked with the symbol Note It is not necessary to access the Manage Smart Targets screen to activate a different Smart Target You can quickly activate a Smart Target by tapping next to any HR field and then tap the desired Smart Target from the list that appears Edit Smart Target y Manage Smart Targets or The Edit Smart Target screen is used to edit an existing Smart Target or create a new one Name is the desired name for the Smart Edit Smart Target Target Name Hew Target Target Type defines the type of target as bei Prism Reflectorless Long Range which e i eing a l whic increases the EDM power or On Gun which ae L Add offset uses whichever EDM settings are configured Prism Constant mrm on the total station for Leica total stations Prism Type only HR is the default HR for the Smart Target Use Target ID Add Offset to HR when checked the offset Use For Search C Use Always entered will always automatically be added to the HR entered for the Smart Target Prism Constant is the prism constant for the Smart Target Note I
173. cribed on Page R 162 All shots performed while trigonometric leveling with a robotic total station are performed from the Remote Control screen R 271 Stakeout Menu The Stakeout Menu contains a variety of stakeout routines including offset staking See Page R 333 for a description of the Stakeout Menu if running in GPS mode A Stake Points Stake List of Points Stake to Line Offset Staking Slope Staking Point Slope Staking Line and Offset Curve and Offset Spiral and Offset Show Station and Offset Store Offset Points Stake DTM Station Staking Define a Location Where is Next Point Note The stakeout routines behave differently when running in remote control mode For a description of this special mode refer to Page R 162 and the Remote Control section of the User s Manual R 273 Survey Pro Reference Manual Stake Points The Stake Points screen allows you to stake a single point or a series of points ii opens the Stakeout Settings screen Page R REMi D lt x 47 Design Point is the name of the first point F Design Point M that you want to stake Increment Hext Point Increment when advancing to the next point the point number is incremented by the value entered here A negative integer can be He 7 00 ift B lv entered to have point numbers advance in descending order Next Point gt advances the current Design Point by the Increment value If that point does not
174. ct to use a Duration or to record until is tapped Duration is where you enter the session length for the next occupation Set HR displays the current antenna measurement and measure to setting You can change the antenna measurement by entering a new value in the edit box This new antenna height will be sent to the receiver with your next control or check point collection You can change both the antenna measurement and measure to setting by tapping on to open the Receiver Antenna screen Page R 184 Note The Set HR button is only available if this is a stop and go post processing session or an RTK rover session Start sets the receiver to mark the beginning of a static point occupation with the entered Site ID and Description Stop sets the receiver to mark the end of a static point occupation Status opens the GPS Status screen Page R 172 R 203 Survey Pro Reference Manual Base Setup The Current GPS Base screen displays the position of the current RTK base reference position used by Survey Pro It can be used to open the Base Setup wizard which can set an RTK base receiver to begin broadcasting differential corrections and configure the base reference position in Survey Pro When you tap the Base Setup menu item the Current GPS Base ea Current GPS Base Station information screen oe ae is displayed Base Latitude 44 33 08 16360 N Base Point displays the current base point oee LEME ee eeu hi
175. ction to Gun ee 3 feet E Direction to Gun 1 00 ifeet Display when prism is within 3 meters from the Display when the prism is within the Horizontal target Distance Tolerance specified in the Stakeout Settings screen Page R 47 R 279 Survey Pro Reference Manual Stake List of Points Screen The Stake List of Points screen is used to stake points from a specified list of points Points can also be selected by description or polyline opens the Stakeout Settings screen Page R Eiri ea Eiatel a aLe ee 6 47 3 points selected Tap Points displays a map of the current Tap Points To From job Simply tap the points that you want to 2 Ly stake and then tap Design Point 3 To From Opens the Point List screen Page Increment R 443 where a point list can be created up 7 00 fe S vi Allows you to select points using a variety occ 1 HI 5 50 BS 2 0 00 00 of other methods including select all points all control points all non control points by description or by polyline Design Point displays the point to be staked The initial Design Point is the first point of the selected polyline or point range Change opens the Edit Point List screen where the current point list can be edited Increment is the number of points to advance from the Design Point after tapping Next Point gt A negative integer can be entered to have point numbers advance in descending
176. ctions on the data Survey Pro will now scan for Bluetooth receivers collector Any Bluetooth devices in the area Ae that are not valid receivers will not be Please make sure your EPOCH 25 receivers are displayed If a particular base rover receiver is powered on and your EPOCH Bluetooth Adapters are fully secured to COMZ Scan Note This wizard will only detect EPOCH 25 O Bluetooth receivers and specified Bluetooth dongles when used with supported data P ETOO ETUNA Finished Bluetooth Scan collectors with built in Bluetooth running Windows Mobile 5 See the Radio Settings Receiver screen on Page 112 if configuring a Bluetooth BtRxO1004 00084AC035032 Rover cellular phone for use as a data modem for 2 BtRx01007 0o084co35028 Bae Internet base corrections not detected it is automatically configured to use a serial connection Bluetooth Setup Wizard Choose Rover Connection Bie xO1004 Serial Cable Choose Base Connection BiRxO100 Serial Cable R 112 Job Menu Basic GPS Module Radio Settings Settings Radio Settings Radio Settings Base Rover Radio RTK O Base Rover Radio RTK D Internet Single Base NTRIP ATK Internet Single Base NTRIP ETK Cell Phone Dial Up Connection Use CMR Station Index Em Manage Connections Change Radio Settings Network IP Network Port The Radio Settings card is used to configure the base radio when using a local base
177. cular offset occurs o Tan offset is the distance perpendicular to the tangent to the curve at the particular station o Tan is the length of the tangent the distance from the PC to the PI o Tan TD is the distance on the tangent from the PI to the PC or the PI to the PT where the offset occurs R 385 Survey Pro Reference Manual e Chord Offset provides perpendicular offset information from the chord the line from the PC to the PT for each station on the curve PC deflection information is also provided The results are given in the following format Current Station o Station is the current station on the curve o Chord dist is the distance on the long chord from the PC toward the PT where the perpendicular offset occurs o Chord offset is the distance to the current station on the curve perpendicular to the long chord o PC Deflection is the angle to turn to the Chord Offset current station as if occupying the PC and backsighting the PI o Chord Length is the distance from the PC to the current station on the curve The first known part of the curve is defined by one of the following Radius is the distance from the radius point to the curve e Delta is the deflection angle e Degree Arc is the deflection angle that results in a 100 ft arc length e Degree Chord is the deflection angle that results in a 100 ft chord length The second known part of the cu
178. d R 413 Survey Pro Reference Manual Hinge on Center Edge determines if the super elevation is computed by rotating the road around the centerline or the road s edge Note When hinging on edge the road is actually rotated around the end of the first segment of the template that leads into the super elevation Only the first segment is adjusted with a super elevation The length and slope of any segments beyond the first will not be adjusted from a super elevation Check checks the road for errors and displays the results in the Roads Report screen described on Page R 405 R 414 Roads Menu Road Stakeout Road Stakeout Stake Road Q The Stake Road screen is used to stake any segment of a road profile at any station H Use Station Equation When checked the H Y lv current station equation will be applied to the Name Example road a Su eae Equation Settings opens the Station Equation End Station 3 78 540 screen Page R 427 where a station equation _ Use Station Equation can be configured occ 1 HE 5 500 BS 0 00 00 Tap Road opens the Tap on a Road screen where you can tap on any road in the job to select it Name displays the name of the selected road Begin Station displays the station assigned to the beginning of the road End Station displays the final station in the road Backsight opens the Backsight Setup screen Page R
179. d Past Results where applicable When the Past Results option is used to enter z ee a value in a specific field that was computed Station 00 ifeet previously within Survey Pro C L Offset HD ifeet C L Offset vO i ifeet Select the line that contains the value that you EL Offset 6 A C L Offset 5D i ifeet want to use and tap amp The selected value will Sag Offset HD l feet then be entered in the field associated with aeg Orear o that power button a Spare SD 20 004 Create Points Screen x Create Points The Create Points screen is used to store points that coincide with specific locations on an alignment Alignment Nodes When checked will store Greate an points at locations where a change occurs on an reste Points alignment for example where a straight Alignment Nodes section and a curved section meet Sta Interval Sta Intervals When checked will store a err a point at the specified station interval along an alignment Description sd Start Point Name is the name for the first start North point that will be stored from this screen East Description is the description that will be Eee 790 0 ift given to all the points that are stored from this screen Start Location is the location for the first point which is the reference location used to compute the locations of the remaining points The default location is the POB defined from the Edit Alignment screen R 440 Misce
180. d the resulting zenith angle and slope distance will account for the curvature of the earth and refraction Solve computes the equivalent slope distance and zenith angle from the data entered Results Zenith is the computed zenith angle from the occupy point to the foresight point Slope Dist is the computed slope distance from the occupy point to the foresight point R 372 synsey we dew Bi Cogo Menu SD ZA to HD VD The SD ZA to HD VD screen will convert a slope distance and zenith angle to an equivalent horizontal distance and vertical distance SD 7A to HD VD Slope Dist is the slope distance to be converted Slope Dist 253 4 it ly i Zenith is the zenith angle to be converted Zenith 88 23 lv HI He 7 0 it B a HI is the distance that the total station is above the ground _ Earth Curvature Adjust HR is the length of the rod synsey i Bd opens the Smart Target options Page R 449 M Earth Curvature Adjust When checked the computed horizontal distance and vertical distance will account for the curvature of the earth and refraction en R 373 Survey Pro Reference Manual AU Conversion The AU Architectural Units Conversion screen will convert distances with fractional inches to decimal distances If the job is configured for International Feet or US Survey Feet it is assumed that the distance entered in this screen is in the same units a
181. d compare Occupy 5 the measured distance with the computed Backsight 1 distance between the occupy and backsight Zenith 91 30 00 Slope Dist 143 447 ifeet oints stored in the current job p J HO Error 0 021 ifeet YD Error Note The Check by Distance method does not apply if the backsight is defined by a direction Angle Error By By Distance By Angle Circle By Angle when the backsight is defined by a roe Eae Core direction this routine will read the current horizontal angle from the total station and compare that to the backsight direction Circle opens the Backsight Circle dialog box described below Check by Distance Results Occupy is the current occupy point Backsight is the current backsight point Zenith is the zenith angle measured by the total station Slope Dist is the slope distance measured by the total station HD Error is the horizontal distance between the backsight point that was shot and the backsight point stored in the job A negative value indicates that the point shot is closer to the total station than the point in the job VD Error is the vertical distance between the backsight point that was shot and the backsight point stored in the job R 122 Survey Menu Conventional Mode Check by Angle Results Circle is the horizontal angle that was measured by the total station Azimuth is the known azimuth to the current backsight Error is the difference
182. d here Order indicates the order of the level loop that MMESAESENIE you want to load the default tolerances for Load FCGS tolerances for Three Wire leveling with the selected order and class Class indicates the class of the level loop that you want to load the default tolerances for Order First Class QT Tapping amp will load the tolerances into the Second On Level Settings screen based on the FGCS C Third specifications for the order and class selected These tolerances can still be manually changed later Note It is important to recognize that Survey Pro can only display a warning if tolerances are not met It is up to the surveyor to determine if the level loop meets the criteria for a particular standard R 52 Job Menu Repetition Settings The Repetition Settings card contains the settings that control how repetition shots are performed and acceptable tolerances Horizontal Tolerance a warning message will fof a 7 be displayed if a horizontal angle exceeds the Stakeout Repetition T tolerance entered here during a repetition shot Horizontal Tolerance Sec Zenith Tolerance a warning message will be Zenith Tolerance 30 0 eee displayed if a vertical angle exceeds the Distance Tolerance tolerance entered here during a repetition shot _ Shoot Distance to Backsight Distance Tolerance a warning message will L Do Not Shoot Reverse Distances be displayed if a distan
183. d that lists the horizontal distances measured from the instrument to each foresight M Elev is the column that lists the elevation computed for every point shot This column cannot be turned off M Desc When checked a column is displayed that lists the description for each point shot that exists in the current job Turning R 260 Level Menu points are not stored in the job and therefore do not have descriptions Column Width When M Auto Resize is checked the column widths are automatically sized so the content of each column is visible Style When set to Compact the backsight data for a particular setup is displayed on the same row as the foresight data from the previous setup When set to Double Spaced the data for each backsight and foresight shot are displayed in separate rows Level The Level screen provides information about the current level loop and is used to specify which of the four possible observation types to shoot next rrent L Details displ il 7 o a mei etails displays details about Current Loop Details EE Pap Last Benchmark Point H int di Si an S See Backsight Point displays details about the current backsight Most of these details will BS FS Sight Lengths 200 000 ift only be available after shooting an Total BS F5S Lengths 600 000 ift intermediate shot side shot or stakeout shot Backsight Point TP1 Elev 100 000 H Dist 200 000 Sideshot gt opens
184. d the default AT command to dial of ateOdt followed by the Number to Dial will be used Hang Up is the alternate Hayes AT command to use for hanging up Dial Command is the alternate Hayes AT command to use for dialing R 102 IP Modem IP Address of Base Port Socket of Base Sgn cee S a Use Advanced Settings Connection Command Disconnect Command Job Menu GPS Module IP Modem Settings Screen The IP Modem Settings screen is used to create or modify an IP modem configuration You can only configure in IP modem when RTK Rover is selected for the receiver IP Address of Base is the IP address of the base Port Socket of Base is the socket number of the base Use Advanced Settings When checked allows you to specify alternate Hayes AT commands to connect and disconnect When unchecked the default connect command of ate0 amp d0dt and disconnect command of athO will be used Connection Command is the alternate Hayes AT command used to connect Disconnect Command is the alternate Hayes AT command used to disconnect General Settings The General Settings card is used to configure settings specific to each brand and model Models which have special settings available are described below Settings For Trimble Receivers Store post process file to is where you choose the location of the post processing file Choices are e Receiver memory e Data Collector Note This setting i
185. define which point on the curve is known PY Station One of the following options must be selected from the dropdown list PYC Elevation Begin Grade e Curve Length is selected when the length arenes of the curve is known When selected the following must also be specified o Curve length is the length of the vertical curve the horizontal distance between the PVC and PVT e Point On Curve is selected when the location of another point on the curve is known When selected the following must also be specified A iD in i o Station is the station where the other point is located on the curve o Elevation is the elevation of the other point e Hi Lo Elevation is selected when the high or low point for the curve is known When selected the following must also be specified o Hi Lo Elevation is the elevation of the curve at the location where the tangent is zero the crest of the curve R 390 Curve Menu Note When the begin and end grades are both positive or both negative the high low elevation will not be located between the PVC and PVT PVC PVI Station is the station for the specified point PVC PVI Elevation is the elevation for the specified point Begin Grade is the grade at the tangent of the PVC End Grade is the grade at the tangent of the PVT Solve computes the details for the vertical curve Layout opens the Parabolic Curve Layout screen Page R 392 where yo
186. deflection angle that results in a 100 ft chord length The second known part of the curve is defined by one of the following Delta is the deflection angle Length is the arc length Chord is the chord length Tangent is the distance from the PC or PT to the PI Mid Ordinate is the distance between the curve and the chord at the center of the curve s length External The minimum distance between the PI and the curve Solve Computes the details for the horizontal curve Layout Opens the Horizontal Curve Layout screen Page R 381 where points can be created so the curve can be staked in the field Traverse Opens the Traverse on Curve screen Page R 388 R 376 Results Curve Menu Radius is the distance from the radius point to the curve Length is the arc length Chord is the chord length Deg Arc is the deflection angle that results in a 100 ft arc length Deg Chord is the deflection angle that results in a 100 ft chord length Delta is the deflection angle Tangent is the distance from the PC or PT to the PI External is the minimum distance between the PI and the curve Mid Ord is the distance between the curve and the chord at the center of the curve s length External not shown The minimum distance between the PI and the curve Segment is the area between the arc length and the chord Sector is the area between the
187. description for the stake point being stored The default description is the station side and distance from the centerline for the design point Show Results on OK When this checkbox is checked a Results screen described next will open after tapping amp from this screen Note This screen will not appear if the Write Cut Sheet Data Only No Store Point checkbox is checked in the Stakeout Settings screen although the Results screen will still appear if the Show Results on OK checkbox was never unchecked from this screen It is checked by default Offset Staking Stakeout Results This screen shows detailed cut fill values which may be needed when marking a road or offset stake Stakeout Results returns you to the second Offset Staking Target Left EOP a Station 10 00 000 screen where the Design point is advanced by the Increment value Design Elevation 754 700 Staked Elevation 754 801 Cut 0 101 Left Curb Fill 0 399 Left EGP Cut 0 101 Center Line Fill 0 199 Right EOF Cut 0 101 Right Curb Fill 0 399 R 292 Stakeout Menu Slope Staking The Slope Staking screen is used to locate the catch points for a roadway in any terrain Slope Staking D lt i g The first screen is used to define or select the line that describes the centerline of the road to be slope staked An existing polyline or tap Line tap Line i alignment can be selected or a series of existing points c
188. dinate System Database Database Select Database Zone Select Database Zone Select Database O Select Database Zone Select Database O Select Database Site Select Database Site Region Bermuda 2000 BDAZ000 ad Region Site Fone Bermuda National Grid 2000 Y Gite Site 1 05022006 hi Use Geoid GEOIDO3 Conus v Use Geoid GEOID99 Conus Delete Zone Key In Zone gt Key In Zone gt zone gt Finish Delete Site Site Key In Zone gt Key In Zone gt zone gt Select Mapping Plane Zone m Mapping Plane Site Database is where you select what type of coordinate system record to choose You can e Use Database Zone will display controls to pick a map projection from the regions and zones in the database e Use Database Site will display controls to pick a localized zone based site from the Site region in the database Region is where you select the region of the map projection zone Zone is where you select the specific map projection zone Datum is where you view or select the horizontal datum for this zone Note Some zones in the database may not have a default datum attached In this case the datum control is a list box and you must select from the data base datums before you can set the zone R 219 Survey Pro Reference Manual Use Geoid is where you choose to use a geoid model with this zone You can pick a geoid model from the database using the drop down box
189. e Daylight hi contrast and white balance can be adjusted Take Photo Takes a digital photo and stores the photo to a file See Video Settings on Page 167 for details on configuring the settings for this feature Take Panoramic Photo This will take a photograph within the current polygonal or rectangular scan frame When a large scan frame is defined multiple photos of the entire area are taken with minimal overlap The photos can later be automatically stitched together and viewed or used for texture maps in RealWorks The individual images are stored in the current job folder with a unique series name Scan opens the second Video Scan screen and starts the scanning process Colored blocks will appear on the screen for each new point scanned The color will vary depending on the distances measured and the reflectivity of each point m Pause pauses the scanning process Tapping again will continue scanning m Stop cancels the scanning process and prompts you if you want to save the partially scanned data or delete it Settings Accesses the Video Scan Settings screen described below R 149 Survey Pro Reference Manual Video Scan Settings The Video Scan Settings screen is used to configure how many points to shoot within the scan frame You have a choice to define the O By Distance number of points by distance between points angle between points total number of points or the time required to shoot all
190. e e Pick point to define origin ground coordinate scale factor will be applied from a point selected from the job e Key in coordinates to define origin ground coordinate scale factor will be applied from a location entered by the user R 226 Survey Menu GPS Module Ground Coordinates Key In Origin Mapping Plane Ground Next gt The Ground Coordinates Key In Origin screen is used to input the location of the ground coordinates origin This screen is used when you select Key in coordinates to define origin on the Setup screen Ground Coordinates Project Location is where you enter the local Project Location point from which the ground coordinate scale Coordinate Type factor is to be applied Coordinate Type is where you select the type Latitude 44 33081636 of coordinates to enter You can use WGS84 Longitude 123 160595157 geodetic local geodetic or grid coordinates This choice will affect the fields displayed 64 99942 m Height below North Latitude is where you enter the northing latitude of the local origin East Longitude is where you enter the easting longitude of the local origin Elevation Height is where you enter the vertical coordinate of the local origin Ground Coordinates Scale The Ground Coordinates Scale screen is used to compute the scale factor to convert grid to ground coordinates for the reference height This screen is used when you select either Ke
191. e After each shot is complete the computed elevation is displayed for the new point You can either enter a different elevation or tap amp to accept the computed elevation Corner amp Plane The Corner and Plane screen is used to store a REUULSE AMES point using a reflectorless total station for a OCC 1 Al 5 50 BS 410 0 00 00 point that cannot be shot but three points on o Foresight lv the same plane can be shot Description aa Foresight is the name of the point that will be font 1 of Plane stored Angle Right 42 28 27 dag oo o zenith 90 26 20 deg Description is the description for the point Slope Dist 14 173 ifeet that will be stored HR 0 000 shows that no rod height will be used with this routine since all shots are direct reflectorless Shoot Plane will prompt you to take three shots on amp amp the same flat surface that the new point is located Shopi snola Aim at target M no shot D Shot 3 Note Each shot can be in any location on the same plane but they must not form a straight line and they should not be grouped close together Aim at Corner will prompt you to aim at the corner the point that you want to store Although no shot is taken the angles to the point will be used to compute its location Corner amp Plane R 142 Survey Menu Conventional Mode Note After all shots are done the computed elevation is displayed for the new poi
192. e and a lower quality signal USI is the universal identifier number of the satellite that you wish to disable or re enable For GPS satellites this will be the Pseudo Random Noise PRN number and will be between 1 and 37 For GLONASS satellites this will be the Frequency Channel Number FCN 45 and will be between 45 and 70 Enable ALL enable all the satellites that were disabled Disable SV disables the USI entered above This satellite will then no longer be used in any solution until it is re enabled Enable SV re enables the USI entered above SV List This card lists signal quality information for each satellite being used which is reported by the receiver The columns available depend on the receiver being used Consult your receiver s documentation for more information R 176 GPS Status lt Sat Info Position ix Receiver Solution Fired Latitude 43 41 29 85502 H Longitude 124 26 46 Height 60 0000 m Heading 231 36 56 Speed 100 2 km h Survey Menu GPS Module Position The Position card displays your current position as well as your course and speed information if you are moving The Position card will display one of three coordinates WGS84 latitude longitude height Local latitude longitude height or Grid north east elevation close Solution see the Receiver card on Page R 172 Latitude Longitude Height or North East Elevation dis
193. e Point to Location Point R 349 Survey Pro Reference Manual Inverse Point to Point The Inverse Point to Point screen will calculate the distance and direction between two existing points Begin Point is the reference point used to compute the distance and direction to the End Inverse Point to Point Point O segno Ele IA End Point is the point whose relationship to End Point lv the Begin Point is computed Select from Map allows you to quickly select both the Begin Point and End Point from a map view The first point tapped is entered as the Begin Point and the second as the End Point AJ an i i LEW B Solve will compute the distance and direction from the Begin Point to the End Point Results Azimuth is the azimuth from the Begin Point to the End Point Horz Dist The horizontal distance from the Begin Point to the End Point Vert Dist The vertical distance from the Begin Point to the End Point Slope Dist is the slope distance from the Begin Point to the End Point North The change in the Y coordinate from the Begin Point to the End Point East The change in the X coordinate from the Begin Point to the End Point Elevation The change in elevation from the Begin Point to the End Point Grade is the slope from the Begin Point to the End Point R 350 C Inverse Point Begin Station Define the Line Start of Line ow F3 Inverse Menu Inverse Point to Line
194. e above checkbox is checked this button allows you to select the shape of the curb ditch or slope beyond the edge of pavement so cut fill information can be computed on this surface if a random offset is specified The selected shape is displayed by an icon next to the button as well as with a bold line in the road s cross sectional profile at the bottom of the screen Note The selected Shape is irrelevant if a random offset is not specified since the nodes are always in the same place for each shape that uses the same Height and Offset values Height is the height of the curb ditch or slope in feet or meters A positive value is considered a curb and a negative value a ditch Offset From Edge of Road is the distance that the curb or ditch extends from the edge of pavement R 287 Survey Pro Reference Manual Note The specified curb or ditch height and offset will be applied to both sides of the road lt Back returns to the previous screen Next gt opens the next screen Offset Staking Screen Three The third Offset Staking screen is used to select the station and section of the road to be staked and to specify an offset distance from the design point Stake Station is the station to be staked Offset Staking p ot x HR is the rod height Stake Station X HA 7 00 ift EA Interval 0 0 0 0 ift Next Sta_ Sta Interval Specifies how far to advance from the hd a current station to the n
195. e closing location o Elev is the elevation for the closing location Point allows you to select an existing point to define the closing location o Point is the name of the existing point at the closing location Next opens the next screen of the adjustment wizard R 437 Survey Pro Reference Manual Traverse Adjust Results This screen displays the changes that will be made by the adjustment where they can be previewed before the actual adjustment is made The screen lists the adjustment details in three main sections the angle adjustment details the compass rule adjustment details and the point details where the before and after coordinates for each point are listed An example of the information provided in the Preview screen is shown here Error dist is the horizontal distance between the starting point and closing point Error azm is the direction from the closing point to the starting point Precision is the ratio of the error distance to the length Angular error is the difference between N 2 180 and the actual sum of the internal angles where N is the number of sides in the traverse Length is the sum of all the sides of the boundary Perimeter is the length plus the error distance Adjust if the results in the preview are acceptable tap this button to perform the adjustment R 438 tE Dreyjew Adjustment Settings Angle Adjust Compass Rule Angle Adjust Or
196. e name Ifa matching RW5 raw data file exists it too will Jey Create a New Joh _ be converted and saved to a Survey Pro RAW i NEW file with a note inserted indicating that the conversion took place ea Open an Existing Job Loading JOB file Loading TDS job When a job is being opened the Loading JOB Progress file screen will open and display the status of Points the loading process Poly lines Hone Alignments Mone Loading points Cancel R 13 Survey Pro Reference Manual Save As The Save As screen allows you to save a copy of the current job under anew name The copy that is created will then Save As become the current job S 4 HA Type Job Files J0B The Save As dialog box is identical to that QJ Built in Storage Survey Pro Jobs found in the Windows operating system Simply enter a new name for the current job aooo oo rosso and then tap the button Aq 03 24 2005 j Fe TosContral_ Ground kel Toscontrol_ORNort Fa TosTopo_Ground jot Note It is not necessary to include the JOB extension since it will automatically be added for you R 14 File Menu Import The Import screen is used to add the points from another source into the current job or import the data from a LandXML file to the current job Warning Coordinate values can change when they are imported Importing coordinates from any source other than a JOB file requires th
197. e routine can delete post processing files from the receiver or recover files that were recently deleted Post processing files can also be copied or moved from the receiver to the data collector for more convenient transfers to a PC Active Files The Active Files page lists the details of all the post processing files that are currently on the receiver Files can be selected from this list to delete or copy move to the data collector Delete Selected File s Deletes the selected File Management Ea M Oe E Ee E ESEIECLE files from the receiver Creation Time File Size 77252580701 9 14 2004 14 52 l 77252581L 7T01 9 14 2004 14 55 Note When files are deleted from the receiver 77252582 T01 9 14 2004 16 09 they are actually renamed so that they can be 77252590 T01 9 14 2004 17 24 recovered later The oldest renamed files will a automatically be permanently deleted by the pelea receiver when disk space becomes low Download Selected Filet Delete File s After Download Download Selected File s copies the selected files to the data collector These files will be stored in the directory on the data collector where the current job resides R 243 Survey Pro Reference Manual Note If a file being downloaded already exists on the data collector you can overwrite the existing file give the downloaded file a new name or cancel the transfer If you choose to give the file a new name you must also provide th
198. e same T00 or TO1 extension as in the original name Note Downloaded files can be transferred to a PC with ActiveSync and then converted to a DAT file for use with Trimble Geomatics Office TGO To convert a T00 or TO1 file to a DAT file right click on the file from a PC running the latest version of TGO and select Convert to DAT format Delete File s After Download When checked any files that are copied to the data collector will automatically be deleted from the receiver after the transfer Recoverable Files cl The Recoverable Files page lists the details of AS ele SIC UST E e all the files on the receiver that were recently Creation Time File Size _ deleted Files can be selected from this list and 772525681 710 9 14 2004 14 55 34 3 KB recovered 77252582 T1D 9 14 2004 16 09 173 KB 77252590 T10 9 14 2004 17 24 100 KB Recover Selected File s Restores the selected files on the receiver Active Files Recoverable Files Recover Selected File s R 244 Survey Menu Basic GPS The Survey Menu while running in GPS mode with the Basic GPS module contains the routines used for RTK data collection and post processing data collection The menu items are the same regardless of the type of data collection However some functions such as Control Points and Remote Elevation will only allow you to start when connected to an RTK receiver The Data Collection function will behave differently based on t
199. e staked point N E Z displays either the results or plane coordinates in the lower corner of the screen Station is the station at the current rod position Offset Dist is the perpendicular distance from the line to the rod R 343 Survey Pro Reference Manual Elev is the elevation at the rod position Offset displays if the rod is on the Left or Right of the line Segment displays the type of line segment at the current station lt Back returns to the previous screen Store stores a point for the current rod location Store Offset Points The instructions for the Store Offset Points routine for GPS are similar to the conventional method except that the button is replaced with a button to configure rover antenna and the backsight information is replaced with rover antenna height information See Page R 316 for details R 344 Svi OF HRMS 0 01 VEMS 0 01 Stakeout Menu GPS amp Basic GPS Module Stake DTM The Stake DTM routine allows you to stake an area and get cut fill and volume information based on a reference DTM or specified elevation datum The first screen of this routine is similar to the conventional method except that the button is replaced with a Setup HRI button to configure rover antenna and the backsight information is replaced with rover antenna height information See Page R 319 for details DTM GPS Shot The DTM GPS Shot screen displays all relevant informati
200. e the Backsight and turn clockwise to the Foresight Point 180 right is the angle that results from subtracting the angle right value from 180 HD to Beg is the horizontal distance between the Backsight and the Middle Point HD to End is the horizontal distance between the Foresight Point and the Middle Point R 364 Cogo Menu Compute Area Allows you to compute the area of a selected boundary Tap Line allows you to tap an existing Compute Area polyline from a map view Choose a Boundary for the Area j nN To From Opens the Point List screen Page Bi aaa R 443 where a point list can be created Solve will compute the area of the selected boundary dew Fall synsery im Results Area is the area that the boundary encloses Ifthe boundary is not closed the area is computed as if a line joined the two ends Length is the length of the selected boundary Perimeter is the length of the selected boundary plus any additional length between the two ends of an open boundary R 365 Survey Pro Reference Manual Triangle Solutions The Triangle Solutions screen will solve for the unknown parts of a triangle after providing three known parts Triangle Solution is where you select the parts of the triangle that are known You can WOED GE Tige select any of the following from the dropdown eee tee a e Side Side Side The lengths of all three sides are known
201. e the Recover Wasted Space Now current job file is located Size displays the size of the current job Created displays the date that the current job was created Points displays the first and last point names and if alphanumeric point names are being used Lines displays the number of polylines and alignments that are in the current job Roads displays the number of roads in the current job and the filenames associated with them Attributes Collected displays the number of point and line attributes used in the current project Total Storage displays the total amount of memory that is installed on the data collector Available Storage displays the amount of free memory that is available to use for jobs Wasted Space displays the amount of empty space that is being used by the current job This space can be recovered as described below R 88 Job Menu Recover Wasted Space Now As you add and remove points and lines in ajob empty gaps can result within the job file These gaps use storage space This button will remove any gaps in the job file thus recovering the wasted space Note Survey Pro checks for low memory situations every minute When the available system memory falls below 256K of RAM a warning is displayed R 89 Survey Pro Reference Manual Calculator or yi Calculator where applicable The Calculator screen behaves exactly like any C other RPN format calculator It consists of a sta
202. e to inverse values Translate 2 oom before entering in Survey Pro Key In Zone Datum Rotation and Scale The Key In Zone Datum Rotation and Scale screen is used to enter translations when the Datum Type is or Similarity Datum Rotations From WGS84 To Local is Key In Zone where you enter the three rotations from WGS84 to the local datum Datum Rotate WiGS84 To Local tt x Ga Scale Factor ppm is where you enter the ee ey scale of the datum transformation from WGS84 to the local datum The scale factor is entered Rotate Z secs in parts per million Note The sign convention for the datum rotations and scale factor is from WGS84 to the local datum If your datum transformation is defined for local to WGS84 be sure to inverse the values before entering in Survey Pro R 224 Survey Menu GPS Module Key In Zone Datum from Database The Key In Zone Datum from Database screen is used to select a database datum when the Datum Type is Pick from Data Base Datum is where you select the data base Key In Zone datum to use for the new zone Key In Zone Results The Key In Zone Results screen is used to review the values you input for the zone to be created Store opens a prompt to enter the region and zone of the new map projection zone stores the Zone Parameters named zone in the data base and sets the zone gt Zone Parameters as the current projection record Origin Lat 43 40 00 00000 Or
203. ecording Settings this area displays values from the Job Settings Post Processing screen Change opens the Job Settings Post Processing screen where you can modify the settings relevant to post processing data collection Rec Interval displays the current recording interval for new logging files Mem Threshold displays the current minimum memory on disk available before a warning is issued SV Threshold displays the current minimum number of satellites tracked before a warning is issued HDOP Threshold displays the maximum HDOP allowed before a warning is issued Antenna displays antenna setup for this receiver It will be in one of two states e Last Antenna for this receiver is displayed when you have not yet set this receiver in Survey Pro This value is the previous antenna measurement you used with this receiver e Selected Antenna is displayed when you have entered new antenna measurements using the Receiver Antenna screen Page R 184 Measured is where you enter the measured antenna height for the specified measure to mark Offset is the reduced offset slant correction plus phase center offset for the currently selected antenna type and measure to mark Setup HRI opens the Receiver Antenna screen Page R 184 where you can change the antenna type measure to mark and offsets R 200 Survey Menu GPS Module Note The Post Processing screen is used to start logging with post process
204. ect an existing point or enter a new name to Create a point from an autonomous GPS position Base Point 2 Last antenna for this receiver Antenna Derma 1 Measured To Slant measure mark Measured 2 0 m Setup HR Radius 0 174 Offset 0 009 Base Point moni Last antenna for this receiver Antenna Manual Measured To Bottom of maunt Measured Setup HR Offset 0 000 Base Setup standard Base Setup one point setup Base Point is where you enter the point name that the base antenna is set up over or displays the name of the remote base point or the name of the one job file point when using one point setup mode You can enter an existing point or enter a new point name to start this survey from a new autonomous base setup R 182 Survey Menu GPS Module Note When this screen is used in one point setup mode the one job file point is automatically used as the base point and you use this screen to enter antenna height When this screen is used to configure base position in Survey Pro after remote base setup from the rover then this screen is used to display the base point name and antenna height received from the data modem link Antenna displays antenna setup for this receiver It will be in one of three states e Last Antenna for this receiver is displayed when you have not yet set the base in Survey Pro This value is the previous antenna measurement you used with this receiver
205. ected the Control points will be imported into the JOB points in the control file will be imported into file and records will be written to the RAW the new job data file Use External Control File When selected the control points in the control file will be accessible from the new job but will not be imported Create a New Job 2 Import Control Points Browse will open the Open screen Page R Use External Control File 13 where an existing job can be selected as a Control points will be referenced from the control file control file lt Back returns you to the previous screen Control File displays the path and control file name selected with the Browse button The points will not be imported into the JOB Control File R 9 Survey Pro Reference Manual Create a New Job 3 Azimuth Type specifies if you are surveying Create a New Job with a North Azimuth or South Azimuth KTE Units for Distances specifies if your distances will be entered in International Feet U S Feet Units for Distances International Feet ___ or Meters Units for Angles _ Adjust for Earth Curvature Refraction Note You can enter a distance in any distance field in units other than what is set for the job 0 use Scale Factor io by appending the distance value with the following characters e for ftor ift International Feet e usf or usft US Survey Feet e ior in Inches em Meters e cm
206. ected from the Edit Template screen prior to tapping Insert Edit opens the Edit Segment screen where the details of the selected segment can be edited R 401 Survey Pro Reference Manual Note The selected segment is shown with a thicker line in the map view in the lower portion of the Edit Template screen Remove removes the selected segment and automatically joins the previous segments to the following segments Note When a segment is removed the existing segments toward the centerline will not change Only those on the side of the removed segment away from the centerline are adjusted Edit Segment Edit Templates or Edit Templates or Edit Templates The Edit Segment screen is identical to the Edit Segment 22689 New Template screen and is used to create a s gk Segment Name new template or edit an existing one s N h p Horizontal Distance bor Je egment Name is the name for the segment Oo u e A name is required but it does not have to be unique Horizontal Distance is the horizontal length of the segment Slope V Dist is the slope of the segment or the vertical length respectively When defining a vertical distance select the D if the segment travels downward or select U if the segment travels upward from the point of view of the centerline Note A segment with a negative slope will result in water that flows from the centerline toward the road edge R 402 Roads
207. ection and distance the total station is eee Battery 1 Standby Link Status Good aiming relative to the backsight os AR 420 op gg Store Point The upper right corner displays the next store ZA 90 25 56 413 point number and when the next point will be SD 14 173 In 6 sec stored in either seconds or distance Points Stored Elapsed Time The lower left corner is a graphic that shows MIgtanice the current total station position the current Speed prism position and when collecting by Direction distance the approximate location of the next store point represented by an X based on the speed and direction the prism is moving from the previous store point Previous stored points are also displayed as dots in this part of the screen The lower right corner of the screen displays the number of points that have been stored and the speed and direction the prism is traveling Store Now stores a point at the current prism location even if the time distance criteria is not yet met lt Back returns to the previous Auto Collect screen Stop toggles between starting or stopping the Auto Collect routine R 138 Survey Menu Conventional Mode Corner amp 2 Lines The Corner and 2 Lines screen is used to store Corner amp 2 Lines ut g ae a a point at the corner of a structure using a OCC 1 HE 5 50 BS 410 0 00 00 reflectorless total station where a direct a Foresight hd measurement
208. ector basemaps Add allows you to select additional basemaps for the current job Edit opens the Edit Basemap screen described below where you can preview or edit the selected basemap Raster basemaps cannot be edited Remove removes the selected basemap from the list The source file will not be removed Move Up will move the selected basemap up one level in the list Consult the User s manual for information on how to manage basemaps Move Down will move the selected basemap down one level in the list R 447 Survey Pro Reference Manual Edit Basemaps From the Map View tap E4 The Edit Basemaps screen is used to preview the selected basemap and if it is a vector basemap the way the basemap appears can be changed Edit Basemap Filename roadspipes dst General Preview The Preview page shows how the selected basemap will look in the map view Visible when checked the selected basemap will be visible in the map view The General page is only available when a vector basemap is selected and is used to Visible customize the way the basemap appears in the map view Edit Basemap i Filaname roadspipes dst Line Color is used to select the line color of General iow the basemap ALAE Fill Color is used to select the color for the 2D Line Color objects in the basemap EE Point Symbol is used to select from a variety of symbols for the poi
209. ed point and the 98 500 ifeet selected point High delta values can indicate either the rod and or total station is over the wrong point The deltas can also be viewed in the Results screen and Map screen ia is a shortcut to the Surveying Settings screen Page R 45 R 156 Survey Menu Conventional Mode Solar Observation The Solar Observation screen is used to compute the azimuth to an arbitrary backsight based on the position of a celestial body typically the sun WARNING Direct viewing of the sun without a proper filter will cause serious eye damage Pointing a total station directly toward the sun without a solar filter can also damage the EDM components Select Method 7 Find Azimuth Using Ephemeris Data select this method if you plan to enter data from an Select an Observation Method i ephemeris Sea Uea EEE Date Find Azimuth Using Date and Time select this method if you do not plan to use an C Find Azimuth Using Date and Time ephemeris Note The fields within the Solar Observations screen will vary depending on the method selected above All of the fields from each method are described below Solar Observation T w Lati 37 2700 Long 98 3108 Aim Left Edge of Center Ea is a shortcut to the Date Time Settings screen Page R 54 ycuy fal Lat Long is the latitude and longitude of the total station These values can be scaled from a Non Linear Declination
210. ed view of the same map will fill the screen Note The Vertical Map will show an X at the location of each previous shot This can be useful in determining if the current terrain will never intersect the slope no catch point e H Map displays an overhead view of the job e gt N E Z displays the coordinates computed from the last shot Occupy switches the receiver dynamics to static depending on settings and opens the Occupy Data Points screen Page R 194 where data can be collected for the current point Side Shot allows you to store a side shot measurement during stake out This button opens a prompt for the side shot point name and opens the GPS Occupy Data Points screen After you store the new point or cancel you will resume with the Slope Staking screen R 340 Stakeout Menu GPS amp Basic GPS Module Results displays the results computed from the last Shot Obs Slope is the computed observed cut or fill slope based on the last shot and the corresponding hinge point Des Slope is the design cut or fill slope Cut Fill is the cut or fill required for the current rover location to be positioned on the design slope Toward CL Away CL is the computed horizontal distance that the rod must move either toward the centerline or away from it respectively before it is positioned at the catch point Note The computed horizontal distance is based on the observed terrain computed from t
211. een Slope Staking Screen Five Sa eae p 5 The fifth screen is used to store a point for the Catch Point last shot taken from the previous screen which a pont tame should be located at the catch point Description Point Name is the name assigned to the stored point Semen eee Cant Description is the description assigned to the Offset from CP stored point Store CP stores the point Offset from CP This field is used if you want to stake another location that is at the specified horizontal distance from the catch point away from the road Solve gt opens a new screen described next used to stake the point at the offset specified above lt Back returns to the previous screen Next CP gt returns to the third slope staking screen where the station to stake can be advanced and the next catch point can be located R 297 Survey Pro Reference Manual Slope Staking Offset Stake The following screens are only accessed if you choose to stake a point at a specified offset away from the catch point Station displays the current station being Slope Staking slope staked Station 10 00 000 Left Line Offset from CP 2 000 Offset from CP is the offset from the catch From Gun to Design Point point specified in the previous screen Angle Right 358 35 18 Horz Dist 1 203 737 From Gun to Design Point displays the angle and distance information from the total station YertDist
212. een and displays any errors see Page R 405 New opens the New Template screen which is identical to the Edit Template screen where a new template can be created see Page R 401 Edit opens the Edit Template screen where the selected template can be modified see Page R 401 although accessing the templates editor from here will not allow inserting or removing of segments Edit Left Template Start Sta O 00 0 M R 409 Survey Pro Reference Manual The Widenings Card New or Edit The Widenings card of the New Road screen is used to add or edit widenings A widening is a section of a road that changes el MRXeizie in width but does not necessarily require any Road Templates Widenings Super Elevations new templates The road width is adjusted by changing only the width of the first segment of the template that leads into the beginning of the widening Any additional segments like those that may describe a sidewalk or ditch are not adjusted The following rules must be considered when adding a widening to a road e A widening must have a starting station and an ending station or a length e Left and right widenings are separate and independent of each other e The start and end stations must occur within the boundaries of the alignment e The starting station must occur before the ending station e The beginning of a widening must match the width of the previous wid
213. een that can be used to close a loop Close Loop Close Level Loop closes the current level loop Loop Name and opens the Level screen where no additional Starting CBM Point Name shots can be taken Description Elevation Point To Close Upon Description Known Elevation Observed Elevation Starting Closing Elev Close Level Loop R 267 Survey Pro Reference Manual 2 Peg Test The 2 Peg Test screen is used to check that the line of sight through the level is horizontal when the bubble is properly centered The graphic of this screen shows the current Peg Test setup and indicates which shot you will be shooting next with a red square The first line of text also indicates which shot must be taken next Check H Dist This button appears after shooting the initial shots to Point A This will Shooting the shot al on paint A measure the horizontal distance to Point B and lat compare it with the distance already measured press the Take Shot button when you are ready to Point A Come go information is then provided so the rod over Point B can be moved until it equals the horizontal distance to Point A Use of this button is optional and the results are not used for computing the error Take Shot takes the required sets of shots to the point indicated on this screen H Dist 250m H Dist 2 Peg Shots The 2 Peg Shots screen is used to perform the required shots to whichever observ
214. efine a Location The Define a Location screen is used to manually enter the distance and direction to a new point from any existing reference point and then stakeout the new point From Point is the reference point that the specified angle and distance information is applied to for locating the new point Define a Location out im Bearing is the direction from the From Paint e reference point to the new point Angle is the angle to be added to the Angle lv specified azimuth or bearing thus modifying eee a the direction to the new point ee fect fw Note To subtract an angle from the specified Bee aaa thee one nenaaa eee or bearing enter a negative Angle value Horiz Dist is the horizontal distance from the reference point to the new point Vert Dist is the vertical distance from the reference point to the new point Store point When this is checked the computed point will be stored with the name specified here Solve will compute the location for the new point and access the next screen Define a Location Screen Two The second Define a Location screen displays the direction and distance information from the occupy point to the new point R 328 Stakeout Menu Ref Point is the reference point specified in the From Point field in the previous screen Define a Location P e x Fef Point 1 Description BOUNDARY Description is the description for t
215. eled and will signal the end of the occupation and store the point Stake to Line The Stake to Line screen allows you to locate points on a continuous predefined line Direction information is provided to locate the line by traveling the shortest possible distance a perpendicular offset to the line between the rover and the line The first screen of this routine is similar to the conventional method except that the Backsight button is replaced with a Setu HR button R 336 Stakeout Menu GPS amp Basic GPS Module to configure rover antenna and the backsight information is replaced with rover antenna height information See Page R 282 for details Stake to Line Screen Two The second screen is where measurements take place and the staking directions are displayed The graphic and display direct you to points on line via the shortest route a perpendicular offset from the rover to the line Stake to Line Settings Fix SV 07 HRMS 0 01 VRMS 0 01 5 Hz Mode The graphic display will change depending on how close you are to the specified line The chart below illustrates each screen type 34 623 0 EAST 0 000 LEFT of Line Offset Dist 27 893 Station 21 436 pk H H H Rover is greater Rover is between Rover is within 0 3 Rover is on the line than 3 m 10 ft 0 3 and 3 m 1 and m 1 ft of the line or within the from the line 10 ft from the line Horizontal Distance Tolerance spe
216. ening or template e The end of a widening must match the next template or widening unless it is the last element in the road e The beginning or ending of a widening cannot occur within the boundaries of another widening but the beginning of one widening can occur at the same station as the end of a previous widening e Widenings are always positioned by their start station Add when a widening or lt End gt is selected from the L or R columns in the Widenings card this button opens the Add Widening R 410 Roads Menu screen which allows you to add a widening to the same side of the road that was selected Edit allows you to edit the selected widening in the Edit Widening screen which is identical to the Add Widening screen Remove removes the selected widening from the list Check checks the road for errors and displays the results in the Roads Report screen described on Page R 405 Add Edit Widening Screen Roads Edit Roadg New or Edit Widenings Add or Edit The Add Edit Widening screen allows you to add a widening to the road or edit an existing widening Edit Right Widening p 2 3 Start Station is the location of the beginning Start Station Starting Width ae Width a Mirror to Left w350 o a of the widening on the alignment gt End Station is the length of the widening measured from the Start Station or it j is the end station depe
217. ent J used to specify a known Spiral Curve j azimuth or bearing of the TS Tangent to Spiral Spiral PI y start of the spiral Y of Throw Edit Segment Spiral SC Spiral to Curve Circular Curve R 73 Survey Pro Reference Manual Edit Segment Vertical Line Card Grade The Vertical Line card is used to enter a segment with any grade Length is the horizontal length of the segment M Grade is the grade slope of the segment i M Get Previous Grade will automatically enter a grade equal to the grade at the end of the previous segment Get Previous Grade Edit Segment Vertical Curve The Vertical Curve card is used to enter a parabolic vertical curve to the alignment Edit Segment YW Grade Curve Edit Segment Y Curve Length is the horizontal length of the vertical curve Start Grade is the starting grade of the Length vertical curve oe ee i lv End Grade is the ending grade of the vertical aes a e curve Get Previous Grade will automatically enter a Start Grade equal to the grade at the end of the previous segment R 74 Job Menu Auto Linework Job Auto Linework The Auto Linework screen is used to set up custom descriptors that can be used to generate various polylines between points as they are shot These features can than be exported and used in the TDS ForeSight software Auto Line
218. er Information The Receiver Information screen is used to display the serial number and firmware version of the current receiver Also different receivers will return additional information in this window including channel or option version installed Receiver Type displays the manufacturer of the i i cl Receiver Information EA iil receiver currently connected to the data collector Receiver Type Demo Mode Serial Number TOHsSoo1 Firmware Version Demo Serial Number displays the serial number of the current receiver Firmware Version displays the firmware version of the current receiver Note the remaining fields if any are dependent on the particular make and model of the current receiver Record in Raw Data records a note to the raw data file containing the information displayed on the screen R 235 Survey Pro Reference Manual Adjust with Projection The Adjust with Projection wizard is used in three different cases It is automatically opened to update job file points any time you change the coordinate system site such as solving a localization adjustment or switching from grid to ground It is automatically opened to provide the option of updating job file points any time you change the coordinate system definition such as selecting a new mapping plane zone or switching horizontal projection modes Finally it can be opened by the user from the Survey menu to select and update points with a pr
219. ere used as in the screen shown above all entries of LOT10 would be connected If LOT15 were also used asa description during data collection any future use of LOT15 would connect to the previous LOT15 entry Note Linework descriptions are case sensitive Cmd lists the current type of line segment linework that will be created after shooting the required points and storing them with the associated Description The following linework command options are selected by repeatedly tapping the appropriate button gt Line creates a straight line between the next two points stored with a description associated with Line gt P Crv creates a curve through the next 3 points stored with a description associated with P Crv gt R Crv creates a curve between the Aua nenak next two points that are stored with a Please enter radius and curve direction description associated with R Crv medic e After the second R Crv point is shot the prompt shown will open and is used maet eat to define the details of the curve Arci Small Large BOUNDARY R 76 Auto Linework Please enter an incoming azimuth for this curve Job Menu gt T Crv creates a curve witha specified incoming tangent from the M next two points that are stored with a description associated with T Crv When the second point is stored the prompt shown here appears where the incoming azimuth or bearing is specified
220. ere you select a model to use from the drop down list Geoid Model GEOID9S Conus File Name is where you view the descriptive name from the geoid data file header for the File selected File is where you view the name of the GGF data file for the selected geoid or pick from a list of GGF files if more than one data file is found for this geoid Accept accepts any change to the Geoid Model selection and returns to the previous screen R 180 Connect to Base Select ETE Base mat GG24 base Create New Receiver Receiver Settings Plug the cable into the base receiver Tap Connect when Connect gt WOU are ready Survey Menu GPS Module Note The geoid for the mapping plane zone and the ground localization zone is the same Changes to the geoid for one record will occur in both Connect To Receiver The Connect to Receiver screen will prompt you to choose and connect to the receiver required for the next step of GPS setup This screen is always part of the Start GPS Survey wizard If the next screen is Base Setup the Connect to Base prompt will display a list of all your RTK base receivers The last RTK base receiver used by this data collector is selected by default If the next screen is Rover Setup Start GPS Survey Solve Localization or Data Collection the Connect to Rover prompt will display a list of all your RTK rover receivers Connect to Rover Select RTE Rover ed Create New
221. es have been registered Survey Pro Me iEis lee TEE will run in Demo Mode When running in Serial Number SS01A00090 Demo Mode users are able to test and use Modules v Registered every routine available in the software as if 3 Leveling the Survey Pro Max module was purchased Trimble System E Although Demo Mode limits all jobs to no more than 25 points If a job exists on the data collector that contains more than 25 points it cannot be opened while running in Demo Current Code 38A 313 X63 Mode Enter Registration Code Registered Indicates that the corresponding module has been added R 32 File Menu Enter Registration Code Opens the Register Secs Number Bii screen shown here where the registration number for a particular module can be entered About Survey Pro About Survey Pro Survey Pra The About screen displays the version of the eh Copyright C 2007 Tripod Data Systems Survey Pro software and the versions of several Visit TDS on the web at www tdsway corn of the Survey Pro software files which can be component version updated from the TDS Website Hardware Information is a shortcut to the Microsoft System Properties screen TdsR tk dll Tdsker mit dll TdsDxf dll SurveyPro exe TdsInsttuments dll System Information Exit This will close the Survey Pro software and return you to the operating system installed on your data collector R 33 J
222. es that a feature file be selected from the Files Settings card described earlier M Prompt to Backup When Closing J ob When checked a reminder will open to backup the current job prior to closing it M Write Point Attributes to Raw Data When checked point feature and attribute information will be written to the raw data file M Prompt for Elevation of 2D Cogo Pionts when checked a majority of the COGO routines will prompt you for an elevation before storing a 2D point When unchecked 2D points will be stored without the prompt M Auto time stamp every ___ min When checked will store a note record to the raw data file containing the current date and time each time the specified number of minutes passes This is useful for tracking down when specific raw data records were written to the file M Remind to backup job every ___ hrs When checked will open a reminder to backup the current job after every specified number of hours passes M Log Serial Port Traffic When checked all serial port traffic will be logged to a text file called TDS Log txt for troubleshooting purposes and is stored in the Jobs folder The file is automatically overwritten when logging traffic on a date that is different from the previous date R 57 Survey Pro Reference Manual Edit Points The Edit Points screen allows you to add edit and delete any points in the current job Edit if only a single point is selected this Edit Points wil
223. ettings Instrument screen when in conventional mode The active instrument will always return a zenith and slope distance The active instrument may return a horizontal angle which will be treated as an azimuth Note If your laser range finder has a compass azimuth returned will be magnetic Use the Instrument Settings screen to set Magnetic Declination to apply to the angle Store prompts you for a description layer and attribute depending on your survey settings for the new offset point and stores the point for the current location Occupy Data Points Screen The Occupy Data Points screen is used to collect measurements to new points This screen is used to occupy a point occupy an offset reference point and for feature collection Occupy Data Poi EA ia Local Coordinates Northing 5 237 729 Easting 3 136 402 Elevation 63 075 Solution Quality Session Time Solution Fixed 0 06 Num Sy 7 Count Status H Precision 0 010 Measuring Y Precision 0 015 Store 55 Occupy Data Poi EA BA Local Coordinates Remaining 0 06 Count Status Time Northing 5 269 821 Easting 3 161 112 GPS Status Elevation 62 976 Solution Quality Solution Fixed Aum Sw Fi H Precision 0 010 W Precision 0 015 Store SS Occupy one Data Point Continuous Feature Collection Local Coordinates displays the local coordinates computed from the current geodetic measuremen
224. ext station Left Edge of Pavement Next Sta advances the current station by the Station Interval Slope 90 ao 1 2 Road Width stake the locations where the alignment of the ed oe road changes be sure to check the Stake Corners Not Just Even Intervals option in the Stakeout Settings card Tapping the button will access the Stakeout Settings Note When advancing if you want to also gt gt These buttons are used to select the section of the road that you want to stake M Offset When checked is the offset distance that will be applied to the selected design point A positive offset extends from the design point away from the centerline A negative offset extends towards the centerline Subgrade When checked allows you to specify a vertical offset from the actual node locations Positive values result in the stake location R 288 Offset Staking Station 10 00 000 Left EOP Line width 10 000 From Gun to Design Point Angle Right 357 55 09 Harz Dist Vert Dist FE to Rod 1 203 456 654 700 Stakeout Menu occurring below the selected node Negative values result in the stake location occurring above the selected node X Slope is the slope of the selected road section 1 2 Road Width displays the width of the selected road section defined in the previous screen This value can quickly be edited from this field vi opens the Smart Target options Page R 449
225. f a prism constant is entered for a Smart Target while a prism constant is also set in the total station the prism constant will be applied twice resulting in incorrect distance measurements for every shot Be sure the prism constant is set to zero in the total station if entering a value for a Smart Target or vice versa R 450 Miscellaneous Screens Prism Type This option allows you to choose one of the following three types of prisms when using a supported Trimble total station e Generic Select this option if using a generic non Trimble 360 prism It is up to the user to enter the correct prism constant and manually angle the prism vertically toward the total station before taking any shots to avoid introducing error e Trimble 360 2mm Select this option when using a Trimble 360 prism This selection will apply the appropriate vertical angle correction constant for this prism to correct the error that is introduced when taking a shot to the prism at an extreme vertical angle The 2 icon is displayed to help the user identify that the correct prism is selected and the Prism Constant automatically defaults to 2 millimeters e Trimble MultiTrack 10mm Select this option when using a Trimble MultiTrack prism The Fy icon is displayed to help the user identify that the correct prism is selected and the Prism Constant automatically defaults to 10 millimeters See note below Note When using a Trimble MultiTrack prism
226. f of a unit or agency of the United States Government the Program and Documentation are provided with Restricted Rights Use duplication or disclosure by the Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in subparagraph c 1 ii of the Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software clause at DFARS 252 227 70138 and to all other regulations restrictions and limitations applicable to Government use of Commercial Software Contractor manufacturer is Tripod Data Systems Inc PO Box 947 Corvallis Oregon 97339 United States of America Should you have questions concerning the License Agreement or the Limited Warranties and Limitation of Liability please contact in writing Tripod Data Systems Inc PO Box 947 Corvallis Oregon 97339 United States of America TRADEMARKS Ranger the TDS triangles logo the TDS icons and Survey Pro are trademarks of Tripod Data Systems Inc ActiveSync Windows and the Windows logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and or other countries Bluetooth and the Bluetooth symbol are registered trademarks of Bluetooth SIG Inc USA Socket is a registered trademark of Socket Communications Inc All other names mentioned are trademarks registered trademarks or service marks of their respective companies This software is based in part on the work of the Independent JPEG Group 900 0032 XXQ 090407 Table of Contents Reference Welcome 1 Malh M eMU sinisinta aoa
227. f the 7 9b Points from 7 to 9b screen See Point Lists in the User s Manual 7 9 15 20 30 Combined Ranges for more information CUPves 7899 7 to 9 through 8 7S jo RP Ss LorR 7 100 L L39 to Gradius 100 LorR Lors Note Spaces in a point list are ignored Point Range is the area where you enter your point list using the same format as shown in the examples Once the list is entered tap amp to return to the previous screen R 443 Survey Pro Reference Manual Map View or S from the command bar in various screens View Map TDS Map View without basemaps Map View with basemaps Many screens provide access to a map view which shows data from the current job It can be accessed from the Main Menu in the command bar with the t button or any screen that has a button Some map views display additional information such as a vertical profile Tip You can pan around your map by dragging your finger or stylus across the screen Zoom Extents Button will change the scale of the screen so that all the points in the current job will fit on the screen Zoom In Button will zoom the current screen in by approximately 25 Zoom Out Button will zoom the current screen out by approximately 25 Zoom Window Button allows you to drag a box across the screen When your finger or stylus leaves the screen the map will zoom to the box that was drawn R 444 Miscellaneous Screens Zoom To Point Butto
228. factor 206 Reference Manual command bar 0 668 10 compass rule 6 068 163 compass rule adjustment164 R 437 compute area R 365 compute radius point R 381 conformal map projections203 conformality 666068 202 connect to receiver R 181 control fileSee import control control files 31 R 26 control points112 249 255 R 195 Basic GPS R 254 check R 196 R 255 COMECE iarasi 282 OCCUPY noeneen R 197 R 255 convergence calculator 279 coordinate system 200 E EE aetna R 219 coordinate system database PEPENE EEPO E soon 224 coordinate systems horizontal 202 vertical cccccceeeeees 207 corner angle R 364 create points screen R 440 curve and offset155 R 306 R 342 curve layout 6 R 384 chord offset 151 horizontal 68 149 parabolic 08008 153 PC deflection 150 PI deflection 150 SPa lentiet eee ae 154 tangent offset 151 curve solution R 376 cut sheet offset R 49 2 D data collection56 265 R 190 R 199 Basie GPS vissewsieie R 253 data modem settings R 98 date time settings R 54 R 55 datu MS ea 193 horizontal 068 195 vertical 198 Decl0 oeenn R 158 Dec 24s raa R 158 def
229. figure to the job at the specified location amp 3 closes the screen without adding any new data to the job R 369 Survey Pro Reference Manual Predetermined Area The Predetermined Area routine will take a boundary with one open side and compute the location of a line that will enclose the boundary with a specified area using the Hinge Method or the Parallel Method 4 hinge a The Hinge Method computes the location of the side of a boundary that can pivot on a fixed point The Parallel Method computes the location of one side of a four sided boundary where the computed side is parallel to a stationary side of the boundary 5 3 The top left field is used to enter the desired area of the Hinge Method specified boundary In the next field select the units entered from the dropdown list 4 f 14 Hinge solves the boundary using the Hinge Method when 4 selected Parallel solves the boundary using the Parallel Method when selected r Tap Polyline allows you to tap an existing polyline from a map view to define the fixed sides of the boundary 2 3 Parallel Method Note a boundary has two fixed sides and one side defined by a direction when using the Hinge Method It has one fixed side and two sides defined by a direction when using the Parallel Method R 370 Cogo Menu Editor opens the Polyline Editor Page R 65 where a new polyline can be created or an existing polyline can
230. file type Export JOB Coordinates When exporting to another JOB file the Save As screen is opened where the file name and location is entered for the new JOB file Export Old JOB Coordinates This option functions exactly as the Export JOB routine described above only the resulting file is written to be compatible with the Survey Pro Version 2 x format and earlier R 23 Survey Pro Reference Manual Export CR5 Coordinates The Export CR5 dialog box will open when exporting coordinates to a TDS CR5 coordinate file CR5 File Options specifies if the resulting file z 7 should be Sequential or Non Sequential The a Sal CR5 File Options HP 48 data collector can only use sequential j dinate files Sequential a acai O Non Sequential lt Back returns to the previous screen Export exports the selected coordinates to the new CR5 file Export TXT Coordinates Since the coordinates in an ASCII TXT file can be stored in a variety of formats two screens are used to define the format of the resulting file Delimiters is the character that separates Export each column of text in the ASCII file es Please specify a delimiter and an unit for the file exported to coordinates should be plane coordinates Delimiters C Space Comma Tabs Other geodetic coordinates in degrees minutes T seconds format or geodetic coordinates in Plane C Geodetic OMs C Geodetic Decima
231. first Elev 100 000 H Dist 200 000 observation from the current set up most of the Eou N ou ee details will be unknown Next gt opens the Take Shot screen Page R 262 where the required shots are performed Select a design point for stakeaut R 265 Survey Pro Reference Manual Turn to Benchmark The Turn to Benchmark screen is used to take a shot at a known benchmark When shooting a benchmark that will not be used as the closing benchmark the procedure is identical to shooting a leveling side shot with the exception that this benchmark will be the backsight in the next setup BM Point is the point name for the benchmark This will usually be a new point Choose a Point to Foresight as a Leveling when it is a non closing benchmark and will BBM Point usually be the same point as the starting E benchmark when it is the closing benchmark T he Default Location for New Points Desc is the optional description for the benchmark This is not applicable when shooting the closing benchmark since the Backsight Point TP1 closing benchmark must already exist in the a 100 000 H Dist 200 000 current job Rod 2 000 HI 102 000 N 5127 2894 if E 14799 4036 ift Default Location for New Points is where you specify the northing and easting to use when shooting a new point This is not applicable when shooting the closing benchmark Backsight Point Lists the details for the current backsight If this is the
232. fixed backsight with a Smart Target because the Remote Control screen will then automatically reflect the prism configuration at the backsight Send Circle This will send the circle entered in the BS Circle field to the instrument R 120 Survey Menu Conventional Mode Read Circle Will read the current horizontal angle from the instrument and set that as the backsight circle Non zero backsight circle values are typically used only when surveying in true azimuths Check Backsight Once the backsight has been checked by distance or angle the symbol will be replaced with a By Distance will take a shot to a prism located over the backsight point and compare the measured distance with the computed distance between the occupy and backsight points stored in the current job Note Checking the backsight by shooting a distance does not apply if the backsight is defined by a direction By Angle when the backsight is defined by a direction this routine will read the current horizontal angle from the total station and compare that to the backsight direction R 121 Survey Pro Reference Manual Check Backsight The Check Backsight screen is used to help confirm that the total station is facing the correct backsight by comparing the known distance or circular angle to the backsight with the measured value By Distance will take a shot to a prism Check Backsight located over the backsight point an
233. g box where the description layer and feature attributes can be modified Gal opens the Map Display Options screen Page R 443 to select what is displayed on the screen R 83 Survey Pro Reference Manual Points on DTM Layer The Points on DTM Layer screen displays all the points on the DTM layer and allows you to add points from another layer or delete move points to a different layer Delete will move the selected point s to the Points on DTM Layer Auxiliary layer If the Auxiliary layer is not Ee eS specified you will be prompted to select the 1 530 096 layer to move the points to 1 530 096 1 530 096 1 531 620 1 531 620 1 531 620 1 531 620 1 531 620 Note Points on a boundary or break line cannot be deleted 4 GoTo will quickly find and select the specified point Add From To opens the Select Point s screen where a point range can be entered The points will then be moved to the DTM layer Del From To opens the Select Point s screen where a point range can be entered The points will then be moved to the Auxiliary layer R 84 Job Menu 3D View The 3D View screen is used to view the DTM from any angle Setting opens the 3D View Settings screen described below where the information displayed in the 3D view can be configured Volume displays the total cut and fill volume between the area that has been staked and a reference datum w
234. get options Page R 149 Side Shot will trigger the total station to take a shot to the prism The new point is stored as a side shot in the data collector and the foresight point will automatically advance to the next available point Traverse will trigger the total station to take a shot to the prism The new point is stored as a traverse shot in the data collector and a The Traverse Now or Later dialog box will open described on Page R 126 If you choose to traverse now the occupy point will automatically change to the previous foresight point and the backsight point will automatically change to the previous occupy point dey gt sunsex am Note prior to storing a point you may then be prompted for description rod height layer and or feature information depending on the selections made in the Surveying Settings screen Backsight opens the Backsight Setup screen Page R 118 where the current backsight can be modified R 124 Survey Menu Conventional Mode Note The current backsight information is displayed across the top of the Traverse Sideshot screen Results Angle Right is the horizontal angle right around the Occupy Point from the Backsight to the Foresight Point Azimuth is the azimuth from the Occupy Point to the Foresight Point Zenith is the zenith angle measured by the total station to the prism Slope Dist is the slope distance measured by the total station to the prism
235. ght information is displayed across the top of the Repetition Shots screen R 131 Survey Pro Reference Manual Multiple Sideshots The Multiple Sideshots screen is used to perform multiple side shots using any number of repetitions to each foresight without the need to re shoot the backsight Foresight is the point name that will be Multiple Sideshots stored OCC 1 HI 5 50 BS 410 0 00 00 Description is the description for the next a Foresight 413 stored point coc J efor S HR is the length of the rod Number of Sets opens the Smart Target options Page R 412 42025 59 dag 449 ith 90 26 04 deg 14 173 _ ifeet Number of Sets is the desired number of sets to shoot to the backsight or foresight fa is a shortcut to the Surveying and Repetition ee screens Page R 45 and R 53 respectively Shoot Backsight is used to shoot the backsight You will be required to shoot the number of sets to the backsight entered in the Number of Sets field Note The backsight can be re shot at any time but it must be shot before the first side shot can be shot Side Shot is used to shoot a side shot Once the final set is complete the new point is stored and the foresight point will automatically advance to the next available point Backsight opens the Backsight Setup screen Page R 118 where the current backsight can be modified R 132 Survey Menu Conventional Mode Radial Sideshots
236. gle Old and New Azimuths rotated around the point specified here The e coordinates for the rotation point will not change M DE Simple Angle when selected this allows you to enter the deflection angle to rotate the selected points Old and New Azimuths when selected this allows you to enter an old and new azimuth which is used to compute the angle to rotate the selected points Note The choice made from the two options above determines which fields will be available below Rotate is the angle to rotate the selected points around the Rotation point gt Old Azimuth Old Bearing is a known direction between any two points in the current job before they are rotated gt New Azimuth New Bearing is the direction between the same two points specified above after the rotation R 433 Survey Pro Reference Manual Solve will perform the rotation on the selected points and change the coordinates accordingly Information will be written to the raw data file detailing the adjustment Traverse Adjust The Traverse Adjust wizard is a series of screens that allow you to adjust a closed traverse for angular error and or perform a compass rule adjustment on a closed or open traverse Choose Your Traverse is used to select a traverse to adjust from the following options Traverse Adjust Choose our e Tap Polyline is used to tap an existing i ETTA Tap Polyline polyl
237. gn either numeric or alphanumeric names to new points When unchecked all point names must be numeric M Always Prompt for Backsight Check When checked if you exit the Backsight Setup Page R 118 screen without performing the Check Backsight routine Page R 122 a prompt will first ask if you are sure M Use Classic Backsight Setup when checked the backsight setup routine functions as it did in versions of Survey Pro before 4 0 Basically the Backsight Solved screen will not appear after solving your backsight The Check Backsight and Backsight Circle screens can still be accessed manually from the Backsight Setup screen M Beep When Storing Points When checked an audible beep occurs when a point is stored M Beep On Control Activation when checked a sound occurs when an active area of the screen is tapped such as a button or checkbox M Prompt for Description When checked a prompt for a description will appear before any new point is stored from any routine other than those included in the Survey and Stakeout menus R 56 Job Menu M Prompt for Layer When checked a prompt to select a layer will appear before any new point is stored from any routine other than those included in the Survey and Stakeout menus M Prompt for Attributes When checked a prompt to select feature information will appear before any new point is stored from any routine other than those included in the Survey and Stakeout menus This also requir
238. gnments 06 44 R 68 angle adjustment162 164 R 436 antenna cc cecceceee eens R 184 architectural units conversion EEEIEE RE EEEE AEA AT R 374 archive job eecceecceeecen R 27 ASCH Merriam 29 attributes cccceeeeee R 61 auto collect 0 R 137 auto linework R 75 azimut NS ooo i a 6 backsight check R 120 R 122 circle R 119 R 123 backsight setup R 118 backup Job 00cc00 R 27 base setup R 179 R 204 get and set 241 R 186 pick base point R 182 Sls E E E E wanna 241 basemap 2 6 Hae ees ee a R 448 manage eeceeeee ees R 447 DASEINA PS eienen 24 Basic GPS data collection R 253 battery level R 3 eariNoS sisena 6 1011c 0 ee R 56 Bluetooth 294 R 39 R 170 Basic GPS 0 R 112 in Survey Pro 298 break lines 102 R 82 C calculator sisisi R 90 carrier phase differential 190 cell modem 065 R 173 cell phone 0000 R 98 central meridian 128 Central Meridian A 1 check backsight R 120 R 122 check control pointsR 196 R 255 check points 255 283 choose polyline 100 R 82 chord offset 151 R 386 close level loop R 267 code differential 190 codes description 33 34 combined scale
239. gth Delta is the deflection angle Tangent is the distance from the PC or PT to the PI Mid Ord is the distance between the curve and the chord at the center of the curve s length External is the minimum distance between the PI and the curve Deg Arc is the deflection angle that results in a 100 ft arc length Deg Chord is the deflection angle that results in a 100 ft chord length Segment is the area between the arc length and the chord Sector is the area between the arc length and the two edge radii Fillet is the area between the arc length and the tangents R 380 Curve Menu Compute Radius Point The Compute Radius Point screen is used to compute and optionally store the radius point for a curve when certain parts of the curve are known PC Point is the point that defines the Compute Radius Point beginning of the curve Point of Curvature int AN 2 j PC ill hd PT Point is the point that defines the end of PT Paint M the curve Point of Tangency P Radsi bd Turn specifies if the curve turns to the Left or Right as you face the curve from the PC Arc specifies if the arc is Small less than 180 or Large greater than 180 Arci Small Large Turn Left C3 Right Dstrene The final part of the curve is defined by one of soe seul ae the following choices Radius is the distance from the radius point to the curve Delta is the deflectio
240. h a Setup HR button to configure rover antenna and the backsight information is replaced with rover antenna height information See Page R 310 for details R 342 Show Station anc Ey Ra fa ROVING Stakeout Menu GPS amp Basic GPS Module Show Station and Offset The Show Station and Offset routine allows you to position the rover anywhere near a polyline a range of points that define a line or an alignment to see where the rod is located in relation to the selected line The first screen of this routine is similar to the conventional method except that the button is replaced with a Setup HRI button to configure rover antenna and the backsight information is replaced with rover antenna height information See Page R 314 for details Show Station Screen Two Once the line is selected the second screen is opened where information is displayed about the rod position and the selected line GPS Status displays the current solution type the number of satellites used and the horizontal and vertical precision computed by the receiver Tap on this button to open the detailed GPS Status screen Page R 172 gt ROVING switches from ROVING to OCCUPYING mode When ROVING the receiver is in dynamic mode and will calculate your position as you move to the point When OCCUPYING the receiver is switched to static mode depending on settings and will calculate the most precise position for th
241. hat are documented elsewhere in the manual All the remaining Job Menu items are covered in the Job Menu for conventional surveying starting on Page R 35 Settings Edit Points Edit Polylines Edit Alignments Auto Linework View Raw Data File View DTM Manage Layers Job Information 7s 9 FOF fH OO Pp Calculator R 109 Survey Pro Reference Manual Settings The Settings screen provides access to several individual screens that control all hardware and software settings The screens are provided in an index card format Connections The Connections card is used to configure how the data collector will communicate with the base and rover receivers Current Connection Settings Displays the current connection settings Bluetooth or serial for the base and rover receivers Bluetooth connections are represented by a 3 icon and a serial connection is shown with a Current Connection Settings green icon when the connection is active and W Rover Serial Cable a grey icon when the connection is inactive pase Serial Cable Change Settings Opens the Change Settings screen described below Bluetooth Setup Wizard Opens the Bluetooth Setup Wizard where you can detect and configure any Bluetooth EPOCH 25 receivers as described below R 110 Job Menu Basic GPS Module Change Settings Connection Settings lt The Change Settings screen can be used to Haver quickly switch the base rover receiver
242. he From Gun to Location reference point Angle Right 102 50 00 From Gun to Location displays the angle and distance information from the total station to the new point Users would aim their non robotic total station the direction specified here Circle Zero is used to modify the circle on the total station so that the angle right reading will be zero when it is facing toward the design point which can sometimes be easier than turning to an obscure angle value When this button is tapped the following actions will occur Horz Dist 85 250 Vert Dist 0 256 FE to Rod 86 49 1 1 Anew backsight circle value is computed sent to the instrument and stored in the raw data 2 The Angle Right value is changed to zero to reflect the change The instrument now needs to be turned horizontally to zero to face the design point 3 To prevent errors the backsight set up is invalidated when exiting the Stakeout dialog if this button has been used A Circle zeroed on a design point is meaningless once the design point has been staked Note The button is not available when using a robotic total station lt Back returns to the previous screen Stake gt opens the third Define a Location screen where the new point can be staked out Note The third Define a Location screen is identical to the third Stake Points screen which is described on Page R 276 R 329 Survey Pro Reference Manual Where is Nex
243. he Data Collection screen incrementing the point name after each stored point e Manual prompt every point performs the same function as the Manual Prompt Once routine above except you are prompted for a new description layer and attribute with each point stored Interval is where you enter the interval criteria used for continuous collection modes The Interval field is not available if either of the manual methods is selected Update Rate is where you set the receiver to One Hz or Five Hz mode When Five Hz is selected the receiver will compute positions five times a second so the display will update in near real time and measurement latency will be minimized Start opens the Occupy Data Points screen Page R 194 where data can be collected Note If you hotkey to another screen while using the Feature Collection routine the Feature Collection screen will be suspended until you return to it R 192 Survey Menu GPS Module Offset Shots Offset The Offset Shots screen is used to collect a point you cannot physically occupy with GPS You can occupy a nearby point with the GPS rover and then measure the offset distance and direction with tape and compass or take a shoot with a laser range finder Offset Shots E a ometro EE fr Description feop bem be gt gt Azimuth gt Bearing is the direction or bearing from the occupied point to the offset Target IT point Soe ee fic HR o o m
244. he last two shots If only one shot has been taken it is assumed that the terrain is level when computing this value On Station Back Sta Ahead Sta informs you if the rod is on the station being staked or the distance it must move parallel to the centerline back or ahead to be on the correct station HD to HP is the horizontal distance from the rod to the hinge point VD to HP is the vertical distance from the rod to the hinge point HD to CL is the horizontal distance from the rod to the centerline VD to CL is the vertical distance from the rod to the centerline R 341 Survey Pro Reference Manual Line and Offset The instructions for the Line and Offset routine for GPS similar to the conventional method except that the Backsight and buttons are replaced with a Setup HR button to configure rover antenna and the backsight information is replaced with rover antenna height information See Page R 308 for details Curve and Offset The instructions for the Curve and Offset routine for GPS are similar to the conventional method except that the Backsight and buttons are replaced with a Setup HR button to configure rover antenna and the backsight information is replaced with rover antenna height information See Page R 306 for details Spiral and Offset The instructions for the Spiral and Offset routine for GPS are similar to the conventional method except that the Backsight and buttons are replaced wit
245. he least squares solution and to change your control point selections and re solve the adjustment if desired Solutions The box for horizontal and vertical solution will display the root mean squared results If the solution is from a least squares LSO Y Residuals LSQ H Residuals PMS YW 0 009 calculation with residuals the RMS values are RMSN 0 009 RMSE 0 008 Solve Localization Solutions from the residuals of each point used in the RMS 30 0 014 calculation Ifthe solution is unique Largest H Error 0 018 at point GR1951 minimum number of control points or fixed Name H Y Nerr eer verr horizontal scale the RMS values are from the Pe lies es Nee ee GR1054 Yes Yes 0 001 0 005 0 003 misclosures of each point not used in the CR1O51 Yes Yes 0012 0013 0013 calculation MEG Yes Yes 0 009 0 007 0 011 RMS 3D displays the 3D RMS calculated from the square root of the horizontal RMS squared plus the vertical RMS squared Largest H Error displays the name of the point with the largest horizontal error if a horizontal solution was calculated A point list of all control points is displayed along with the residual or misclosure for each point depending on least squares solution or unique solution You can change the points used in the solution and re solve on this page to display the new residuals or misclosures lt Back returns to the Solve Localization Control Points screen Solve
246. he receiver File Management The File Management routine is used to manage post processing files on the GPS receiver The routine can delete post processing files from the receiver or recover files that were recently deleted The files can also be copied or moved from the receiver to the data collector for more convenient transfers to a PC The routine is identical in the GPS module and is covered on Page R 243 R 256 Leveling Menu The Leveling Menu replaces the Survey Menu when running in leveling mode It contains routines to perform a level loop or 2 peg test A Select Create Loop B Level C 2 Peg Test D Adjustment E Remote Control R 257 Survey Pro Reference Manual Select Create Loop The Select Create Loop screen is used to select a loop that has not yet been closed view the notes for any existing loop or create a new level loop Select an Existing Loop allows you to select Select Create Loop an existing loop from the dropdown list Select an Existing Loop Created 01 03 2005 14 59 18 Activate Selected Loop opens the selected loop Rete A so new data can be added to it This button Starting CEM 1 Starting Elev 100 0 ift will not be available when a closed loop is selected View Level Notes for Selected Loop displays the notes for the selected loop in the Level Notes screen described below Create a New Loop lt lt lt _ _ amp _ _ New Loop gt o
247. he receiver type that is active Page references are given for screens that are already described for the GPS module A GPS Status Start GPS Survey Data Collection Control Points Post Processing Projection Receiver Info T o HEQ File Management R 245 Survey Pro Reference Manual GPS Status The GPS Status screens are described starting on Page 172 Start GPS Survey The Start GPS Survey wizard is used to complete the setup necessary for any RTK GPS Survey It is opened from the main menu or any time you try to access data collection or stake out functions The steps to complete the Start GPS Survey wizard will depend on what you have already done in the job When connecting to the receivers by serial cable Survey Pro will detect if it is a base or rover and start the workflow accordingly When connecting to either receiver by Bluetooth you are prompted for which receiver you are connected to Each screen is shown below Start Survey Wizard Start Survey Wizard Auton Radio O Sw O4 HRMS 11 37 Float Radio 100 SV 04 HRMS 9 52 Base Receiver int Rover Receiver Base is ready to set Rover receiver is ready to set Check the antenna height then tap Next gt Check the antenna height then tap Next gt Base Antenna Epoch L1 L2 _ Rover Antenna Epoch L1 L2 _ Measure To Bottom of antenna mount Measure To Bottom of antenna mount
248. here is determined by the selection made in the Auto Compute field Auto Compute will automatically compute the grade at the selected point and display it at the bottom of the screen The grade at the point that is not checked here must be specified in the field defined above R 67 Survey Pro Reference Manual Edit Alignments The Edit Alignments screen is used to create and edit alignments which can then be used with routines such as Offset Staking Offset Points Offset Lines and Road Layout Alignments are used to describe all of the horizontal and vertical details of a road s centerline An alignment does not use existing points to define any particular locations on the alignment although a point can be used to anchor the starting location which is the same location for both the horizontal and vertical parts of the alignment Any location on an alignment where a change occurs is called a node An alignment can contain straight sections grades horizontal vertical and spiral curves The horizontal and vertical portions of an alignment are defined separately and independently but they are both combined within the software to create a single alignment with horizontal and vertical characteristics Add Edit Alignments or The Add Edit Alignments screen displays a list of all the existing alignments in the current job The right portion of the screen shows a graphic of the horizontal and vertical portion of ee Al
249. hose elevation is specified in the 3D View Settings screen or the total cut and fill between the area that has been staked and the selected DTM Aa TAA ed ae ae A jar a a RN a A VARRE Ai i er a a aa ee A NN AN wie af RVI ENN CANN NA Datum displays the datum elevation set in the 3D View Settings screen 125 2s Toggles to display or hide the point names and descriptions E When this button is activated pressed in dragging within the 3D View will result in the image being rotated to any angle When the button is not activated dragging within the 3D View will move the image to any location 3D View Settings 3D View Settings Height Exaggerated to the Maximum The 3D View Settings screen is used to Height Exaggeration Ratio configure the information displayed in the 3D Hidden line Removal View screen Display the Difference Datum loam g ee eae Eoin Vv Height Exaggerated to the Maximum View Directions From view point to the center When checked the height exaggeration is M automatically set to a high value When Zenith Direction unchecked the height exaggeration can be set manually in the next field Feset the View Directions R 85 Survey Pro Reference Manual Height Exaggeration Ratio is the value that the height is multiplied by in the 3D view The higher this value the more exaggeration where 1 0 would result in no exaggeration M Hidden line Removal When checked
250. ically with your first base leave all fields of this screen empty and tap Reset Projection The geoid setting will be applied to the coordinate system setup automatically with your first base setup R 208 Survey Menu GPS Module Select Coordinate System Select Coordinate System The Select Coordinate System screen is used to Database pick a Ground TDS Localization mode default _ Select Database Zone zone or solved localization site from the W Select Database Site database file Region TDS Localization ZoneGroup This screen is described in detail in the Site Mapping Plane mode projection section on Page R 220 The difference when in Ground TDS Localization mode is that you can only select Use Geoid GEQIDOS Conus records from the TDS Localization Region collection Select Database Pick from Database Select Database Change Database 6 The Select Database screen is used to select the pl Seen ee eee coordinate system database to use This screen Ged ab ete ree as hace will list all of the coordinate system database files csd you have in the Survey Pro directory Highlight the csd file you wish to Africa ced use and tap amp to load the selected coordinate system database file Current North America csd Americas csc Complete csd North America csd WS HPGH csd R 209 Survey Pro Reference Manual Solve Localization The Solve Localization wizard is used t
251. id on the screen when they are in view Zoom In will digitally zoom in the image with each tap between four levels from 1x to 4x Zoom Out will zoom out with each tap from 4x back to 1x Take Photo Takes a digital photo and stores the photo to a file Brightness Contrast Opens a dialog box where the brightness contrast and white balance can be adjusted Video Display Options Opens the Video Display Options screen described below where the look of overlaid points can be customized Green Blinking Light A blinking green light in the upper right corner indicates a good data feed is being received Red Blinking Light A blinking red light in the lower left corner indicates a good video feed is being received Settings Accesses the Settings screen where the Video Settings screen Page R 167 can be accessed R 165 Survey Pro Reference Manual Video Display Options The Video Display Options screen is used to customize the look of points that are overlaid on the video screen Show Points when checked points will be overlaid on the video screen The color that fills WSSAEE JENAS simie the small squares that represents the points Show Points LJ can be selected with the corresponding color ames L button When unchecked no points or point names are overlaid Smart Point Labels Show All Points Names when checked the point name will be C Show Points From Current Setup shown next
252. ident abuse misuse or misapplication has been modified without the written permission of LICENSOR or if any LICENSOR label or serial number has been removed or defaced the limited warranties set forth above do not apply and you accept full responsibility for the product The warranties and remedies set forth above are exclusive and in lieu of all others oral or written express or implied Statements or representations which add to extend or modify these warranties are unauthorized by LICENSOR and should not be relied upon by you LICENSOR or anyone involved in the creation or delivery of the Program or Documentation to you shall have no liability to you or any third party for special incidental or consequential damages including but not limited to loss of profits or savings downtime damage to or replacement of equipment and property or recovery or replacement of programs or data arising from claims based in warranty contract tort including negligence strict liability or otherwise even if LICENSOR has been advised of the possibility of such claim or damage LICENSOR S liability for direct damages shall not exceed the actual amount paid for this copy of the Program Some states do not allow the exclusion or limitation of implied warranties or liability for incidental or consequential damages so the above limitations or exclusions may not apply to you U S GOVERNMENT RESTRICTED RIGHTS If the Program is acquired for use by or on behal
253. ied line and if From Gun to Design Point it is on the Right or Left side of the specified Angle Right 105 19 24 line Horz Dist 997 426 From Gun to Design Point displays the Pee tal ree direction and distance that the total station ZE to Rod 90 00 00 must aim toward so that it is facing the current gece 1 Hr 550 ps ceoo oo ikkini Circle Zero is used to modify the circle on the total station so that the angle right reading will be zero when it is facing the current target which can sometimes be easier than R 304 Stakeout Menu turning to an obscure angle value When this button is tapped the following actions will occur 1 Anew backsight circle value is computed sent to the instrument and stored in the raw data 2 The Angle Right value is changed to zero to reflect the change The instrument now needs to be turned horizontally to zero to face the current target location 3 To prevent errors if this button is used the backsight set up is invalidated when exiting the Stakeout dialog A circle zeroed on a design point is meaningless once the design point has been staked Note The button is not available when using a robotic total station lt Back returns to the previous screen Stake gt opens the fourth Stake Line and Offset screen which is identical to the third Stake Points screen described on Page R 276 Note Tap the graphic portion of the screen for an expanded view Screen Su
254. ight Point or Direction of the line specified in Screen One SD 9 250 ON LINE is determined if you are within the Horizontal Distance HD 9 248 Tolerance specified in the Stakeout Settings screen Page R 47 Offset Dist 0 531 Station 0 09 226 Fill 0 630 H 316 10 13 2A BB 44 19 yD 0 204 Offset Dist is the perpendicular offset from the specified line to the rod This is the minimum distance that the rod must travel to occupy the line Station is the station on the specified line where the offset occurs relative to the Start Point R 283 Survey Pro Reference Manual Graphic when prism is Graphic when prismis Graphic when prismis Graphic when prism is greater than 10 feet between 1 foot and within 1 foot of the on the line or within the from the line 10 feet from the line line Horizontal Distance Tolerance specified in the Stakeout Settings screen Page R 47 Cut Fill displays the required amount of cut or fill to bring the stake point to the elevation of the reference line at the nearest perpendicular Note If staking beyond the end points of the reference line or if the reference line is defined by a 2D point no vertical data is computed Meas contains the information measured by the total station during the previous shot Shot takes a shot to the prism lt Back returns to Screen One Store opens the Store Point dialog so you can store the last point that
255. igin Lng 120 30 00 0000 Origin North 0 000 Key In Zone Origin East 2 000 000 000 North Parallel 46 00 00 0000 South Parallel 44 20 00 0000 R 225 Survey Pro Reference Manual Ground Coordinates The Ground Coordinates screen is used to toggle between grid and ground coordinates and to select how to define the origin of the ground coordinate system Projection Definition is where you choose how l I Ground Coordinates to represent the mapping plane coordinates There are two options Projection Definition O Use Grid Coordinates e Use Grid Coordinates WGS84 geodetic Use Ground Coordinates coordinates will be transformed into Ground Coordinates Origin mapping plane zone coordinates C Origin at mapping plane origin Horizontal distances on the ground are C Bick point to define origin usually scaled to the grid Select Point 7 e Use Ground Coordinates WGS84 Key in coordinates to define origin geodetic coordinates will be transformed into ground scaled coordinates translated to a local origin Horizontal distances on the ground are 1 1 on the grid because the grid is scaled to the ground Ground Coordinates Origin is where you select what point to use as the origin of the ground coordinate system relative to the origin of the mapping plane zone You can choose to e Origin at mapping plane origin ground coordinate scale factor will be applied from the origin of the mapping plane zon
256. iginal Error dist Error azm Precision Angular error Change per angle Closing angle Length Perimeter Adjusted Error distance Error azimuth Precision Length Perimeter Compass Rule Closing to Known Location Location M Location E Location Z Original Error distance Error azimuth Precision Length Perimeter Adjusted Error distance Error azimuth Precision Length Perirmeter Point Details Traverse First point is fixed Traverse Original N Original E Original 2 Adjusted M Adjusted E Adjusted Z Change NM Change E Change 2 Linear change Traverse 0 495 126 28 02 1 5609 37 S1 05 81 4912 20 65 261 30 00 3 225 484 3233 976 333 416 622s 21 1 9 3 255 484 3 588 900 a 743 847 066 043 230 8510 After Angle Adjust 333 201 62 18 47 1 9 3 255 484 3 598 900 0 000 Perfect 3 250 649 3 231 142 12 294 389 3 439 999 246 320 30 777 24 881 246 320 16 358 24 552 0 000 101 905 Miscelaneous Screens The following screens are only available via a Quick Pick or a power button see the User s Manual They are not available directly from any menu item Past Results Create Points Trimble Slant HR gt HR Convert Slant HI to HI Quick Pick Editor Map View Map Display Options Basemaps Smart Targets Disable Touch Screen R 439 Survey Pro Reference Manual Past Resu lts Choose Past Result Select a value and press OK to use rem fae w F E A
257. iina aAa aaa aai 3 Fil M enUsinmona a 7 Opani NON eaei Gatedaahadatanstasaarcxuuecetasacoees 8 NOW ODi crannan a e 8 DOV CAS oraraa a 14 IDOT lisien AE E ieee re 15 EXPO ennaa a ie aetaeia 22 IMPO GOMEON PONIES sasinan 26 Back p Restore OD eiin e RE aT 27 Trans E erekaniinneaa a atie Peale casos 31 Register MOdUIES siipien ai 32 ADOUESUIVEY PrOriiaviunan a 33 Be EPA E EAA E EEE E TA A E EE A 33 JOD M enU anisina 35 SNS aea eavetnsaeiai el dcaretianatenntatinm 36 EIU P ONES rnrn TE Ai 58 EGIE POLY IND CS iccinsstinsvanteuiaiatauerevavcsaivn tevatiecvanaieuenadaneningatitetsintnint 64 Edit AlgNMeEntsS eritsabieacs eeidiereiaidcanatdinetinniacadisinnadtinatcandacnanten 68 AUCO TMOW OF rievaini a N 75 View Raw Data Fil ss sesssessesssrresrrnserrnsrrnsrrrnsrrnsrrnnsrensrnnnn 79 VIW DT M enaa aan ulenianaamlan 80 Manag LAY CUS sorainak a aa eia 3 JOCIMO MANON maaa dao aeeaaiael eves 88 Cal CU AON n E 90 JOD MCU G BS arni 93 CUNS oaa r eae isan arias a anoeheenanna 94 Job Ment Basic G PS iissirivsninisisinasnnvaninadusninaninna 109 ANOS aa ersten scuisionnsaaniaasenaarartadidiaceulanamanarnanns 110 SURV CY M QIU iiicsieisicccsissedadanseedatuniadieadessccuwetsccdsssussedunuadecacadespceswuhiceuis 117 BaCKSIONC SALUD curan a 118 Traverse SideSh0t ccccccccccssssecccccceesseceeceeeseceecceaaaseeeeeeaas 124 Repetition Shots cccccssssesssseecsseeessseeeessneesssneesssneesssneneeseess 130 MUTI DIG SIGESIOUS wae
258. ill to HP 0 460 HD to CL 16 529 Fill to CL 0 060 Although the graphic portion of the screen is continuously updated the numeric values are not updated until the Shot button is tapped The correct procedure for slope staking in GPS mode is to use the graphic portion of the screen to locate the catch point as closely as possible and press Shot Once the position is satisfactory you can determine if the rover needs to be moved again GPS Status displays the current solution type the number of satellites used and the horizontal and vertical precision computed by R 339 Survey Pro Reference Manual the receiver Tap on this button to open the detailed GPS Status screen Page R 172 The first button selects the type of slope that will be used between the catch point and hinge point from the following options e Automatic Slope selects the slope based on the current rover position If the rover is above the hinge point a cut slope is computed If the rover is below the hinge point a fill slope is computed e Force CUT Slope forces all computations to be based ona cut slope e Force FILL Slope forces all computations to be based on a fill slope The second button selects which information is displayed in the lower corner of the screen from the following options gt V Map displays a cross sectional view at the current station Note When you tap a map view an expand
259. in passive mode active tracking turned off it is important to leave the Use Target ID box unchecked and if the active tracking is enabled to leave Use Target ID box checked since a different vertical correction is applied for each case Use Target ID When checked the Target ID can be selected for the Smart Target This option is only available when using a total station and prism that supports target IDs e Use For Search When selected the total station will check the Target ID only when searching for the prism and then track the prism Once the prism is being tracked the total station can potentially start tracking a different reflector that comes into view e Use Always When selected this forces the total station to continuously check the Target ID even while tracking the R 451 Survey Pro Reference Manual prism eliminating the possibility of the total station tracking a different reflector that comes into view Using Active Prism Check this option when using an active prism This option is only available when using a total station that supports active prisms Note In order to perform automatic repetitions when using active prisms active prisms must be set up over both the backsight and foresight R 452 Miscellaneous Screens Disable Touch Screen CTRL space This option can be used to disable the touch screen when it is necessary to wipe it off Press ESC to reactivate the touch screen and
260. ine a location R 328 description file 33 COCES ccecceesceeceeee 33 34 OPENING shite egeicts 35 DG Ee aetna ewe 189 Differential GPS 189 disable touch screen R 453 distance offset 121 R 134 distance units 68 17 DTM WIE We esaa R 80 DTM stake 97 R 319 R 345 DUT correction R 54 E earth curvature R 45 ECEF XY Zoas 189 201 edit alignments R 68 create points R 440 edit basemap R 448 edit GPS point flags R 63 edit point general R 59 R 60 geodetic eessen R 62 IOCATION orumi R 61 edit point flags R 62 edit points eee R 58 edit polyline R 83 edit polylines R 64 dil TODO ernie R 404 edit segment 064 R 71 Geoid96 ccesesceesesenee 207 HGM9G6 ies ess 198 Geoid99 soe vino euiees 207 ellipsoid height 207 EO OC iicics sedan iseaeacer 135 ellipsoid scale factor 206 278 CHA erranari n a 128 ephemeris c cceees 128 CHAO erena ite R 158 ORM ENEE EATEN TEE R 33 GM Tranninemiuw 129 R 160 export GPS backsight resectionR 249 CR5 coordinates R 24 GPS coordinates 193 209 JOB coordinates R 23 managing 225 TXT coordinates R 24 GPS point flags CSV coordinates R 25 edito ene R 63 LandXML coordinatesR 26 GPS
261. ine from a map view To From e To From Opens the Point List screen Page R 443 where a point list can be created Compass Rule Bowditch Adjustment n L_ Adjust Elevations M Angle Adjust When checked will perform rc an angle adjustment to the closed traverse An angle adjustment will apply the angular error equally among all of the angles of the closed traverse and adjust the coordinates for all but the first two traverse points The first leg of the traverse is not adjusted L Angle Adjustment Polygon Rule M Compass Rule When checked will perform a compass rule adjustment on the selected traverse M Adjust elevation when selected the elevations for the traverse points are also adjusted from the compass rule adjustment M Adjust Sideshots When checked any side shots that were stored while occupying the traverse points in the selected traverse will also be adjusted The side shot locations will be recomputed using the original angles and distances stored in the raw data file along with the adjusted locations of the occupy and backsight points R 434 Adjust Menu The user cannot explicitly define the side shots that are adjusted Instead they are determined by the information stored in the raw data file If no side shots were stored from any of the traverse points an error message will be displayed and no adjustment is performed If any of the following settings were changed during or afte
262. ing receiver types only If you wish to record post processing data simultaneous with RTK then you should set the recording interval on the Job Settings Post Process screen and then start the base and rover using the Start GPS Survey wizard When you tap the Post Processing menu while connected to either the RTK base or rover you have only two options If the RTK receiver is already recording data you are prompted if you wish to close the open logging file If the RTK receiver is not logging data you are prompted if you wish to clear the RTK setup and proceed using this receiver for post processing data collection only R 201 Survey Pro Reference Manual Static RTK Rover Receiver Session Survey Data Collection or Start Recording or Survey Control Points Post Process or The Receiver Session screen is used to enter the station information and antenna height for a post processing data collection session 2 cose Recording Elapse Sv 06 HOOP 1 80 Store point in Receiver and job file y a Point MANE Description kontrol mon Session Duration Antenna set Log Until Stop f min fo SEC Static Receiver Session close Recording Elapse 0 20 SV 06 HOOP 1 80 Store point in Receiver file only Site ID k 1002 Description pk Session Duration Last Antenna C Log Until Stop 2 0 rn ji min fo an to Slant measure Static Receiver Session
263. ing up Free Memory displays the amount of memory remaining on the disk where post processing data is stored This will usually be the receiver s built in memory or the receiver s removable memory card For some brands and models this may be disk space on the data collector HDOP VDOP Satellites Used Satellites Locked See the Receiver card Page R 172 Sky View The Sky View card displays a plot of the satellites tracked and the elevation mask boundary S VLock 8 SV Used SV Lock See the Receiver Card Elev Mask 10 Page R 172 inside Circle i Elev Mask Displays the elevation mask currently set on the General card of the Receiver Settings screen R 175 Survey Pro Reference Manual Note If the receiver setup has not yet been performed the elevation mask will not be displayed Also if you have changed the elevation mask setting and have not yet reconfigured this receiver the value you see on this display will be the value from the settings and not the value the receiver is currently using Sat Info The Sat Info card displays signal quality information for the satellites used by the receiver and allows you to disable tracking specific satellites which is useful if the receiver is tracking a noisy satellite SNR Plot This card lists all the satellites GPS Status A that are in view and shows a bar graph that indicates the signal to noise ratio A longer bar indicates more nois
264. int being staked and a reference DTM surface at the same horizontal coordinates You can also obtain volume information between the surface being staked and a specified reference elevation or the reference DTM surface The reference DTM surface can be defined by a layer in the current job or a file loaded on the data collector Either a DXF file containing a triangulated irregular network TIN or a digital terrain model DTM file can be used Consult the User s manual for more information Note The speed performance of the Stake DTM routine is enhanced when using a DTM file as opposed to a DXF file DTM Source is where you select your reference DTM surface If using a layer toggle DTM S Does iF the button to Layer Layer land then select the layer from the dropdown list If using a DTM or DXF o Store Point Ea FF with Centerline _ Generate DTM with Staked Points file toggle the button to and then tap the power button and Browse then select the appropriate file Choose Centerline Setup view DTM OCC Ale LG BS 0P0n ne R 319 Survey Pro Reference Manual Warning If importing a DXF or DTM file where the distance units in the source file are different than the distance units for the current job the imported coordinates will be converted to the current job s distance units when they are imported This is normally the desired result but it can cause a problem if
265. int with the receiver in roving mode Once the design point has been staked this screen is also used to control static occupations for the most precise measurement to the as built point The first two screens of this routine are similar to the conventional method except that the Backsight button on the first screen and the button on the second screen are replaced with a Setup HR button to configure rover antenna The backsight information is replaced with rover antenna height information See Page R 274 for comparison GPS Staking n FORD 0 246 7 FOR WO 0 246 Go Right 0 000 i Go Right 0 000 FILL 6 000 FILL 6 000 ra Design Location ra Design Location E Rover Location S Rover Location Bef oeao oo g Ref oeo0 00 oO Topa 55 Topa 55 ee 0 30 m Roving using navigation method Roving using navigation method There are two navigation methods available when staking a point and you can switch between them by tapping the M button When using the method a large red arrow indicates the direction of travel and always appears at the top of the graphic This arrow will dim when at a standstill or when near the design point A north and south indicator are displayed on the graphic and will rotate depending on your direction of travel along with a blue line that indicates the direction to your reference point or azimuth When you are near the design point the graphic will change and
266. inuing Sear ree Select a Base Point allows you to choose a Base matches one of point from the dropdown list which contains aaa all the matching points found in the job Shange gt sage Next gt opens the Set Up Rover screen Start Survey No Matching Base Point This screen will open when the base is set up on a point that does not match any point in the BS Sei aires ge job a i Select Base Point __ Base is set on anew job point Select this if Sae anaren oon meen the base is set up on a point that is not already Base is set on an existing point in the job stored in the job The next screen will then o Base Point require that you connect to the rover receiver Base Antenna Broadcast _ and occupy control points to perform a Measure To Antenna Phase Center __ resection for the base position Base is set on an existing job point Select Measured ON this when the base is set up on a point stored in the job Base Point specifies the name of the base point This is a new point name when the base is set on a new point or an existing point name when the base is set on an existing job point R 248 Survey Menu Basic GPS Module GPS Backsight Resection Start Survey Wizard Start Survey Wizard Float Radio 100 Sw OF HRMS 7 31 Float Radio 100 Sw OF HRMS 7 19 GPS Backsight ta GPS Resection Occupy a known poi
267. ion scan function since you have opened the Receiver Setup screen R 96 Receiver Settings lt General Receiver Data Modem gt Brand Trimble Model Trimble 5800 ETK Correction Format cme Receiver Elevation Cutoff Job Menu GPS Module Rx Settings Job Settings Receiver Receiver Settings Rx Settings or J ob Settings Receiver Create New Receiver Rx Settings or Connect to Receiver Receiver Settings Rx Settings or Connect to Receiver Create New Receiver Rx Settings or The Rx Settings screen contains three cards to configure the receiver mode RTK correction type RTK data modem satellite tracking elevation cutoff as well as some settings specific for particular brands and models of receiver Receiver Settings The Receiver card is used to set the mode of the receiver the correction format for RTK receivers and the elevation cutoff for satellite tracking _OK J Cancel Brand displays the receiver manufacturer selected in the Receiver Setup screen Model displays the receiver model selected in the Receiver Setup screen RTK Correction Format is where you set the format for communication between the base and rover RTk Base fio degrees Receiver Mode is where you set the mode of operation of this receiver There are four choices e RIK Base use this mode to set the receiver as an RTK base which will broadcast GPS corrections in the se
268. iple sideshots R 132 R 133 N NAD Kaeaea 195 NAVD88 0ccceeeeees 199 NEW JOD wise a R 8 new occupy point R 127 NGV 29 cis cette oh 198 POO E R 80 Index O Oblique Mercator 203 Oblique Mercator projection occupy control pointR 197 R 255 occupy data point 266 occupy data points R 194 offset line R 361 R 362 offset point 06 R 193 offset points 66 R 362 STONING asa nR R 316 offset shot eeeeseescen 266 offset shots ccccceee 121 distance 121 R 134 horizontal angle123 R 135 vertical angle 124 R 136 offset staking R 286 one point setup 258 R 178 open job cersiteShoiachent R 13 open new job secsec R 8 orthometric elevations 207 output fields eee 12 Pp parabolic curve R 390 parabolic curve layout 153 parabolic layout R 392 parallel method 148 R 370 past results 08 R 440 PC deflection 150 DOP testador R 268 procedure 185 PI and tangents R 378 PI deflection 150 R 385 POB 2 xteiosnetowks R 70 R 71 point feature attributes R 61 point flags edina aana R 62 point in direction R 358 point list 0 16 R 443 Reference Manual point to line inverse R 351 point to location inverseR 355 point to multiple points INVEYSE
269. iral curves they will be treated as straight sections in the offset alignment The Offset Staking or Offset Points routine should be used to stake offsets from a spiral Description is the description that will be given to the new alignment or polyline Solve computes and optionally stores the new offset line R 361 Survey Pro Reference Manual Offset Points The Offset Points screen is used to store points at a specified perpendicular offset to an existing polyline alignment or point range Points can be stored that correspond with the nodes of an alignment points of a polyline and or at a specified station interval Tap Line allows you to tap an existing Offset Points polyline or alignment that the offset points will 2 be computed from Tapline E z Opens the Point List screen Page ASEE Opens the Foint List screen rage za R 443 where a point list can be created eE OL r ot sor M lt Store Pts Offset defines the offset distance and which ete ieee ka side the offset occurs The right or left side is aCe BEN B referenced from the first point that defines the l selected line Description M Store Pts When checked will store the offset points that are computed based on the selected line and which of the two following checkboxes are checked Note Leaving the Store Pts field unchecked and solving the screen will result in a map screen th
270. is item is only available when Adjust Loop From a Specific Point To End is selected above and allows you to select an alternative benchmark starting point in the loop for the adjustment Any setups prior to the selected benchmark will not be adjusted The description and elevation for the selected benchmark are displayed at the bottom of the screen Next gt opens the Adjustment Preview screen Adjustment Preview Screen The second adjustment screen allows you to Adjustment preview the details of the adjustment before l applying it mee Previews lt Back Returns to the previous screen Adjustment Settings Gilt les headus t h Adjusting Elevations without applying the adjustment so changes Weigh by Length of Setups can be made to the configuration Not to adjust SS point s Known Eley of Closure Pt 100 0 Note If you do not want to apply the Observed Elev of Closure Pt 99 9866074 adjustment and do not want to make changes to the configuration simply tap amp to cancel and close the screen R 270 Level Menu Adjust Performs the adjustment and opens a screen that details the results Note If the selected loop has already been adjusted or if the computed error is negligible the Adjust button will be inactive Leveling Remote Control The Remote Control screen can only be accessed in leveling mode when trigonometric leveling with a robotic total station The Remote Control screen is des
271. ithm base e of x R gt P Converts the rectangular coordinates y x to polar coordinates P gt R Converts the polar coordinates y x to rectangular coordinates gt R Converts x in decimal degrees to radians R gt Converts x in radians to decimal degrees G gt R Converts x in Grads to radians dms Converts x in degrees minutes seconds to decimal degrees _ gt dms Converts x in decimal degrees to degrees minutes seconds dms Subtracts x in degrees minutes seconds from y in degrees minutes seconds dms Adds x in degrees minutes seconds and y in degrees minutes seconds R gt G Converts x in radians to Grads R 91 Job Menu GPS Only the Settings menu item in the Job Menu is unique while running in GPS mode with the standard GPS module compared to running in Conventional mode All the remaining Job Menu items are covered in the Job Menu description for conventional surveying starting on Page R 35 Settings Edit Points Edit Polylines Edit Alignments Auto Linework View Raw Data File View DTM Manage Layers Job Information SO FOF ff OOD Pp Calculator R 93 Survey Pro Reference Manual Settings The Settings screen opens several individual screens that control all hardware and software settings The screens are provided in an index card format Note Only the cards that are available when running in GPS Mode with the GPS module are covered in this section For details o
272. ization mapping plane to your grid orientation of your project Calc Scale opens the Localization Calculator screen where the horizontal scale factor is explained Calc Rotation opens the Localization Calculator screen where the rotation can set parallel to a mapping plane selected from the database Base Station Local Coordinate are the local plane coordinates of the base If you set up on a new base point these fields are blank and you need to occupy one control point to calculate the base station local coordinates Occupy Control opens the Control Points screen Page R 190 where you select a control point to occupy When you are done the base local coordinate is calculated using your entered scale and rotation Solve gt computes the horizontal localization parameters using the entered scale rotation and base station local coordinates R 214 Survey Menu GPS Module Localization Calculator Scale Note This function is no longer necessary with Survey Pro versions after 3 5 The new localization solution sets the origin scale of the reference stereographic mapping plane based on ground height This screen was left in to explain scale factor to users who previously used this work flow Use 1 0 Scale returns to the Localization Calculator screen with a scale factor of 1 0 Localization Calculator Rotation In order to compute the localization rotation you need a known geodetic coordinate
273. king screen is used to define the centerline of the road that you want to SSS sess RO offset stake Tap Linen Tap Linen Tap Line displays a map of all the polylines and alignments in the current job Tap the line that you want to offset stake and then tap amp To From Opens the Point List screen Page R 443 where a point list can be created Begin Station 10 00 0 lv OCC 1 HI 5 50 BS 2 0 00 00 Begin Station is the station assigned to the f f Backsight first point of the selected polyline or point range Backsight opens the Backsight Setup screen Page R 118 Next gt takes you to the second Offset Staking screen R 286 Stakeout Menu Offset Staking Screen Two The second Offset Staking screen is used to define the cross section of the road that you want to offset stake 1 2 Road Width is the Left and Right width eet aus iid Ye x of the road respectively from the centerline to 1 2 Road Width L R the edge of payment See diagram below x Slope 964 L 3 0 Stake Curb Ditch X Slope is the Left and Right slope of the road respectively from the centerline to the edge of payment Note A negative slope will result in water running from the centerline toward the edge of pamor M Stake Curb Ditch When checked a curb or ditch and an offset can be defined beyond the edge of the pavement senna tt F 4 when th
274. l decimal format Units Coordinates exported as International Feet Units are the distance units that will be Coordinates exported as International Feet written to the resulting TXT file These units _ Headers in the first row are automatically set to the same units that are set for the current job Coordinates is used to select if the resulting M Headers in the first row When checked a heading describing each column is inserted in the first row For example the following header could be inserted Name Northing Easting Elevation Description lt Back returns to the previous screen R 24 File Menu Next gt opens the second screen Export TXT Coordinates Screen Two Select the desired order and format for the resulting TXT file from the list of options Finish exports the selected points to the TXT Name Northing Easting Elevation Description file O Name Easting Northing Elevation Description Name Latitude Longitude Height Description O Name Longitude Latitude Height Description Export CSV Coordinates This routine is identical to the Export TXT Coordinates routine described above with the exception that the formatting for the exported file is automatically set to comma delimited and the extension for the file name will be CSV R 25 Survey Pro Reference Manual Export LandXML XML File Unlike the other export routine
275. l open the point in the Edit Point General Paint Description Northing ifeet screen Page R 60 where the details of the 1 548 821 point can be modified If more than one point 1 906 336 is selected the next Edit Points screen will 2 025 239 2 044 260 open where the description and layer for the 6 069 selected points can be modified simultaneously Note as with most Windows applications a series of points can be selected by holding down the shift key while selecting the first and last point within a range of points Miscellaneous points can be selected unselected by holding down the control key while tapping them Note Double tapping on a point will also open the point in the editor Note The current occupy and backsight points cannot be edited Insert opens a dialog box where a new point can be added to the current job Delete will delete the selected point Find will search for a point by its description Find Next will find the next point that contains the description entered when using the button above R 58 Edit Points Job Menu Go To opens a dialog box where any point can be quickly located by the entered point name Edit Multiple Points General The General and Location cards of the Edit Points screen are accessed after pressing when more than one point is selected The changes made in these screens will be applied to all the selected points Change
276. l station s keypad The data collector will simply log each shot that is taken from the total station This routine is typically used for topo work where the total station remains over a single occupy point during all shots Note Not all total stations support record mode is a shortcut to the Surveying Settings Rec ord Mode Q screen Page R 45 OCC 1 HI 5 50 BS 411 42 28 27 Sheep is point name an will be used a Foresight a2 when storing the next point Once a point is stored it will be incremented to the next ae mo ai 7 00 ft E x available point Angle Right 196 54 27 Zenith a7 o6 54 Description is the description for all the shots Slope Dist 14 384 that are stored HR is the length of the rod E T i on in aol x opens the Smart Target options Page R 449 Start Recording starts recording all shots performed from the total station Stop stops record mode Backsight opens the Backsight Setup screen Page R 118 where the current backsight can be modified R 152 Survey Menu Conventional Mode Resection The Resection screen allows you to compute an unknown occupied position by shooting two to seven known positions Store Point is the name that will be used Resection when the new occupied point is stored aswe p J RN Z nstrument Height is the height of the E E instrument above the ground Total Resect Points to Shoot gt Total
277. lected RTK Correction Format over the transmitting data modem e RTK Rover use this mode to set the receiver as an RTK rover which will listen for GPS corrections on the receiving data modem and calculate a differential GPS position in real time e Post Processing use this mode to set the receiver to collect GPS raw data for post processing No data modem will be used to R 97 Survey Pro Reference Manual transfer GPS measurements in real time This mode is used to setup both static and stop go post processing receivers e Ntrip Rover Select this mode to use the receiver as an RTK rover where the base corrections are to be supplied to the rover by connection to an Ntrip service To configure an Ntrip rover you must setup the Windows Networking modem parameters on the Data Modem card Note You do not need to select the RTK Correction Format for an Ntrip rover because this will be determined by the Ntrip service you pick at rover setup time Elevation Cutoff is where you set the elevation cutoff for satellite tracking This value will be set in the receiver the next time you configure it as a base rover or static receiver Data Modem Settings The Data Modem card is used to view and configure the settings for the modem used to transmit RTK base corrections or receiver RTK rover corrections The data modem card is not used when your Receiver Mode is set to Post Processing Receiver Settings OK Data Modem Pac Crest
278. lection angle that results in a 100 ft arc length Deg Chord is the deflection angle that results in a 100 ft chord length Segment is the area between the arc length and the chord Sector is the area between the arc length and the two edge radii Fillet is the area between the arc length and the tangents R 387 Survey Pro Reference Manual Traverse on Curve The Traverse on Curve screen will compute the PT and radius point for a curve when the tangent azimuth at a PC point is known The first known part of the curve is defined by Traverse on Curve one of the following e Radius is the distance from the radius point to the curve e Delta is the deflection angle e Degree Arc is the deflection angle that PC Point D O00 pe OO Turn Left O Right 645 results in a 100 ft arc length e Degree Chord is the deflection angle that results in a 100 ft chord length The second known part of the curve is defined by one of the following Delta is the deflection angle Length is the arc length Chord is the chord length Tangent is the distance from the PC or PT to the PI Mid Ordinate is the distance between the curve and the chord at the center of the curve s length External is the minimum distance between the PI and the curve PC Point is the point that defines the beginning of the curve Point of Curvature Bea
279. llaneous Screens Trimble Slant HR gt HR Ra From any HR field Trimble Slant HR gt HR This option only applies when using a Trimble Traverse Kit that allows the measurement of a Slant HR instead of the usual HR When this option is selected it will convert a Slant HR entered in an HR field to a standard HR This must be performed each time a new Slant HR is entered in the HR field Consult the documentation that came with the Trimble Traverse Kit for more information on correctly measuring a Slant HR Convert Slant HI to HI e From any HI field Convert Slant HI to HI This option is only available when using a Trimble total station that supports a Slant HI instead of the usual HI such as a Trimble S6 When this option is selected it will convert a Slant HI entered in an HI field to a standard HI This must be performed each time a new Slant HI is entered in an HI field Consult the documentation that came with the Trimble Total Station from more information on correctly measuring a Slant HI R 441 Survey Pro Reference Manual Quick Pick Editor Fe Edit Quick Pick located at bottom of list The Quick Pick Editor is used to customize the list of routines available from the Quick Pick button P Menu Items Is a dropdown list containing the Keme aeie aslie menu items you would normally see in the Menu Eme Main Menu Selecting a menu item from this Suspend Screen a list will display all of the routines f
280. llection is performed O M Prompt for Description When checked a prompt for a description will appear before any Prompt for Description new point is stored from only the routines Prompt for Height of Rod under the Survey menu Page R 117 Prompt for Layer Prompt for Attributes _ Detect Duplicate Shots Note Descriptions cannot exceed 16 Scale Factor characters _ Use Scale Factor Calc Scale Conventional measurements not scaled _ Prompt to Reset Scale With New Setups M Prompt for Height of Rod When checked a prompt for the rod height will appear before any new point is stored M Prompt for Layer When checked a prompt to select a layer will appear before any new point is stored from only the routines under the Survey menu Page R 117 M Prompt for Attributes When checked a prompt to select feature information will appear before any new point is stored from only the routines under the Survey menu Page R 117 This also requires that a feature file be selected from the Files Settings card described above M Detect Duplicate Shots when checked a prompt will appear before attempting to store a second shot to the same location This helps to catch when robotic total stations have lost lock while surveying The distance tolerances set in the Repetition Settings screen are used in determining when two shots are at the same location M Adjust for Earth Curvature Refraction whe
281. me Toggle inverts the horizontal limits of an existing rectangular scan frame This tool can be used to quickly define a 360 scan frame for taking panoramic photos by first creating a rectangular scan frame with the desired height and a near zero width and then tap this button Predefined Vertical Scan Frame generates a vertical scan frame with horizontal limits that fall within the video image and vertical limits that extend to the vertical turning limits of the total station Note Once a scan frame is defined it can be resized by dragging the edges or corners Predefined Horizontal Scan Frame generates a horizontal scan frame with vertical limits that fall within the video image and with horizontal limits that wrap nearly 360 around the total station W Undo will undo the last change s made to the current scan frame with each tap Zoom In will digitally zoom in the image with each tap between four levels from 1x to 4x Zoom Out will zoom out with each tap from 4x back to 1x Define Scan Frame W Aim I nstrument toggles between two modes When in Aim Instrument mode tapping anywhere within the video image will turn the total station to that location When in Define Scan Frame mode you can create a scan frame by tapping on the screen R 148 Survey Menu Conventional Mode Camera 20 Brightness Contrast opens a dialog box where the brightness Brightness F Cont ast d H White Balanc
282. ment When not checked the results list will show only those points that will oen mom me a eet change as a result of this adjustment or points that did not change because of a projection D Show all points Apply error Action Adjusted fram source NEE Adjusted t 3 Adjusted from source NEE Adjusted t 4 Adjusted fram source NEE Adjusted t Si Adjusted fram source WEE Adjusted t Adjusted fram source WEE Adjusted t R 240 Projection Calculator ea Projection zone Group US State Plane 1983 zone Oregon North 3601 Select Point convergence calculation Calc Rotation gt CHAP Choose a point for scale factor or Survey Menu GPS Module Apply applies the adjustment to the listed points Note When the Adjust with Projection wizard was opened from the menu tapping will only update the selected job file point locations The job file coordinate system will not be changed in this case When the Adjust with Projection wizard was opened automatically as a result of a change of coordinate system tapping will update all eligible job file point locations and it will update the job file coordinate system Adjust with Projection Adjust More The Adjust with Projection Adjust More screen is used to return to the Select Points screen if you wish to adjust some selected points again This screen only shows when the wizard was opened from the menu Projection
283. mmary Screen One is used to define the primary line used to determine the location of the line to be staked and the station associated with the Start Point Screen Two is used to define the offset distance and location the station to be staked and the station interval Screen Three provides the distance and direction information to the current station to be staked Screen Four is used to stake the current station R 305 Survey Pro Reference Manual Stake Curve and Offset The Stake Curve and Offset screen is used to stake stations ona curve or at an offset to it at fixed station intervals i opens the Stakeout Settings screen Page R EGRQaeWeieN nea 7 x 47 Define a Curve r PC Point 2 PC Point is the starting point of the curve hd point of curvature M PC Tangent Azm PC Tangent Brg defines bo S the azimuth or bearing respectively of the Turn Left Right tangent at the PC Point emsan 1 1 Degree Arc Degree Chord OCC 1 HE 5 50 BS 0000 00 defines the radius degree arc or degree chord of the curve respectively Turn defines if the curve turns to the Left or Right from the point of view of the PC Begin Station is the station assigned to the PC Point Backsight opens the Backsight Setup screen Page R 118 Next gt takes you to the second Stake Curve and Offset screen described below Curve and Offset Screen Two Station to Stake is
284. mode is Readjust with Current Projection this screen shows the current coordinate system record details This screen only shows when the wizard is opened from the menu The Select Source Coordinate System screen is PAES aren almost identical to the Select Coordinate System screen described in the mapping plane section Page R 209 The following controls are special to the Adjust with Projection wizard Source Projection Record is where you select what type of coordinate system record to Datum WGS 1984 choose for the source You can Geoid GEOID99 Conus Source Prniectinn Fecord Database Zone Database Site Zone Group TDS Localization ZoneGroup Site 05 02 2004 Database Zone will display controls to pick a map projection from the regions and zones in the database Database Site will display controls to pick a localized site record from either the Site region or the TDS Localization ZoneGroup group Current Projection will disable the edit boxes and display the current projection details The job file coordinate system record will be used R 238 Survey Menu GPS Module Adjust with Projection Select Destination Coordinate System The Adjust with Projection Select Destination Coordinate System screen is used to select the coordinate system to transform the job file points into The interface is identical to the Select Source Coordinate System screen described above This screen only shows
285. n Projection Calculator Scale Mapping Plane Scale Factor displays the computed mapping plane scale factor on the selected mapping plane at the reference point Ellipsoid Scale Factor displays the computed ellipsoid scale factor at the reference point Combined Scale Factor displays the Mapping Plane Scale Factor multiplied by the Ellipsoid Scale Factor This is the ground to grid scale factor R 242 close Projection Calculator Geodetic N to Grid M Convergence 1957 38 159 Grid N to Geodetic M Rotation 1 57 38 159 dose Projection Calculator Ellipsoid Scale Factor Correct measured distances for the height of the terrain above the ellipsoid reference surface Ellipsoid Height 55 510038 m Projection Calculator EA Mapping Plane Scale Factor 0 9999517 Ellipsoid Scale Factor g q99q990713 Ground to Grid Combined scale factor 0 9999430 Grid to Ground Inverse combined factor 1 0000570 Survey Menu GPS Module Inverse Combined Factor displays the inverse of the Combined Scale Factor This is the grid to ground scale factor and is the value used in the localization solution lt Back returns you to the previous Projection Calculator screen Accept copies the two computed values to past results and returns you to the Main Menu File Management The File Management routine is used to manage post processing files on a supported GPS receiver Th
286. n R 313 Survey Pro Reference Manual Show Station The Show Station routine allows you to take a shot to a prism that is positioned anywhere near a polyline a range of points that define a line or an alignment to see where the prism is located in relation to the line Tap Line allows you to tap an existing OREO MERCK cag 2 im amp polyline or alignment that the station and offset will be computed from Tap Line Tap Line To From Opens the Point List screen Page R 443 where a point list can be created Begin Station is the station assigned to the Begin Station lv beginning of the line Backsight opens the Backsight Setup screen occ 357 HI 5 50 BS o 00 00 Page R 118 Next gt takes you to the next Show Station and Offset screen where the slope staking parameters are set up R 314 Stakeout Menu Show Station and Offset Screen Two The second Show Station and Offset screen is used to take a shot to the prism and view the data Show oe Nek iim me fe Height of Rod is the length of the rod SON eae EDM This button can be toggled to shoot in Offset Dist 297 996 i various EDM modes The options available Elev 748 500 Offset Left depend on the total station being used Segment Line Consult the total station s documentation for more information on the EDM modes that it Shot Data supports Angle Right 45 00 00 Ze
287. n horizontally and vertically toward the design point after tapping the button in the particular stakeout screen e Automatic 2D HA only A motorized total station will automatically turn horizontally toward the design point when the stakeout screen opens e Automatic 3D HA and ZA A motorized total station will automatically turn horizontally and vertically toward the design point when the stakeout screen opens Cut Sheet Offset stored The cut sheet offset information can be stored to the raw data file in either of the following formats when performing any offset staking routine e Design Offset when selected a cut sheet report will list the design offset values e Actual Offset when selected a cut sheet report will list the measured offset values Display Directions As will guide you to the GPS stakeout location using one of the following formats R 49 Survey Pro Reference Manual e Northing Easting will suggest you Go South Go North and Go West Go East e Distance Azimuth will display the necessary Azimuth and Distance to the stakeout location e Forward Back will suggest you go FORWD BACK and Go Left Go Right when you are within 3 meters to the location When you are farther than 3 meters a distance and azimuth is used Level Settings The Level Setting screen is only available when running in leveling mode It is used to configure all of the settings for performing a level loop The scroll bar
288. n prompts you for a point name and then the map view will be centered to the specified point with the point label displayed in red Turn To Point Button Tap this button and then tap a point in the map view to automatically turn the total station to the selected point This is only available when a robotic total station is selected and Remote Control is active in the Instrument Settings Increase Vertical Scale is only available when viewing a vertical profile Each time it is tapped the vertical scale of the view is increased Decrease Vertical Scale is only available when viewing a vertical profile Each time it is tapped the vertical scale of the view is decreased Zoom Preview Button will display only the points that are currently in use only available from certain map view screens A Map Display Options opens the Map Display Options screen described below Manage Basemaps opens the Manage Basemaps screen described below only available from the main map view accessed from the command bar button R 445 Survey Pro Reference Manual Map Display Options From the Map View tap The Map Display Options screen is used to configure the information that is displayed in the Map View Show Points will show a dot for each point in SEeRmertee sien ou O amp wee Show Points Smart Point Labels Smart Point Labels displays only certain Names point labels name and description when many Descriptions points
289. n SANGAS Ei Az 97019 24 R Wa A2 105 03 11 i AF 134 47 03 R Az 140 30 49 L End a S Sta 26 18 670 Azi 103 03 11 Gero OOOO O Remove removes the selected segment and automatically joins the next segment with the previous segment Note The station and azimuth at the beginning of the selected horizontal segment are displayed at the bottom of the screen R 69 Survey Pro Reference Manual Edit Alignment Screen VAL Tab The VAL Vertical ALignment tab in the Edit Edit Alignment Alignment screen is used to enter or modif o y Hal MAL Poe General only the vertical details of an alignment Note The total horizontal length of the VAL must be equal to or greater than the total horizontal length of the HAL when the alignment is used for road layout TQ Sta 16 47 664 Insert opens the Edit Segment screen Ele 767 950 where a new vertical segment can be inserted prior to the selected segment Edit opens the Edit Segment screen where the selected vertical segment can be modified Remove removes the selected segment and automatically joins the next segment with the previous segment Note The station and elevation at the beginning of the selected vertical segment are displayed at the bottom of the screen Edit Alignment Screen POB Tab The POB Point Of Beginning tab in the Edit Alignment screen is used to define the sta
290. n angle Degree Arc is the deflection angle that results in a 100 ft arc length Degree Chord is the deflection angle that results in a 100 ft chord length M Store RP When checked the computed radius point will be stored with the name specified here Solve computes the location of the radius point Layout opens the Curve Layout screen Page R 384 Traverse opens the Traverse On Curve screen Page R 388 des gt synsay R 381 Survey Pro Reference Manual Results Radius is the distance from the radius point to the curve Length is the arc length Chord is the chord length Deg Arc is the deflection angle that results in a 100 ft arc length Deg Chord is the deflection angle that results in a 100 ft chord length Delta is the deflection angle Tangent is the distance from the PC or PT to the PI External is the minimum distance between the PI and the curve Mid Ord is the distance between the curve and the chord at the center of the curve s length Segment is the area between the arc length and the chord Sector is the area between the arc length and the two edge radii Fillet is the area between the arc length and the tangents R 382 Curve Menu Line Tangent to Circle Will compute the location of a line that is tangent to the specified sides of two specified circles Tangent Line determines which sides of the Line Tangent
291. n cards shared by both GPS Mode and Conventional Mode refer to Page R 36 Receiver Settings J ob Settings Receiver or Connect to Receiver Receiver Settings The Receiver Settings card is used to select and activate GPS receivers as well as modify or create a receiver s settings parameters The upper portion of the first Receiver Settings screen lists the names of all the receiver profiles on the data collector The other columns list the COM Port Brand and Model of the receiver defined in each profile Settings Fok f cancel Model Trimble 5700 COM Trimble Trimble Trimble 5800 Bluetooth Trimble Trimble Demo Mode S Demo Mode is a special profile that cannot be deleted or edited When activated Survey Pro is put into Demo Mode which can be used to simulate GPS measurements This mode is used for training and demonstration purposes Receiver Settings opens the Receiver Setup screen where you can set the parameters for communication from data collector to receiver as well as access the Rx Settings screens where you can configure the receiver settings R 94 Job Menu GPS Module Create New Receiver J opens the Receiver Setup screen where you can set the parameters for communication from data collector to receiver as well as access the Rx Settings screens where you can configure the receiver settings When you tap OK the new receiver is
292. n checked the elevations for new points are adjusted to compensate for the curvature of the earth and refraction R 45 Survey Pro Reference Manual M Survey with True Azimuths automates the process of adjusting the circle on the total station when traversing so that you can survey with azimuths rather than horizontal angles see Page R 127 M Use Scale Factor when checked horizontal distances to all new points will be scaled by the factor entered here Elevations are not affected This defaults to unchecked when a new job is created Calc Scale allows you to automatically compute the scale factor from a selected map projection If a mapping plane is not already selected you will first be prompted to select one M Prompt to Reset Scale on New Setups if checked when a map projection is selected and you set up over a new location the specified scale factor is compared to the scale factor defined for your current location in the mapping plane If the scale factor is different you will be prompted to use the new scale factor R 46 Job Menu Stakeout Settings The Stakeout Settings card contains the setting that control how stakeout is performed The settings available depend on if you are running in conventional or GPS mode Settings A Stake Corners Not J ust Even eee Intervals when staking by stations w Stake Corners Not Just Even Intervals locations where a line segment changes such _
293. n the selected base point does not have geodetic coordinates Base setup Base Point moni Base Point displays the base point name chosen in the previous screen Latitude 44 330769 Wl peste i i tude 123 160657 ti Latitude is where you enter the WGS84 latitude 9 E positive for the base point Ellipse Height 55 0 m rn Longitude is where you enter the WGS84 iti longitude for the base point Average position ji epochs before GET R 186 Survey Menu GPS Module Ellipse Height is where you enter the WGS84 ellipsoid height for the base point Note You can enter latitude in dd mmsssss format with north positive or you can enter dd mm ss ssssss N S You can enter longitude in ddd mmsssssss format with east positive or you can enter ddd mm ss sssss E W Average position for epochs before GET instructs the receiver to average autonomous positions for this number of epochs before returning Get Position From Receiver Rx queries the receiver for an autonomous position and updates the edit boxes GPS Status opens the GPS Status screen Page R 172 Note It is highly recommended that you do only one autonomous base setup per job This will make it much easier to manage the transformation from geodetic to local plane coordinates in your job It is possible however to do multiple autonomous setups in a job If you do this each setup is assigned a unique setup group to identify them See the
294. name specified in the Starting At field Renum All will store the new point in the current job under the name specified in the Starting At field and perform the same action for any remaining duplicate points storing them with the next available point name R 21 Survey Pro Reference Manual Start At is the point name assigned to the imported point when using the or Renumber All functions Compare coordinates will open a dialog box showing the coordinates for the duplicate points to assist in making a decision of how to handle the new point Stop Importing will not import the current duplicate point and will stop importing any remaining points All previous points will still be imported into the current job Export The Export screen allows you to export selected points from the current job to a new job or to a coordinate file in another format You can also export all the objects in the current job to a LandXML file This first screen is used to specify the type of file that you want to export data to J ob J OB File when selected the points are Esmu exported to a TDS JOB file Old J ob J OB File when selected the points S2 amp ct the Type of File to Export are exported to a TDS JOB file that is Job JOB File compatible with versions of Survey Pro earlier ld Jab 308 File hans 0 Compatible with Survey Pro 1 x and 2 x O Coordinate CRS File Coordinate CR5 File when selec
295. nding on how the button is toggled Starting Width is the starting width of the widening This must match the width of the Qe sl previous template or widening check ke creck Ending Width is the ending width of the widening Check opens the Roads Report screen and displays any errors see Page R 405 New opens the New Widening screen which is identical to the Edit Widening screen where a new widening can be created see Page R 401 Edit opens the Edit Widening screen where the selected widening can be modified see Page R 401 M Mirror to Right Left duplicates the widening to the other side of the road when checked R 411 Survey Pro Reference Manual Super Elevations Card Roads Edit Roads New or Edit Super Elevations The Super Elevations card of the New Road screen is used to add or edit super elevations A super elevation changes the cross slope of the first segment of a template in order to bank a curve the slope of any remaining segments will remain unadjusted One super elevation defines a begin point and an end point where the slope change begins and where it finishes the transition for one side of a road Therefore to bank a two lane road four super elevations would be required one at the beginning and one at the end of the curve for each side of the road A super elevation can either hinge at the outer edge of the first segment or at the cente
296. ng GPS raw data for post processing Second you must measure the antenna height and enter the antenna and station ID for each point you occupy The Post Processing routine is described starting on Page R 199 Projection The Projection Information screen is used to select and solve the horizontal and vertical projections which are used to transform GPS measured WGS84 coordinates latitude longitude height into local coordinates North EKast Elevation The screen is also used to switch R 255 Survey Pro Reference Manual between mapping plane and localization mode The buttons available will vary depending on the current projection mode This screen and the screens accessed from it are nearly the same as those found in the GPS module which are described on Pages R 205 to R 228 The Solve Localization screens vary slightly and are described on Page 251 Receiver Information The Receiver Information screen displays the serial number firmware version and other information about the current receiver Receiver Information Receiver Type Spectra Precision Serial Number displays the serial number of the current receiver Serial Number 0710154371 f Firmware version 00240 Firmware Version displays the firmware a a version of the current receiver Sig Process ver 00000 Record in Raw Data records a note to the raw data file containing the information displayed on the screen Hard Reset Receiver resets t
297. ng routine determines the location of the Cut Slope 3 0 Dtak ng Ca soy catch point from a perpendicular offset to a Fill Slope aa known centerline at a specified station HR 7 00 ift M v The first screen is used to specify the hinge occ 357 bre s50 BS ocod on point and horizontal direction from the hinge point to the catch point From Point is the hinge point gt Point gt Direction is either another point that lies in the same vertical plane as the hinge point and catch point or the azimuth from the hinge point to the catch point respectively Fill Slope is the desired slope calculated from run over rise between the hinge point and catch point when the area requires a fill Cut Slope is the desired slope calculated from run over rise between the hinge point and catch point when the area requires a cut Height of Rod is the rod height Backsight opens the Backsight Setup screen Stake CP gt opens the next screen R 299 Survey Pro Reference Manual Point Slope Staking Screen Two The second screen is used to perform the actual point slope staking hots shots Point Slope Staking Ce x Rod Elev is the current elevation at the rod ry FILL Slope Rod Elev 746 675 location DM Inst EOM Des Slope 4 000 Des Slope is the design cut or fill slope Obs Slope 7 543 Above DS 1 174 Obs Slope is the computed observed cut or Toward HP 4 390 HE to HP
298. ng the destination coordinate system Points with a geodetic location will be transformed into a new plane location using the destination coordinate system e Adjust only geodetic points only points with geodetic locations will be adjusted All eligible points with geodetic locations will be transformed into a new plane location using the destination coordinate system Readjust with Current Projection use this mode when you want to readjust locations using the current coordinate system This mode has two options e Geodetic to Plane Hold LLH Adjust NEE use this option to adjust the plane location of selected points with a geodetic coordinate The plane location of selected points with a geodetic location will be recalculated using the current coordinate system set in the job Plane to Geodetic Hold NEE Adjust LLH use this option to adjust or add geodetic locations to all points The plane coordinate of all points will be used to calculate geodetic coordinates using the latest projection Points that have geodetic coordinates will be updated points that did not have geodetic coordinates will be set with the latitude longitude and height calculated from the transformation R 237 Survey Pro Reference Manual Adjust with Projection Select Source Coordinate system The Adjust with Projection Select Source Coordinate System screen is used to select the coordinate system of the current job file points When the adjustment
299. ngth e Tangent The distance from the PC or PT to the PI Mid Ord The distance between the curve and the chord at the center of the curve s length e External The minimum distance between the PI and the curve R 72 Job Menu Turn specifies if the curve turns to the Left or Right as you face the curve from the beginning M Make this segment tangent to previous When checked the start of the specified curve will be tangent to the ending tangent of the previous segment Bearing is used to enter a known azimuth or bearing at the start of the curve adds the curve to the current horizontal alignment Edit Segment Spiral Card The Spiral card is used to add a spiral curve to the alignment Radius is the radius of the spiral This equals the radius of the horizontal curve tangent to the spiral Radius lv Length is the length of the spiral Length Ra Turn specifies if the curve turns to the Left or Tun Let C Right Right as you face the curve from the beginning Dir TStosc cs to ST H E E EIGSR RIG ei Dir specifies if the curve runs from TS to SC a Tangent to Spiral to Spiral to Curve or CS Ly to ST Curve to Spiral to Spiral to Tangent M Make this segment tangent to previous When checked will automatically turn the spiral so the beginning is tangent to the end of the previous segment X p X of Throw z Azimuth Bearing is Tang
300. nith 90 00 00 Station displays the station at the rod Slope Dist 1 000 000 pos ition Offset Dist displays the perpendicular offset from the centerline to the rod position Elev displays the elevation at the rod position Offset displays if the rod position is to the right of the line left of the line or on the line Segment displays the name of the template s segment at the rod position Shot Data displays the angles and distance measured by the total station from the last shot Shot takes a shot to the prism lt Back returns to the previous screen Store stores the stake point R 315 Survey Pro Reference Manual Store Offset Points The Store Offset Points screen is used to store points in the current job at a specified offset from an existing polyline or alignment at a specified interval Tap Line allows you to tap an existing Store Offset Points Tow LX polyline or alignment that the station and offset will be computed from tap Line tap Line To From Opens the Point List screen Page _ aN R 443 where a point list can be created Begin Station is the station assigned to the ped ae Ly beginning of the line Next gt takes you to the next Store Offset Points screen where the slope staking parameters are set up Store Offset Points Screen Two The second Store Offset Points screen is used to define the road profile or offse
301. ns the Control Points Start Survey Wizard screen where you can choose local points to use Collect Control Points Occupy known local points these ae as GPS control points and occupy them with points can be used to salve the the GPS rover localization Sane tines son Solve Localization displays information about You need 2 more horizontal and 3 the current number of GPS control points and how many more are needed to have the minimum number required to solve the more vertical points to solve the localization start Surveying Now 1 lizat Solve the required localization Sera ee ocalization later Solve Localization opens the Solve Localization wizard Page R 210 Start Now gt allows you to start surveying now without localizing Localization can be performed later at which time all data collection points will be updated to the proper local coordinates lt Back R 189 Survey Pro Reference Manual Data Collection The Data Collection screen is used to collect GPS measurements and store new points in the job GPS Status displays the current solution type FESS Se the data modem reception quality the number of satellites used and the horizontal precision computed by the receiver When this area is 8 Point eo o tapped the GPS Status screen Page R 172 Descrintion will open to Bottom of mount OCCUPY the next point to be stored i Description is where you e
302. nstrued in accordance with the laws of the State of Oregon United States of America LIMITED WARRANTIES AND LIMITATION OF LIABILITY LICENSOR grants solely to you a limited warranty that i the media on which the Program is distributed shall be substantially free from material defects for a period of NINETY 90 DAYS and ii the Program will perform substantially in accordance with the material descriptions in the Documentation for a period of NINETY 90 DAYS These warranties commence on the day you first obtain the Program and extend only to you the original customer These limited warranties give you specific legal rights and you may have other rights which vary from state to state Except as specified above LICENSOR MAKES NO WARRANTIES OR REPRESENTATIONS EXPRESS OR IMPLIED REGARDING THE PROGRAM MEDIA OR DOCUMENTATION AND HEREBY EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE LICENSOR does not warrant the Program will meet your requirements or that its operations will be uninterrupted or error free If the media Program or Documentation are not as warranted above LICENSOR will at its option repair or replace the nonconforming item at no cost to you or refund your money provided you return the item with proof of the date you obtained it to LICENSOR within TEN 10 DAYS after the expiration of the applicable warranty period If LICENSOR determines that the particular item has been damaged by acc
303. nt The change will only be saved if you then tap amp Tapping amp will return to the previous screen without saving the changes Clear All will completely remove the current polyline The change will only be saved if you then tap amp Tapping amp will return to the previous screen without saving the changes Curves Opens the fourth screen described below where a horizontal vertical or spiral curve can be added to the selected polyline segment Horizontal Vertical toggles between showing the map ina Horizontal overhead view or a Vertical side view lt Insert allows you to insert a point or a group of points in front of the selected point The change will only be saved if you then tap amp Tapping amp will return to the previous screen without saving the changes R 65 Survey Pro Reference Manual Note if lt End gt is selected in the list the button will change to an button to indicate that additional points will be appended to the end of the list Screen Four Add Edit Curve The fourth screen is used to modify a selected polyline segment that occurs between two points A horizontal vertical and or spiral curve can be applied to the polyline segment Adding a Horizontal Curve Tap the Arc Spiral tab Curve must be set to Arc to enter a horizontal curve gt Degree Chord allows you to specify the radius of the curve using a variety of methods Turn
304. nt You can either enter a different elevation or tap amp to accept the computed elevation Backsight opens the Backsight Setup screen Page R 118 where the current backsight can be modified Surface Scan The Surface Scan screen takes advantage of a robotic reflectorless total station to automatically take a sequence of shots of a surface PC software can then use the data to generate a 3 D raster image of the surface or a DTM surface to compute volume information Consult the User s Manual for more information on performing a surface scan Surface Scan Setup T out x Select Type of Surface Scan Distance Grid Ad jon onale I onaf I Horizontal Distance Interval vertical Distance Interval Distance Grid Surface Scan Surface Scan Setup P a x Select Type of Surface Scan EEn E HR 0 00 ift 0 00 0 00 ift x v z H 180 3423 3423 180 3423 zA 90 3423 90 3423 3423 Horizontal Angle Interval Vertical Angle Interval Show Outline Show Unit Angle Grid Surface Scan Select Type of Surface Scan Select the type of surface scan to perform here The option selected will determine how you will define your perimeter and distance intervals Distance Grid Point 1 Point 2 Point 3 Are the point names that will be used when storing the upper left upper right and lower points that define the surface perimeter R 143 Survey Pro Reference Manual Note If any points defining your perimeter
305. nt to create i Occupy 2 known points to create i GPS control to orient the setup 2ccupy Control gps control for the resection ABEL CILMI lt Base Point 1 GPS Backsight The local coordinate NEElev of point 6 will be Use base as a vertical benchmark calculated when you solve the GPS resection start Surveying Now Start Surveying Mow Start Now Start now and occupy Start Now Start now and occupy GPS control later GPS control later GPS Resection The GPS Backsight Resection screen will open any time the coordinate system is not solved It will have one of two states depending on if the base was set up on an existing job point and one additional control point is needed to orient the setup or the base was set up on a new point from an autonomous setup Occupy Control gt opens the Occupy Control Setup screen described below Use base as vertical benchmark Check this box if the base is set up on a job point with an accurate elevation to include it for vertical control during localization Start Now opens the Data Collection screen without collecting GPS control at this time R 249 Survey Pro Reference Manual Occupy Control Setup The Occupy Control Setup screen is used to specify which job point with accurate NEE coordinates you are occupying and if you want to use the point for horizontal and or vertical control when localizing this can be changed later Point is the existing job point you
306. nt when it is used outside of Survey TOS Defaults select the function for the selected button when Pro Selecting lt Global gt from this field will result in the global assignment also being used from within Survey Pro Global Assignment is where you select the function for the selected button when it is used outside Survey Pro TDS Defaults will set all assignments in the Assignment Within Survey Pro field to the TDS default settings System Defaults will set all assignments in the Global Assignment field to the system default settings and set all the assignments in the Assignment Within Survey Pro field to lt Global gt R 55 Survey Pro Reference Manual General Settings The General Settings card can contain the following miscellaneous settings M Use Enter Key to Move Between Fields When checked the Enter key will move the SANU cursor to the next field in all screens When unchecked the Enter key will perform a Use Enter Key to Move Between Fields different function depending on the field e E a a Pome a ie Always Prompt for Backsight Check selected uUse Classic Backsight Setup w Beep When Storing Points Beep On Control Activation Note The arrow keys and the Tab key can Prompt for Description also be used to move the cursor between fields Auto time stamp every 60 L_ Remind to backup job every hrs M Allow Alphanumeric Point Names When checked you can assi
307. nter the description for the next point to be stored Set HR displays the current antenna measurement and measure to setting You can change the antenna measurement by entering a new value in the edit box This new antenna height will be sent to the receiver with your next data collection point You can change both the antenna measurement and measure to setting by tapping on to open the Receiver Antenna screen Page R 184 Post Process opens the Receiver Session screen Page R 202 where you can occupy a point for a post processing only session This allows you log a session in the post processing file using an existing point name without changing that point record in the job file Control opens the Control Points screen Page R 190 stores a point with a single epoch of data The current position is checked against the criteria and if acceptable the point is stored ansaa ig Point is where you enter the point name for dev gt R 190 Feature Collection Points to Be Stored starting c1001 Description S55 Method Time Interval Interval 2 sec You will be prompted for description and layer for the first point Continuous points willbe stored with the same values Update Rate Five Hz a Survey Menu GPS Module Note The function never puts the receiver in static mode so the precision of the rapid side shot will be less than a point occupied in static mode
308. nts in the basemap these will not affect the appearance of the points in the current job Point Symbol R 448 Miscellaneous Screens Smart Targets a Tapa x power button next to a E43 indicating a prism Smart My Reflectorless Target is currently selected or indicating a reflectorless _ Smart Target is currently selected This item is available from any screen where the rod height can be adjusted Manage Smart Targets Trimble Slant HR gt HR Smart Targets provide a convenient way to work with different prisms and or target types on the same job See the User s Manual for more information Quickly change to any available user configured smart target by tapping it from the upper portion of the list The active Smart Target is marked witha Vv Manage Smart Targets Opens the Manage Smart Targets screen described next where a custom target can be configured Manage Smart Targets yi Manage Smart Targets Manage Smart Targets The Manage Smart Targets screen is used to edit existing custom targets or configure a new custom target type My Prism Prism 7 00 ift get typ My Reflectorless Reflectorless 0 00 ift The upper portion of the screen lists all the custom targets that are currently available To select a target tap it from this list The selected target can then be edited deleted or activated Add Opens the Edit Smart Target screen des
309. o a Geodimeter 600 series total station running TDS onboard software COM Port specifies which COM port you are using on the local machine Baud Rate specifies the communications speed The baud rate must match in both units for successful communications Parity specifies the parity The parity must match in both units When in doubt select None here All transfers are controlled from the PC when in this special mode Enter Server Mode places the data collector in server mode where all file transfers are controlled from a PC running either TDS Survey Link or TDS ForeSight Tapping will disconnect server mode Send File will open the Open dialog box where the file that you want to send can be selected Once selected the file is sent from the data collector to the specified device A progress bar will be displayed R 31 Survey Pro Reference Manual that indicates how much of the file has been transferred Tapping will stop the file transfer Note The routine should be initiated shortly after issuing the receive command on the other device Receive File allows you to receive a file from another device This should be tapped prior to issuing the Send command on the other device Tapping will stop the file transfer Register Modules The Register Modules screen is used to upgrade the Survey Pro software Refer to the User s Manual for more information on registering additional modules If no modul
310. o shoot that shot again Reset permanently deletes all observations A warning prompt will appear before the observations are deleted R 159 Survey Pro Reference Manual The Enter Shot Data Dialog Box Horizontal Angle displays the horizontal angle measured by the total station This value is updated with the Take Shot button described below Current Date Time displays the current date time and DUT These settings can be changed from the Date Time Settings screen Page R 54 Date if incorrect the current date should be entered here Time is where the precise time that the observation occurred is entered TCR rnea oo amp amp Horizontal Angle 01 03 2005 14 55 36 Current DUT oo eal a DD rey Hrs To GMT HH eal a SS 555 Get Local Time Hrs to GMT is the number of hours that the time at the current location differs from Greenwich Mean Time Note The hours to GMT will be between 5 and 8 when in the continental United States Take Shot records the horizontal angle from the total station Get Local Time fills in the Time field with the current time that is set in the data collector This function is not available when shooting the backsight Sun Shot Procedure Summary 1 Point the telescope ahead of the path of the sun and lock the horizontal movement of the total station 2 Immediately record the horizontal angle from the total station using the Take Sh
311. o solve a horizontal and vertical adjustment for a coordinate system The user interface and i Select H Select procedure to solve a localization in Ground ca T TDS Localization mode and Mapping Plane GR1054 mode are very similar This section explains ae i A A how to solve a horizontal and vertical OERA oN adjustment in either projection mode Number of Pts Used eae 2 H 4 Yi g Solve Localization Control Points fea va Solve V The Solve Localization Control Points screen is pea E a Solve used to pick control points for a least squares localization solution or to key in parameters for a manual localization solution Solve Localization Control Points Height 619 043864 A list of all occupied control points matching the current base set up group is displayed Ifa point is to be used in the horizontal and or vertical transformation solution a Yes will appear in the H and or V column for that point Ifit is not to be used in the solution that field will be blank Each point can be selected for horizontal or vertical control by tapping the corresponding column or pressing the H or V key on the keypad You can double tap on a point to display information about that point Select H selects the currently highlighted point as horizontal control in the least squares solution Select V selects the currently highlighted point as vertical control in the least squares solution Select All selec
312. o they are no longer displayed in the Edit Alignments screen In this case the alignment can be re associated with the routine from the definition in the RD5 file Answering No to this prompt will open the next prompt without deleting the selected alignment s from the current job e Delete Roadname RD5 file Answering Yes to this prompt will permanently delete the selected alignments and road RD5 files from the data collector Import Opens the Import Road screen where an existing road RD5 file can be added to the current job This is useful to copy road files that were transferred to the data collector from a PC and to add roads that were stored in a directory other than the current directory New Road Screen Edit Road or The New Road screen is identical to the Edit Road screen and is used to assemble the parts of a road or edit an existing road This screen consists of five separate index card style tabs Each tab opens a different card that is used to define a particular part of the road R 404 Roads Menu The Road Card Roads Edit Roads New or Edit The Road card of the New Road screen is used to select the alignment to use for the road If an alignment has not yet been created refer to Page R 68 for information on creating an alignment Edit Road tOO Road Name is the name assigned to the road l e a The name must not be the same as any existing Road Templates Widenings Super Elevati
313. ob Menu Settings Edit Points Edit Polylines Edit Alignments Auto Linework View Raw Data File View DTM Manage Layers Job Information 7 Oo OA ROOD eS Calculator R 35 Survey Pro Reference Manual Settings See Page R 94 if running in GPS mode The Settings screen actually consists of several separate screens where each individual screen contains different types of settings There are two ways to navigate to the various screens The first method is to tap the button to drop down the list of available screens and then tap on the desired screen from the list to open it An alternate method is to tap the buttons to the side of the screen title which will open the previous or next screen respectively Repeatedly tapping either of these buttons will cycle through all the available screens Instrument Settings The Instrument Settings screen is actually the first of multiple screens used to identify and salle configure the instrument s you are using with Survey Pro The correct settings must be configured for successful communications qa s Trimble 5 Series 56 Manual Mode between the data collector and the instrument The upper portion of the first Instrument Settings screen lists the names of all the instrument profiles on the data collector The other columns list the COM Port Brand and Model of the instrument defined in each profile Manual Mode is a special profile that cannot be deleted When
314. ob or create a new one This screen also appears when Survey Pro is first started Modified ees 1 1 2005 9 10 am Open will open the job selected in the Open a EWE Ee Recent Job list Browse will open the Open screen Page R 13 where an existing job to open can be ae e Open an Existing Job selected a New will open the New screen Page R 8 Les Create a New Job where a new job can be created Mew New Job The New Job wizard is used to create a new job Create a New Job 1 Directory displays the directory where the current job will be stored Create a New Job New Job Mame J ob Name is where the name of the new job is Directory Built in Storage Survey Pro entered The default name is the current date Jobs Job Name Browse allows you to select a different TE directory where to store the new job _ Use or Import a Control File Use or Import a Control File when checked you can select an external control file or import the points from a different job as control points R 8 File Menu Next gt opens the next screen The screen that opens depends on if a control file will be used Create a New Job 2 Imported or External Control File Create a New Job This screen will only open next when a control Import Control Points file will be used or imported L Use External Control File I mport Control Points When sel
315. occupation time so far for this measurement Count Status displays Measuring when you have current coordinates from the receiver and the screen is updating with the latest measurement If you are using Epoch Averaging Averaging is displayed after you tap while the number of epochs is averaged in Survey Pro Suspended is displayed if you are not receiving valid data from the receiver GPS Status opens the GPS Status screen Page R 172 Accept adds the measured GPS coordinates to the point record in the job file and returns to the Control Points screen R 198 Survey Menu GPS Module Post Processing Post processing data collection involves two steps First you must open a file and begin logging GPS raw data for post processing Second you must measure the antenna height and enter the antenna and station ID for each point you occupy Post Processing Post Processing The Post Processing screen is used to open or close a post processing data file and start or stop logging GPS raw data measurements to the file When you tap the Post Processing menu button you are prompted to choose a receiver to connect to from the list of post processing receivers you have created Post Processing Not Recording Start Recording Start Static Start Stop Go Recording Settings Rec Interval 1 Change Settings Last antenna for this receiver Antenna Demo 1 Measured Toa Slant measure mark Measured j2 0 m Radi
316. odetect attempts to communicate with the receiver on each available COM port and at every available baud rate and parity If successful it will update the communication parameters to the discovered values This button only shows when your Data Collector Port is set to COM1 or COM2 Bluetooth J opens the Bluetooth control panel application This separate application is used to scan for Bluetooth receivers and select devices to use with Survey Pro This button only shows when your Data Collector Port is set to Bluetooth Set Rx Comms sets the receiver with the communication parameters from this screen In order to use this function you first must know the correct communication parameters in Survey Pro This is usually accomplished by using the Autodetect function Once you have established communication with the receiver you can choose new parameters and tap Set Rx Comms to change the settings on the receiver This button only shows when your Data Collector Port is set to COM1 or COM2 Rx Settings connects to the receiver using the selected communication parameters and opens the Rx Settings screen Device is where you set the Bluetooth device to connect to Refresh List refreshes the Device list with all available Bluetooth devices known to the Bluetooth control panel application You must hit Refresh List in order to update the Device list with any Bluetooth receivers you found using the control panel applicat
317. oint VRS1 Resection Point 1 Resection Point 2 Start Now Start Surveying Mow Start now and check the setup later Survey Menu Basic GPS Module points will be set in the job file and the projection readjust mechanism will run to update any job points as required You must remember that the solution has not been checked for quality Solve Localization Eey Pro Before the Solve Localization wizard starts the localization peers pao Ia is computed using all the control points and then the GPS Backsight Do vou want automatic blunder detection routine runs to detect low to automatically change the GPS control point list to quality control points Tapping at this prompt will remove blunders automatically disable the horizontal and or vertical control that Its i lution Thi b idden i at results in a poor solution is can be overridden in the next screen The Solve Localization wizard is used to solve a horizontal and vertical adjustment for a coordinate system The user interface and procedure to solve a localization in Ground TDS Localization mode and Mapping Plane mode are very similar Solve Localization Residuals The Solve Localization Residuals screen is used Start Survey Wizard to display the residuals from the least squares Float Radio 100 Sv OF HRMS 6 38 solution and to change your control point GPS Backsight selections and re solve the adjustment if Horizontal blunders detected desired
318. ojection adjustment The screens displayed will vary depending on the action that opened the Adjust with Projection wizard All of the screens are described below Adjust with Projection Select Points The Adjust with Projection Select Points screen is used to select points to be adjusted and how to adjust them This screen is only shown when the wizard is opened from the menu To From opens the Select Point s screen where you can select points by specifying a Ea ii 18 points selected si oint range ene Ale Tap Points opens a map view where you Adjust From Source to Destination Projection can select points by tapping them on the Adjust all selected points screen O Adjust only geodetic points There are two adjustment modes Read just with Current Projection Geodetic To Plane Hold LLH Adjust NEE Source to Destination Projection use this Plane To Geodetic Hold NEE Adjust LLH mode when you want to adjust locations in one coordinate system into locations in another coordinate system You can choose the source and destination coordinate systems from the database This mode has two options Adjust With Projection e Adjust all selected points all eligible points will be adjusted Points with plane only locations will be transformed into a R 236 Survey Menu GPS Module temporary WGS84 geodetic location using the source coordinate system and then into a new plane location usi
319. ojection mode is set to TDS Localization Use local ellipsoid heights for elevation Status Line The text at the top of the screen Mapping Plane Ground describes the status of the horizontal projection solution Switch to using Ground TOS Localization mode Show Details opens the Projection Details screen where the complete details of the localization solution reference map projection and Geoid model are displayed Select Zone opens the Select Coordinate System screen Page R 226 where you can choose a zone or site from the data base key ina custom zone and delete zones or sites from the database Mapping Plane Ground opens the Ground Coordinates screen Page R 226 where the grid to ground conversion parameters can be calculated and applied Solve Localization opens the Solve Localization wizard Page R 210 where control points can be selected and the horizontal and vertical localization are solved Switch to TDS Localization switches the horizontal projection mode from Mapping Plane mode to Ground TDS Localization mode Page R 206 R 218 Survey Menu GPS Module Select Coordinate System The Select Coordinate System screen is used to choose a mapping plane zone or localized site from the coordinate system database file You can also open the Key In Zone wizard to create a new zone and datum with user specified parameters Select Coordinate System Select Coor
320. on on the current rover position and a graphic that shows the rover location the occupied TIN triangle and the rectangular DTM corners of the DTM boundary 2 close Note the DTM boundary corners and TIN triangle may not be visible depending on the current scale of the screen gt OCCUPYING ROVING switches from ROVING to OCCUPYING mode When ROVING the receiver is in dynamic mode and HR 2 001 will calculate your position as you move to the point When OCCUPYING the receiver is switched to static mode depending on settings and will calculate the most precise position for the staked point Desc OTMI R 345 Survey Pro Reference Manual 3D View opens the 3D View screen consult the conventional surveying Reference manual where a 3D view of the DTM can be viewed from any angle as well as cut fill information for the current location Note The button is only available when Generate TIN w Staked Points is checked in the previous screen and at least three stake points have been stored Store stores a point at the current rover location with the point name shown in the St Pt field and the description in the Desc field Also advances the St Pt to the next available point name St Pt is the point name that will be assigned to the next stored point Desc is the description that will be assigned to the next stored point HR is the height of the rod Data shows
321. ond Road Station and Offset screen is used to take a shot to the prism and view the data from various cards Road Station and Offset KAS Height of Rod is the length of the rod EDM This button can be toggled to shoot in Alignment Cross Section Shot Data various EDM modes The options available aa depend on the total station being used Consult the total station s documentation for Template Ti Segment Roadbed more information on the EDM modes that it Elev 96 500 supports Offset Dist 7 069 Right of Line Shot takes a shot to the prism lt Back returns to the previous screen Store stores the stake point station O 33 257 Alignment Card Station displays the station at the rod position Template displays the name of the template that is used at the rod position Segment displays the name of the template s segment at the rod position Elev displays the elevation at the rod position Offset Dist displays the perpendicular offset from the centerline to the rod position Right of Line Left of Line On Line displays if the rod position is to the right of the centerline left of the centerline or on the centerline respectively R 425 Survey Pro Reference Manual Cross Section Card Station displays the station at the rod Alignment Sross Section Shot Data position Station O 33 257 Template displays the name of the template Template T1 that is used
322. ons road name l E 2 er oa Nan Alignment Description displays the name of Alignment Description Roadway the selected alignment Choose Alignment opens the Choose H Y Alignment screen where an existing alignment NOE Check checks the road for errors and displays the results in the Roads Report screen View Profiles opens the Road Profiles screen where you can see information about the cross sectional profile of the road at any station Set POB opens the Road Alignment Properties screen where information about the current alignment can be changed Roads Report Screen Roads Edit Roads New or Edit Road Check The Roads Report screen displays a list of any errors after performing the following tests e Confirm that the alignment contains both a HAL and a VAL e Confirm that the horizontal length of the VAL is greater than or equal to the HAL e Confirm there is at least one template for each side of the road R 405 Survey Pro Reference Manual R 406 Confirm the first template coincides with the starting station Confirm that all template segments have a name The names do not have to be unique Confirm that the same number of segments exist on each side of the alignment Confirm that each widening start station is less than the corresponding widening s end station Confirm that one widening does not overlap with another widening
323. ontal distance of each leg in any given setup differs by more than this value M BS FS Sight Length lt Per Loop When checked the sum of the horizontal distances measured to all the backsight shots are compared to the sum of the horizontal distances to all the foresight shots If the difference exceeds this value a warning will occur M Max Sight Lengths When checked a warning will occur whenever the horizontal distance measured to any point exceeds this value M Min Ground Clearance When checked a warning will occur if a shot is taken at a location on the rod that is within this distance to the ground M Max Loop Misclosure When checked the error computed after a level loop is closed will be surrounded with exclamation points in the Close Loop screen and Level Notes screen if the error exceeds this value M Upper Lower Wire Reading lt When checked a warning will occur if the difference between the upper stadia and crosshair exceeds the difference between the crosshair and lower stadia by this value This only applies to the Three Wire level method Load FGCS Defaults Opens the FGCS Defaults screen described below where the default tolerances for a specified level loop order and class can be loaded R 51 Survey Pro Reference Manual FGCS Defaults Load FGCS Defaults The FGCS Defaults screen is used to load the default FGCS tolerances in the Level Settings screen for the order and class of level loop specifie
324. oot the backsight for Set 1 If the box showed F3 it would mean to shoot the foresight for Set 3 and so on Take Shot takes the shot indicated within the box on this screen R 262 Shot Results Backsight Point 1 Level Menu Leveling Shot Results The Shot Results screen opens when you are finished taking the shot necessary shots for a particular observation Toss will delete the shot data from the corresponding set of shots that has the worst Average Worst Residual residual Each consecutive tap of this button YW Dist 2 0006 H Dist 200 00063 0 0 Toss will delete the next shot with the worst residual until all the sets are eventually Resulting HI 102 000 deleted Foresight Point TPL Description v Dist 2 00003 H Dist 200 00063 Resulting FS Elev 100 000 ift BS allows you to shoot additional shots to ae the backsight You will be prompted to shoot the number of sets specified in the Level i Settings screen Store Observation FS allows you to shoot additional shots to the foresight You will be prompted to shoot the number of sets specified in the Level Settings screen All allows you to shoot additional shots to the backsight and foresight You will be prompted to shoot the number of sets in the shooting sequence specified in the Level Settings screen Store Observation records the observation and returns you to the Level screen where you can specify which t
325. or the Serial Port accesses the Bluetooth configuration screen that comes with the Bluetooth driver software where you can quickly check or change the virtual COM port and favorites See the User s Manual for more information on configuring Bluetooth Baud Rate is the speed that communication takes place This must match the baud rate set in the GPS receiver Parity This must match the parity set in the GPS receiver usually None Use 3D GeoLock When checked the GPS elevation will also be used to compute your location and adjust the vertical angle of the total station accordingly GPS is generally less precise vertically than horizontally so unless you are using GeoLock while in very steep terrain this item should remain unchecked R 170 Survey Menu GPS The Survey Menu while running in GPS mode with the GPS module contains the routines used for RTK data collection and post processing data collection The menu items are the same regardless of the type of data collection However some functions such as Control Points and Remote Elevation will only allow you to start when connected to an RTK receiver Other functions such as Post Processing will only allow you to start when connected to a post processing receiver Finally the Data Collection function will behave differently based on the receiver type that is active GPS Status Start GPS Survey Data Collection Control Points Post Processing Base Setup Rove
326. order Height of Rod is the length of the rod Next Point gt Advances the Design Point by the Increment and automatically solves to open the Stake List of Points screen where you can begin staking the point The points are advanced in the same order that they were defined when the polyline was created or when the point range was defined Backsight opens the Backsight Setup screen Page R 118 R 280 Stakeout Menu Solve gt opens the next Stake List of Points screen where the current Design Point can be staked Note The screens available after tapping or Next Point gt are identical to Screens Two and Three in the Stake Points routine and are described on pages R 275 through R 276 Edit Point List Stakeout Stake List of Points or Stakeout Stake List of Points Edit List The Edit Point List screen is used to modify the existing point list Remove removes the selected point from the point list Clear All removes all the points from the point list To Closest is available only when the screen is accessed with the Change button This will automatically select the point in the point list that is nearest to the previously staked point which is the selected point when the screen if first accessed lt Insert lt Append will insert the point specified in the corresponding field above the point selected in the point list When lt End gt is selected the poin
327. ored after tapping the button that are Snap Shot equal in size to the live video image Full os 24er 1536 Full results in full size digital photos being stored after tapping the button The desired size can be selected from the Size field The Compression setting determines the image quality where less compression will provide more detail but with a larger file size Still Picture compression Mone Map Card Remote Control om The Map card displays a live map showing the Battery 50 Locked Link Good total station position relative to the current Results Map aim Foresight foresight and backsight EDM Mode IF Tracking a R 167 Survey Pro Reference Manual Aim Card The Aim card is used to precisely aim the instrument Tapping around the total station graphic will turn the instrument to the location corresponding to the horizontal and vertical scale bars Remote Control Battery 2 Standby Link Good E Results Map Aim Foresight k By Distance toggles between turning by angles or by distances respectively stog The scales in the scale bars will also switch between angles or distances The scales in the scale bars are calculated using the last distance that was measured EDM Mode Track 10 mm 7 Foresight Card The Foresight card is available only if the Remote Control backsight is solved It displays live coordinates P tterr 50 Locked Link Good
328. ot button 3 When the target becomes properly aligned with the crosshairs record the current time as accurately as possible The time can R 160 Survey Menu Conventional Mode be automatically read from the data collector using the Get Local Time button or measured from an external time piece and manually entered in the appropriate fields 4 When finished tap the amp button to complete the current observation When all observations are complete the Results page displays the computed azimuth to the backsight Results BS D R is the horizontal angle recorded to the backsight for the particular direct reverse observation Azi D R is the computed azimuth to the backsight for the particular direct reverse observation Avg is the computed average azimuth of the backsight relative to true north Grid Avg is the computed average azimuth of the backsight relative to the local State Plane grid This field is only displayed when a state erid correction is applied Note See the User s Manual for more information on the usage of the Solar Observation routine R 161 Survey Pro Reference Manual Remote Control Remote control mode is a special mode that makes it easier for users to control fully robotic total stations from a remote data collector Note The remote control functions are available only after a supported robotic total station is selected and enabled in the Instrument Settings screen
329. ote control mode Auto Collect is is a shortcut to the Surveying Settings screen Page R 45 OCC 1 HI 5 50 BS 410 0 00 00 a ose fd Description 55s O He 7 00 it E Foresight is the point name that will be used when storing the first new point Each successive point name will automatically be Collect by incremented by the next available point number W Time Every Sec ipetances Evers Monat Description is the description that will be assigned to all the points that are stored from this routine Time when this radio button is selected a point will automatically be stored after each time specified in the corresponding field passes Distance when this radio button is selected a point will automatically be stored each time the prism is moved from the last stored point by the horizontal distance specified in the corresponding field Note The accuracy that a point will be stored when auto collecting by Distance will vary depending on how frequently the total station measures a distance and how fast the prism is traveling Backsight opens the Backsight Setup screen Page R 118 R 137 Survey Pro Reference Manual Next gt opens the next screen Auto Collect Screen Two The second Auto Collect screen displays information related to the points that have been stored and when the next point will be stored The box in the upper left corner displays the Auto Collect p dir
330. ou agree to exercise reasonable efforts to protect LICENSOR S proprietary interest in the Program and Documentation and maintain them in strict confidence USER RESTRICTIONS You may physically transfer some Programs from one computer to another provided that the Program is operated only on one computer Other Programs will operate only with the computer that has the same security code and cannot be physically transferred to another computer You may not electronically transfer the Program or operate it in a time sharing or service bureau operation You agree not to translate modify adapt disassemble de compile or reverse engineer the Program or create derivative works based on the Program or Documentation or any portions thereof TRANSFER The Program is provided for use in your internal commercial business operations and must remain at all times upon a single computer owned or leased by you You may not rent lease sublicense sell assign pledge transfer or otherwise dispose of the Program or Documentation on a temporary or permanent basis without the prior written consent of LICENSOR TERMINATION This License is effective until terminated This License will terminate automatically without notice from LICENSOR if you fail to comply with any provision of this License Upon termination you must cease all use of the Program and Documentation and return them and any copies thereof to LICENSOR GENERAL This License shall be governed by and co
331. out by approximately 25 gt p expands a list where you can select to zoom to a window zoom up vertically or zoom down vertically Stations allows you to scroll through and view all the stations in the LandXML file Surfaces allows you to scroll through and view all the surfaces in the LandXML file Offset allows you to scroll through and view the details of the node at the selected offset Tap amp to exit from this screen R 325 Survey Pro Reference Manual Station Staking Screen Two The second Station Staking screen is used to configure which Station Surface and Offset you want to stake Use the corresponding and buttons to SL Staking P ie Station gt gt L 17 485 if scroll the available Station Surface and Offset that you want to stake Height of Rod is the rod height Backsight opens the Backsight Setup screen Page R 118 where you can set your backsight lt Back returns to the previous screen OCC 1 HL 550 BS o oou0 Solve gt opens the next Station Staking screen Station Staking Screen Three The third Station Staking screen shows the direction and distance information from the instrument to the selected stake point The Station Surface and Offset information is Station Staking D q x displayed at the top of the screen Station 1 96 850 Surface OG Offset Left 17 485 ift From Gun to Design Point Angle Right 234 O4 41 Horz Dis
332. ove your base to another existing job point and then starts the Start GPS Survey wizard described on Page R 246 Occupy then Traverse gt Opens the Occupy Data Points screen Page R 194 and allows you to first occupy a new point and then move the base to that point before starting the Start GPS Survey wizard described on Page R 246 Occupy then Traverse Occupy and collect a point with the rover then move the base receiver to just collected point Control Points Control Points or Data Collection The Control Points screen is used to measure GPS control points to use in the localization adjustment or to check the location of exiting points against GPS measurements and the latest coordinate system This screen is described on Page R 195 R 254 Survey Menu Basic GPS Module Check Control Point Screen Check Point or Data Collection Check Point The Check Control Point screen is used to check a control point This is done when you want to verify the quality of the coordinate system solution and is described on Page R 196 Occupy Control Point Screen Control or Data Collection The Occupy Control Point screen is used to add geodetic coordinates to a known project point The most common use of this screen is to measure control points for the localization solution and is described on Page R 197 Post Processing Post processing data collection involves two steps First you must open a file and begin loggi
333. pens the New Level Loop screen described next where a new loop can be created New Level Loop The New Level Loop screen is used to createa PEMET Loop new level loop New Loop is where you enter a name for the 5 Loop Mame new loop Starting Control Benchmark CBM point CBM is the starting benchmark This point a Starting CBM ly must exist in the current job Next gt opens the next screen R 258 Level Menu New Level Loop Screen Two New Level Loop Desc is where you can enter an optional New Loop Name loop two description for the new loop lt Back returns to the previous screen Starting CBM Mame 1 Description BOUNDARY Create Loop creates the new loop Elevation 100 0 ift B 5000 0 E 5000 0 Layer Points Feature lt None gt Level Notes or Select Create Loop View Level Notes for Selected Loop base loop p The apnoea janie shows the s a every shot taken for the current loop e loop was closed additional closure details are 1 5 060 105 060 TF1 4 690 104 730 5 020 also provided TR2 2 080 103 090 4 720 7 E The appearance of this screen can be cum 14 930 14 990 customized by tapping the button to open the arithmetic Check 100 000 14 890 14 820 Level Notes Settings screen described below Closure Point s Observe Allowable Loop M 0 008 ift Current Loop Mis 0 010 ift R 259 Survey Pro Reference Manual Level Note
334. play your local time a i i i a 02 2005 12 07 46 cca or UTC to display Coordinated Universal Time 4 pat Set Time MM Dorey HH eal EE BUT Correction Set Date will set the system date with the date that is entered Set Time will set the system time with the time entered DUT Correction is the polar wandering correction factor in seconds used to convert UTC to UT1 UT1 UTC DUT Synchronize when pressed will zero the fractional portion of the current time and advance to the nearest second so that the time can be set more accurately Note The date time and UTC are computed using Pocket PC s Date Time properties R 54 Settings Job Menu Buttons Settings This screen is available on the Ranger 300X 500X only The Buttons Settings card is used to customize the function for the physical buttons located on the data collector The upper half of the screen lists all of the customizable button s current assignments A DateTime Buttons __ l _ General gt _ particular button must be selected from this Button Assignment Global list prior to changing its settings from the F arrow Remote Control Tasks lower half of the screen cee LeftApp Quick Pick Calendar Right App Take Shot Contacts Assignment Within Survey Pro is where you Assignment Within Survey Pro it is used within Survey Pro The function of Opi a gomen the button will switch back to its global assignme
335. plays if a Cut or Fill slope is being computed and if it is on the Left or Right side of the road respectively Rod Elev is the current elevation at the rod location Des Slope is the design cut or fill slope Obs Slope is the computed observed cut or fill slope based on the last shot and the corresponding hinge point Cut Fill is the cut or fill required for the current rod location to be positioned on the design slope Toward CL Away CL is the computed horizontal distance that the rod must move either toward the centerline or away from it respectively before it is positioned at the catch point Note The computed horizontal distance is based on the observed terrain computed from the last two shots If only one shot has been taken it is assumed that the terrain is level when computing this value On Station Back Sta Ahead Sta informs you if the rod is on the station being staked or the distance it must move parallel to the centerline back or ahead to be on the correct station HD to HP is the horizontal distance from the rod to the hinge point VD to HP is the vertical distance from the rod to the hinge point HD to CL is the horizontal distance from the rod to the centerline VD to CL is the vertical distance from the rod to the centerline Topo SS will store the last shot taken as a side shot R 296 Stakeout Menu lt Back returns to the previous screen Store gt opens the next scr
336. plays the location of the receiver 70317 W Heading displays your course over ground if you are moving If your coordinate display is wiGsS84 LLA geodetic this heading is with respect to Local LLH geodetic north If your coordinate display is Grid erid then this heading is with respect to grid north Speed displays your horizontal speed over ground if you are moving WGS84 is where you set the position display to show WGS84 latitude longitude and height This option is always available Local LLh is where you set the position display to show Local latitude longitude and height This option is only available when you have a coordinate system selected and solved Note Local LLh numbers make sense when in mapping plane mode When using Ground TDS Localization mode you should not use Local LLh display Grid is where you set the position display to show Grid north east and elevation This option is only available when you have a coordinate system selected and solved R 177 Survey Pro Reference Manual Start GPS Survey The Start GPS Survey wizard is used to complete the setup necessary for any RTK GPS Survey The Start GPS Survey wizard is opened from the main menu or any time you try to access data collection or stake out functions The steps to complete the Start GPS Survey wizard will depend on what you have already done in the job Each possible screen is shown below Choose One Point Set
337. point name already exists the mia Exists Point Exists screen will open where you select ibe o pied se ei psig how to handle the new point TEN er Store New Point Overwrite Existing will overwrite the existing Existing 389 point with the new coordinates Next 92 Use Next Available will store the coordinates enn rr een ee eee using the next available point name Store Additional Observation will write an observation record to the raw data file with the new coordinate values without changing the existing point in the job file This button is not available when shooting an existing traverse shot R 128 Survey Menu Conventional Mode Remote Shot Remote Mode Traverse Sideshot or Side Shot When running in remote mode tapping the raversel or Side Shot button from the Traverse Sideshot screen will open the Remote Shot screen shown here The Remote Shot screen is identical to the aiuis H aby ote Remote Control screen Page R 162 except it Te has an additional button that allows you to aoe 3 trigger the total station to take a shot m 239 19 49 Take Shot After the total station is properly za 86 23 33 aiming toward the prism this will trigger the E eli total station to take a shot If you are ais performing a side shot you will remain in the Remote Shot screen once the shot is completed He 6 00 ift B lv HI 5 50 Take Shot If you are performing a trave
338. points By Angle Scan Settings p oaa7e 1 EZA 1046s By Distance HD VD specifies the horizontal By Points in Total 1000 and vertical distances between points that are measured within a scan frame At Distance is the distance from the total station to the surface to be scanned Shoot Tap this to measure a new distance for the At Distance field By Angle HAVA specifies the horizontal and vertical angles the total station will turn to advance to each point within a scan frame By Points in Total is the number of points to shoot within the scan frame O By Time Estimate Recalculate Automatic Image Capture Of Scan Frame By Time Estimate will shoot the number of evenly spaced points within the scan frame to finish approximately in the time entered here Recalculate This will recalculate the remaining value s in any dependent fields after changes are made Automatic I mage Capture of Scan Frame When checked panoramic photographs within the scan frame are automatically taken after a video scan is performed for viewing within RealWorks along with the video scan data R 150 Survey Menu Conventional Mode Shoot From Two Ends The Shoot From 2 Ends screen is used to provide more accurate vertical closure to a traverse The routine requires that a foresight point is shot but it is not stored until after it is occupied and another shot is taken to the previous occupy point The coordinates
339. profile view of the selected template is displayed and an overhead view shows where the selected template occurs on the alignment Add when a template or lt End gt is selected from the L or R columns in the Templates card ene Road __ this button opens the Add Template screen Road Templates Widenings Super Elevations a which allows you to add a new template to the ada e Eat ces same side of the road that was selected O 00 000 71 Mep Edit allows you to edit the selected template in the Edit Template screen which is identical to the Add Template screen Remove removes the selected template from the list E 100 iA Check checks the road for errors and displays the results in the Roads Report screen described above R 408 Roads Menu Add Edit Template Screen Roads Edit Roads New or Edit Templates Add or Edit The Add Edit Template screen allows you to add a template to the road or edit an existing template a Template The Template column lists all the 2 0 8 oo templates that can be added to the road Selecting a template will display an image of that template in the lower corner of the screen Once the first template is added this box will only list templates with the same number of segments as the first Start Sta is the location of the template on the alignment Mirror to Right Check opens the Roads Report scr
340. ption new offset point Point will be stored at an offset along the A qun target line Tape Out Tape In is the specified offset from Tape Out Tape In 3 the stake point A positive value will result in a new point that is further away from the total station The default value is the appropriate distance correction to the design point stores the new offset point R 309 Survey Pro Reference Manual Stake Spiral and Offset Spiral and Offset The Stake Spiral and Offset screen allows you to stake stations at fixed intervals on a spiral curve or at an offset to it Start Point is the point associated with the beginning of the spiral curve This can either be the TS or the CS which is specified later in this screen see below Tangent Azm Tangent Bearing defines the tangent azimuth or bearing at the entrance to the spiral Radius Degree Arc Degree Chord defines the radius degree arc or degree chord of the curve respectively Length is the length of the spiral curve Stake Spiral Offset P wf x Define a Spiral Tangent Azm 90 0000 Radius 200 0 ift lv Length 400 0 ift lv Begin Station o 00 0 lv Turn Left E Right Dir W W T5 to SC CS to ST Begin Station is the station associated with the Start Point Turn defines if the curve turns toward the Left or Right from the point of view of the Start Point Spiral defines the direction of the
341. r Setup Projection Remote Elevation Import GPS Control Receiver Info Adjust with Projection Projection Calculator ae aa ee a File Management R 171 Survey Pro Reference Manual GPS Status The GPS Status screen contains several index card format screens providing real time status of the active receiver Receiver The Receiver card displays information about the receiver mode and GPS solution quality Mode displays if the receiver is set to Off GPS Status Base Rover or Post Processing mode _ Position Receiver Cell Moder Satellites Used OO Locked OO Receiver Mode Off Memory displays the amount of memory remaining in the receiver s internal storage card Memory O KB Battery gii Position Quality Solution Autono mous H Precision 0 000 HOOP 0 00 Y Precision 0 000 YDOF 0 00 POOP 0 00 Battery displays the remaining battery charge in the receiver Satellites displays the number of satellites e Used by the receiver for the current GPS solution e Locked Tracked by the receiver Reset Ambiguities is used to reinitialize the receiver s RTK engine Solution displays the type and quality of solution It will be one of the following values e No Communication we are not receiving a response to commands e No Data we are receiving an unknown or a bad response to commands e No RTK Solution we are receiving a response but the
342. r enough apart to run the automatic blunder detection then you will see a yellow arrow and the status line will indicate the poor geometry of the control points or if the localization fails to solve you will see a yellow arrow and the status the status line will indicate the failure to solve the localization Finish will solve the localization If any of the horizontal or vertical control toggles are changed in this screen before tapping Finish the button will change to Resolvel allowing you to re compute the quality before continuing Occupy Additional Check Point opens the Occupy Control screen Page R 255 which allows you to collect another control point and add it to the localization solution R 252 Survey Menu Basic GPS Module Data Collection F EEATT The Data Collection screen is used to collect Dor OAE tD i GPS measurements and store new points in the a job Sea M GPS Status at top of screen displays the Description current solution type the data modem TEA reception quality the number of satellites used and the horizontal precision computed by the TEUN receiver When this area is tapped the GPS l Status screen will open Page R 172 Point is where you enter the point name for the next point to be stored Desc is where you enter the description for the next point to be stored Set HR displays the current antenna measurement and measure to setting You can
343. r in Survey Pro and this receiver was used as the rover Measured is where you enter the height of the antenna measured to the location specified on the Receiver Antenna screen Page R 184 Offset displays the vertical and or slant offset values for the selected antenna Entering antenna offsets is explained on the Receiver Antenna screen Page R 184 Setup HR opens the Receiver Antenna screen Page R 184 Set Rover sets the receiver as an RTK rover If there is a Recording Interval set on the Job Settings Post Process page a file will be opened and logging of raw GPS measurements for post processing will start This will be a stop and go data file and the site ID and antenna measurement will be recorded in the file with each point occupation at the rover The rover receiver will monitor the data link until the base reference position arrives then Survey Pro will check the point database for a matching point If you are using a remote base Survey Pro will find a R 188 Survey Menu GPS Module matching point or prompt you to store a new point If you are using the base station you have already set with this data collector then this check serves as error detection Solve Localization The Solve Localization screen is used to indicate when a horizontal and vertical localization adjustment is required and to guide you through the steps to collect control points and solve the adjustment Collect Control gt ope
344. r the traverse was recorded then side shots cannot be adjusted Distance units Angle units Earth curvature adjustment Scale factor Next gt opens the next screen of the adjustment wizard R 435 Survey Pro Reference Manual Traverse Adjust Angle Adjustment If an angle adjustment is being performed this screen will appear next Traverse Adjust Angle Adjust Enter the observed closing angle of the traverse Closing Angle 268 1548 lv Closing Angle is the closing angle for the traverse which must be represented as an angle right See 3 illustration Next gt opens the next screen of the adjustment wizard Closing Angle R 436 Adjust Menu Traverse Adjust Compass Rule If a compass rule adjustment is being performed this screen will appear next Closed Traverse select this option if you are Traverse Adjust adjusting a closed traverse Compass Rule 2 Closed Traverse Close to Known Location select this option if i S l Close to Known Location you are adjusting an open traverse and closing to a known point or location Location Note if a closing location is not specified it is automatically assumed that the first point of the traverse will be the closing location reon Pom fs TI Location allows you to enter coordinates to define the closing location o North is the Y coordinate for the closing location o East is the X coordinate for th
345. raverse on curve R 388 traverse on spiral R 397 traverse shot nce dts keke 62 triangle solutions R 366 bid A Gener ES AEE E 229 GUT Oenes a R 163 tutorial jobs 008 279 existing job eec 281 mapping plane 288 one point localization 280 reuse localization 286 two peg test 06 R 268 U units Settings R 41 V VA is ossoh ioucsiesicest annie 48 R 70 vertical angle offset124 R 136 vertical curve R 390 See parabolic curve vertical curve layout R 392 vertical datums 198 international 198 NAVD SS tetni 199 NGVD29 sic satis 198 video card ccecc eee ee R 165 video display options R 166 video Scan R 147 Settings oe oeoeenseeeeee R 150 video settings R 167 view DTM 068 R 80 view raw data 05 R 79 Ld bcs Ronee Erte ENA Oe eT eee 299 W WGS84 1996 0 195 where is next point R 330 R 347 WICENINGS 0ecce sees R 410 Index Windows Networking294 299 WW15mGH erd 208 Z zone constant 128 A 1 1 9
346. reasingly differ from the corresponding design elevations on the spiral curve as the Offset value increases Height of rod is the length of the rod Backsight opens the Backsight Setup screen Page R 118 lt Back returns to the previous screen Solve gt opens the third screen described next R 311 Survey Pro Reference Manual Note A motorized total station will automatically turn toward the design point after pressing depending on the configuration of the Stakeout Settings screen Page R 47 Stake Spiral and Offset Screen Three Station displays the current station that is Stake Spiral Offset gum station O 00 000 being staked H Offset 15 000 R v Offset H Offset displays the offset distance of the From Gun to Design Point spiral curve being staked from the specified Angle Right 180 00 00 spiral curve and if it is on the Right or Left side Horz Dist 5 000 of the specified spiral curve YertDist 1 500 Angle Right is the horizontal angle that the a eee oue total station must aim toward so that it is OCC 1 HE 5 50 BS o od oo facing the current station Horz Dist is the horizontal distance from the occupy point to the current station Vert Dist is the vertical distance from the occupy point to the current station ZE to Rod is the zenith angle that the total station must aim toward so that it is facing the current station Circle Zero is used to modify
347. reen is used to set or create an ellipse for a new datum This screen is only displayed when Datum Type is Molodensky or Similarity Choose an ellipse for the new zone Key In Zone Ellipse from Data Base Choose this option to use the selected data base ellipsoid Ellipse From Datab Key In Ellipse SUE Nee rom Database key in Ellose Key in Ellipse Choose this option to enter the Ellipsoid values for the custom ellipsoid Values Values is where you enter the values for the Ellipsoid a custom ellipse if you are not using Ellipse from Other Parameter Reciprocal Flattening 7 List Ellipse a is where you enter the semi major axis of the new ellipsoid Other Parameter is where you select the other ellipse parameter to enter You can use one of Semi minor axis Flattening Reciprocal flattening First eccentricity First eccentricity squared Second eccentricity Second eccentricity squared R 223 Survey Pro Reference Manual Key In Zone Datum Translation The Key In Zone Datum Translation screen is used to enter translations when the Datum Type is Molodensky or Similarity Datum Translate From WGS84 To Local is where you enter the three translations from WGS84 to the local datum Key In Zone Datum Translate WiGS84 To Local Note The sign convention for the datum i translations is from WGS84 to the local datum Translate Y oom If your datum transformation is defined for 0 m local to WGS84 be sur
348. return to Survey Pro Survey Pro You can also temporarily deactivate the touch The screen is disabled screen using either of the following methods Press Esc to return to Survey Pro e Use the Suspend Screen quick pick Press ESC to reactivate e Ranger 300X 500X only Press Fn Repeat to reactivate R 453 Appendix A Transverse Mercator Zones Central Meridians for State Plane Coordinates E East W West C Central Zone Central State Zone Central Meridian Meridian Hawaii w om wn be Illinois 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 E C W Indiana Delaware Maine Florida Michigan Georgia 1934 sam ga sh sh gow Reference Manual Zone Central State Zone Central Meridian Meridian Mississippi New Mexico Missouri E C W New York E C W Nevada Vermont E W E C W E C W Wyoming New Hampshire New Jersey Lambert Zones Central Meridian and Zone Constants for State Plane Coordinates N North NC North Central I Island S South SC South Central O Offshore C Central M Mainland Appendix A State Zone Central Zone Meridian Constant 92 00 0 559691 California 0 653884 0 630468 0 612232 0 596587 0 570012 0 549518 0 561243 Colorado 105 30 0 646133 105 30 0 630690 105 30 0 613378 Connecticut 7245 0 663059 Florida 84 30 0 502526 93 30 0 658701 98 30 0 614528 85 45 0 606462 Louisiana 92 30 0 528701 91 20 0 500013 91 20
349. rget Segment 1 Right offset stake ones Beane Station 0 25 000 3 returns you to the second Stake Road screen where the Design point is advanced by the Design Elevation 100 600 t val Staked Elevation 103 510 Lett 4 Ditch Cut 3 210 Lett 3 Sidewalk Cut 2 410 Lett 2 Curb R 420 Roads Menu Road Slope Staking The Road Slope Staking screen is used to locate the catch point of the road at any station Road Slope Staking To r G Tap Road opens the Tap on a Road screen where you can tap on any road in the job to esis a u M Name displays the name of the selected road Mame Example i i N Begin Station 0 00 000 Begin Station displays the station assigned to oe ere the beginning of the road _ Use Station Equation End Station displays the final station in the road OCC 1 HI 5 000 BS 0 00 00 Use Station Equation When checked the current station equation will be applied to the road Equation Settings opens the Station Equation screen Page R 427 where a station equation can be configured Backsight opens the Backsight Setup screen Page R 118 Next gt takes you to the next Road Slope Staking screen where the slope staking parameters are set up R 421 Survey Pro Reference Manual Road Slope Staking Screen Two The second Road Slope Staking screen is used amchae Pir x to set up some slope stake parameters prior to p p p p Station to Stake o 00 0
350. right shows the vertical Cross Section Group OG view Set Center Line allows you to select any eae p polyline or alignment in the current job to use bande as acenterline This will replace any Begin Station 1400 0 centerline loaded from the LandXML file aan M OCC 1 HI 5 50 BS 0 00 00 View Cross Sections opens the Cross Section View screen described below where you can view the station surface and offset details of the loaded LandXML file Load From LandXML opens the Open screen Page R 13 where you can select which LandXML file to load Backsight opens the Backsight Setup screen Page R 118 where you can set your backsight Next gt opens the next Station Staking screen R 324 Stakeout Menu Cross Section View The Cross Section View screen is used to view the station surface and offset details of the loaded LandXML file Cross Gaction Viewer ETJ r The upper portion of the screen lists the Setar Station Northing Easting and Elevation at the 0 65 617 selected node Northing The larger graphic area displays the cross eed sectional view of the selected surface The EER smaller graphic area displays the horizontal i 379 747 view of the centerline ba Zoom Extents will zoom so the entire cross section will fit inside the frame B Zoom In Button will zoom the current screen in by approximately 25 Zoom Out Button will zoom the current screen
351. ring is the direction of the tangent at the beginning of the curve Turn specifies if the curve turns to the Left or Right as you face the curve from the PC R 388 7 dew gt snsex T Curve Menu M Store PT When checked will store the computed PT point with the specified point name M Store RP When checked the computed radius point will be stored with the name specified here Solve will compute and store the PT and if desired the radius point Results Radius is the distance from the radius point to the curve Length is the arc length Chord is the chord length Delta is the deflection angle Tangent is the distance from the PC or PT to the PI Mid Ord is the distance between the curve and the chord at the center of the curve s length External is the minimum distance between the PI and the curve Deg Arc is the deflection angle that results in a 100 ft arc length Deg Chord is the deflection angle that results in a 100 ft chord length Segment is the area between the arc length and the chord Sector is the area between the arc length and the two edge radii Fillet is the area between the arc length and the tangents R 389 Survey Pro Reference Manual Parabolic Curve The Parabolic Curve screen provides detailed information on a vertical parabolic curve when certain parts of the curve are known Known The PVC or PVI radio button is Parabolic Curve selected to
352. rline Hinging at the center results in the elevation of the outer segments to change Hinging at the edge results in the elevation of the centerline changing Because of this Survey Pro will only allow you to hinge on edge for one side of a road If the other side is also super elevated you will be forced to hinge that side at the center so that an abrupt change in elevation does not occur at the centerline Add when a super elevation or lt End gt is selected from the L or R columns in the Super Elevations card this button opens the Add Super Elevation screen which allows you to add a super elevation to the same side of the road that was selected Widenings and super elevations are always sorted in this list by their specified start stations Edit allows you to edit the selected super elevation in the Edit Super Elevation screen which is identical to the Add Super Elevation screen Edit Road Road Templates Widenings Super Elevations ea Lae ere Remove removes the selected super elevation from the list Check checks the road for errors and displays the results in the Roads Report screen described on Page R 405 R 412 Roads Menu Add Edit Super Elevation Screen Roads Edit Roads New or Edit Super Elevations Add or Edit The Add Edit Super Elevation screen allows you to add a super elevation to the road or edit an existing super elevation iaeae
353. rom that oo R menu item that can be included in the Quick aa Aen Pick list Routines listed in bold are already in l Calculator the Quick Pick list Horz Angle Of o aa Yert Angle Of Sule aa z Add gt will add the routine selected in the Auto Collect ees Corner amp 2 Line Point to Point left column to the bottom of the Quick Pick list Ezere Level Bubble which can then be moved elsewhere in the list Corner amp Offset Manage Layers aj m fe Distance Offse Defaults will revert the Quick Pick list back to the defaults A prompt will first ask you if you are sure before the changes occur Quick Picks is the list of routines available from the current Quick Pick list Move Up will move the routine selected in the right column up one level toward the top of the list lt Remove will remove the selected routine from the current Quick Pick list Move Down will move the routine selected in the right column down one level toward the bottom of the list R 442 Miscellaneous Screens Point List Editor Tap from a variety of screens Select Point s amp The Select Point s screen is used to define a simple list of points or a list of points that define a line that can include curves depending on where the screen is accessed from Point Range Eanes Examples of how to enter different lists of ntry Result f 7 Point 7 points are displayed in the lower portion o
354. rrent job All existing layers are displayed along with which layers are visible and how many objects are on each layer 7 I Set Active will set the selected layer as the det tel il active layer The active layer is marked with a fiver vee ches Garg 0 Yes 1 CONTROL New opens the New Layer dialog box where T a new layer can be added You are prompted for a name and if the new layer should be visible Edit opens the Edit Layer dialog box where the selected layer can be edited The layer name and visibility can be changed Delete will delete the selected layer Points Note Only layers that contain no objects can be deleted Layer 0 is required and cannot be deleted or renamed Tip To move several points from one layer to another select the desired points in the Edit Points screen Page R 57 and tap Edit Select the layer you want to move them to and tap R 87 Survey Pro Reference Manual Job Information The Job Information screen displays details of the current job and allows you to remove Filename DTM job wasted space in the current job file Soe een eee i Fold Filename displays the current job file name ina 74 7 KB Created 7 10 2000 9 46 am Control file displays the control filename used points in the current job Feature Code File displays the feature code filename used in the current job Wasted Space O bytes 0 Folder displays the directory wher
355. rse shot you will EDM Mode return to the Traverse Sideshot screen when the shot is completed Aim Opens the Aim screen described on Page R 168 Foresight Displays the computed coordinates for the current foresight R 129 Survey Pro Reference Manual Repetition Shots The Repetition Shots screen is used to perform side shots or traverse shots using any number of repetitions Note The sequence that the repetition shots are performed is selected in the Repetition Settings screen Page R 53 is a shortcut to the Surveying and Repetition Settings screens Page R 45 and R WESSE P 3 53 respectively OCC 1 HI 5 50 BS 410 0 p0 og z ight 411 Foresight is the name of the point that will be Ma hd stored of Sets He 7 00 it e Number of Sets is the desired number of sets _ to shoot to the backsight and foresight e 90 25 55 2 Note One set is equivalent to two shots to the 14 173 2 E TOSS backsight and foresight point HR is the rod height Average worst Residual w opens the Smart Target options Page R 449 Average of shows the average angle or distance to the foresight from all the shots taken The value in parenthesis is the total number of repetitions performed Worst Residual displays the worst residual calculated from all the sets of the selected measurement type Description is the description for the point that is being stored This field appear
356. rting location of the alignment The first horizontal and vertical segment will always begin at this location Start North 1853 7 12 ift Location the starting location for the East horizontal and vertical alignments will be at Elev ly the specified North East and Elev coordinates aan cutsotn fm gt Point the starting location for the horizontal and vertical alignments will be at the specified Point R 70 Edit Alignment Hal vaL POB General Job Menu Start Station is the station on the alignment that corresponds with the starting location or point Edit Alignment Screen General Tab Edit Aligament E The General tab in the Edit Alignment screen is used to describe the alignment and select the layer where it is located HAL vaL Pos General Description is the description of the vet alignment Layer lv Layer is the layer where the alignment will be Feature None gt tocate Attributes opens the Point Feature Attributes screen Page R 61 where the feature attributes for the alignment can be selected Edit Segment The Edit Segment screen is accessed anytime an existing horizontal or vertical segment is added or edited A variety of segment editing screens are possible depending on the type of segment being edited or created Each segment editor is discussed below Edit Segment Line Card Edit Segment EE The Line card is used to
357. rve Spiral Layout Spiral Length is the length along the spiral TEN e curve from TS to SC reon fimo TS station is the station at the TS point M Interval When checked is the spiral arc fee M distance that is added or subtracted from the Interval ly Current Station using the and Current Station M T buttons Current Station is the station on the curve that is computed Solve solves and displays the details for the specified spiral curve Sta decreases the Current Station by the specified Interval Sta increases the Current Station by the specified Interval Layout computes the location of the Current Station Results Station is the current station Deflection is the horizontal angle to the current station as if occupying the TS and backsighting the Spiral PI Long crd is the chord length from the TS to the current station Short crd is the chord length from the previous station to the current station R 396 Curve Menu Traverse on Spiral The Traverse on Spiral screen is used to compute the location of and optionally store the SC or ST and spiral PI points Traverse on Spiral Radius is the radius of the circular curve Radius lv i Length is the length along the spiral curve Length 70 ift TS Point from TS to SC TS CS Point is the existing point associated with the TS or CS point Bearing is the tangent direction at the TS or C
358. rve is defined by one of the following Delta is the deflection angle Length is the arc length Chord is the chord length Tangent is the distance from the PC or PT to the PI Mid Ordinate is the distance between the curve and the chord at the center of the curve s length R 386 Curve Menu e External is the minimum distance between the PI and the curve PC Station is the starting station assigned to the PC M Interval When checked all necessary information for each station at the specified interval on the curve will be computed Start station when not computing by interval above only the information for the particular station entered here is computed Solve will solve and display all the details of the specified curve without the layout information Sta decreases the current station by the station interval Sta increases the current station by the station interval Layout will solve and display the layout information for all the stations of the specified curve Results Radius is the distance from the radius point to the curve Length is the arc length Chord is the chord length Delta is the deflection angle Tangent is the distance from the PC or PT to the PI Mid Ord is the distance between the curve and the chord at the center of the curve s length External is the minimum distance between the PI and the curve Deg Arc is the def
359. s which only export points the LandXML export routine allows you to export points along with polylines and alignments Export polylines and alignments will export the points in the current project as well as any polylines and alignments If this is unchecked only the points will be exported Export Options Export polylines alignments and parcels C Export polylines on the specified layer as Export polylines on the specified layer as parcels parcels will export the polylines on the even selected layer as parcels Polylines on other layers will still be exported only not as parcels Export point description as Export point description as allows you to select to export the point descriptions as LandXML descriptions or codes Import Control Points The Import Control screen is used to manage a k amp epiikelf niolt control file for the current job Import Control Points Control points will be imported Import opens the Open screen Page R 13 into the JOB file and records will where an existing job can be selected as a F a a data file control file The control points will then be er ny ete imported into the current job and stored to the Control points will be referenced from the contral file The points will not be imported into the JOB file CONTROL layer or written to the R data file External Control File External Control File displays the path and file for the current external control file
360. s Settings The Level Notes Settings screen is used to customize what and how the information in the Enue 1 Not Sean hand Columns to Display Level Notes otes screen 18 played Station Point Name M Station Point Name displays the Station Baw column where the name of each point and the _ BS Dist Column Widths number of each turning point shot is listed lt Auto Resize This column cannot be turned off i IS Dist Style M BS is the column that lists all the FSC Compact backsight readings This column cannot be L_ FS Dist Double Spaced turned off Elev _ Desc M BS Dist When checked a column is displayed that lists the horizontal distances measured from the instrument to each backsight M HI is the column that lists the elevations computed for the instrument at each setup This column cannot be turned off M1 S When checked a column is displayed that lists the readings for all intermediate shots Intermediate shots include side shots and stakeout shots which are not included as legs of the level loop M IS Dist When checked a column is displayed that lists the horizontal distances measured from the instrument to each intermediate shot Intermediate shots include side shots and stakeout shots which are not included as legs of the level loop M FS is the column that lists all the foresight readings This column cannot be turned off M FS Dist When checked a column is displaye
361. s feature is only available when using a supported total station with a USB or supported radio connection and only on data collectors running Windows Mobile 5 The Video Scan routine will quickly take several measurements within a predefined area scan frame The data is stored to a tsf Point Cloud file which along with the raw data file can be read by Trimble RealWorks software to digitally model the surface Full 360 3D surfaces can be modeled with RealWorks for areas that are scanned from three different occupy points around the area RealWorks is also able to integrate any photos taken of the area with the scanned data Video Scan Battery 70 gt Link DIRECT ily ne iya ea t 4 k P D A r a roe i aly T tails ie POCA er Gest pts 3 sec est time Define Scan Frame Scanning an 00 467 pts 9 sec left un m Polygon Framing Rectangular Framing This button toggles between two sets of buttons displayed on the left side of the screen When is displayed a scan frame is defined by tapping three or more points on the screen in sequence around the scan frame to create a polygon with three or more sides When is displayed a rectangular scan frame is defined by tapping two diagonal corners R 147 Survey Pro Reference Manual fal Hatching Tool fills an existing scan frame with parallel lines to make it stand out visually Clear Scan Frame Data clears any scan frame data from the screen Scan Fra
362. s no Prompt for Description checkbox as in the Surveying Settings card because you are always prompted for a description when storing a point from a stakeout routine Use Perfect Stationing When checked staking locations will be computed at perfect stationing intervals For example if your starting station was 0 15 and your station interval was 100 your next stakeout location will occur at 1 00 instead of 1 15 Point Tolerance this setting affects the Remote Staking routine Page R 279 When performing Remote Stakeout the final graphic R 48 Job Menu screen that is displayed when you are near the stake point will occur when you are within the distance to the stake point specified here Line Tolerance this setting affects the Stake to Line routine Page R 282 When staking to a line and the prism is located at a perpendicular distance to the specified line that is within the range set here a message will state that you are on the line Horizontal Distance Tolerance This setting affects the GPS staking routines When you are within the specified distance to the location you are staking you are considered on that location Turn gun to design point only applies to motorized total stations The following options are available e 2D HA only A motorized total station will turn horizontally toward the design point after tapping the button in the particular stakeout screen e 3D HA and ZA A motorized total station will tur
363. s only available when your receiver model is 5700 5800 R7 R8 R 103 Survey Pro Reference Manual Settings for Thales Ashtech Receivers reference Z family documentation available at ftp ttp thalesnavigation com Reference 20Manuals Z Xtreme Z family pdf Canopy is where you set a parameter to describe the multi path environment This command is relevant for ROVER mode or RVP Choices are Open Sky default Under Canopy forest urban canyon Confidence Level is where you set the confidence level for ambiguity fixing The values here are the statistical confidence level in percent The higher the confidence level the more certainty that the ambiguities are fixed correctly but the longer it will take to fix them The choices are e 99 0 e 99 9 Settings for Topcon Javad Receivers reference GPS Receiver Interface Language GRIL documentation v 2 3 available at http www topcongps com support manuals html gril Co Op Tracking is where you set the common loops mode of the receiver For more information on common loops mode see http www topcongps com images coop tracking pdf There are two choices e Off e On Multi Path Reduction is where you set to use C A code phase multipath and C A carrier phase multipath reduction This feature is only applicable if your receiver has the _MRP option enabled There are two choices e Off e On Confidence Level is where you set the statis
364. s prior to storing the new point R 130 Survey Menu Conventional Mode Note A residual is the difference between a single measurement and the average of all the measurements Note If a residual exceeds the tolerances set in the Repetition Settings screen Page R 53 that value is displayed in bold text HA ZA SD allows you to replace the current repetition data for the corresponding button with new data Once tapped the repetition data for the tapped button will be deleted You will then need to perform all sets defined in the Number of Sets field again where the new data will replace the corresponding deleted data All will open a screen that asks if you want to add an additional set to those already done or start over Toss will delete the corresponding set that has the worst residual Note A set can only be tossed when three or more sets have been collected Side Shot will use the repetition data gathered to create a new side shot point The foresight point will automatically advance to the next available point Traverse will use the repetition data gathered to create a new traverse point The occupy point will automatically update to the previous foresight point and the backsight point will automatically update to the previous occupy point Backsight opens the Backsight Setup screen Page R 118 where the current backsight can be modified Note The current backsi
365. s the job If the job is configured for meters it is assumed that the distance entered in this screen is in International Feet See Input Shortcuts in the User s Manual for more information on using architectural units Converted AU Conversion decimal In Decimal Unit Rvactonal distance ah numerator Feet component Fractional inch denominator Whole inch component Convert Use will perform the conversion If this screen is accessed from the Quick Pick list when the cursor was in a distance field this button will be labeled and will copy the converted distance to the corresponding distance field R 374 Curve Menu The Curve Menu contains routines that will compute all aspects of a horizontal curve and assist in curve layout Curve Solution PI and Tangents 3 Point Curve Radius Point Tangent to Circle Curve Layout Traverse on Curve Parabolic Curve Parabolic Layout Straight Grade Spiral Spiral Layout SERS POS ROO DP Traverse on Spiral R 375 Survey Pro Reference Manual Curve Solution The Curve Solution screen provides detailed information on a curve when two parts of the curve are known The first known part of the curve is defined by one of the following Curve Solution Radius is the distance from the radius point to the curve e Delta is the deflection angle e Degree Arc is the deflection angle that results in a 100 ft arc length e Degree Chord is the
366. screen based on the information entered and opens the Backsight Solved screen described next R 119 Survey Pro Reference Manual Backsight Solved The Backsight Solved screen is automatically opened after solving the Backsight Setup screen It is used to send or read the instrument s circle optionally confirm the backsight location and optionally store a new point for the backsight location Note The Backsight Solved screen will not open when the Use Classic Backsight Setup checkbox is checked in the Survey Settings screen Page R 45 Set Backsight Circle Once the circle value of the instrument has been set or read the Backsight Solved Set Backsight Circle BS Point 1 Store Backsight Point This button is only BS me jgn symbol will be replaced with a available when the backsight is defined by a direction instead of a point and is used if you want to take a shot and store a point for the epee current backsight Once stored the button will be replaced by the new point name BS Circle This is the horizontal angle to set in the instrument This will usually be zero but when Survey with True Azimuths is enabled in the Surveying Settings screen Page R 45 this will be the computed azimuth to the current backsight Remote when connected to a robotic total station this opens the Remote Control screen Page R 162 to remotely aim the total station This is particularly useful when using a
367. scribed below ly LE Frost roo i Zineva mow f Current Station e PC Deflection provides deflection angles and distances to each station on the curve as if occupying the PC and backsighting the PI The results are given in the following format synsay jii ew Bil Current o Station is the current station on the curve Sistion o Deflection is the angle to turn to the RP current station o Long chord is the distance from the PC to the current station o Short chord is the distance from the previous station to the current station Deflection PC Deflection R 384 RP RP Current Station PC PI Deflection PT Current Station Tangent Offset Curve Menu PI Deflection provides deflection angles and distances to each station on the curve as if occupying the PI and backsight the PC The results are given in the following format o Station is the current station on the curve o Deflection is the angle to turn to the current station o PI to Station is the distance from the PI to the current station Tangent Offset provides perpendicular offset information from the tangent the line from the PC to the PI for each station on the curve The results are given in the following format o Station is the current station on the curve o Tan dist TD is the distance on the tangent from the PC to the PI or the PI to the PT where the perpendi
368. searching Turn To opens the Turn To screen Page R 163 where the total station can be turned to a specified direction or quickly flipped between face one and face two EDM Mode allows you to select from various EDM modes The options available depend on the total station being used Consult the total station s documentation for more information on the EDM modes that it supports Turn To Turn To The Turn To screen is used to turn a robotic eee Tene total station toa specified horizontal and zenith angle or to a specified point Zen Suge Horizontal Angle is the horizontal angle that the total station will turn to Existing Point rd Zenith Angle is the zenith angle that the total station will turn to Turn to Angles turns the total station to the specified horizontal and zenith angles Existing Point is the point from the current job that the total station will turn to Turn to Point turns the total station to the specified point Turn to Backsight turns the total station to the backsight point Flip quickly rotates the total station from face one to face two or vice versa Aim opens a screen where the instrument can be aimed more precisely Page R 168 R 163 Survey Pro Reference Manual 3 The satellite icon in the Command Bar indicates the status of the satellite connection when using GeoLock Tapping this icon will display a pop up list with the following items e
369. snapshot R 29 Survey Pro Reference Manual Backup Restore Restore When restoring the job files from an archive Backup Restore To ow g the archived files will replace the existing files restore of the current job TDS job with archive Backup Warning If you do not want to lose any new data that was collected after the archive being restored was created you should first backup the current job to a new archive before restoring an older archive Warning Files will be overwritten lt Back will return to the previous screen Restore will restore the backed up job from the selected archive The current job is then deleted and replaced by the backup job R 30 File Menu Transfer The Transfer screen allows you to transfer files between the data collector and another device running TDS software Transfer Connecting to specifies which device you are communicating with from the following options Connecting ta Ranger TSCe ACU Pocket PC e HP48 if you are connecting toa Hewlett Packard HP48 calculator Communications Settings COM Port LOM 1 x er oa e Husky if you are connecting to a Husky FS series data collector e Ranger TSCe ACU Pocket PC if you Enter Server Mode are connecting to any of the devices Sadie listed e Windows PC if you are connecting to a personal computer that is running Windows CE Services Parity e Geodimeter 600 if you are connecting t
370. soi ciidlall ls location at the center a line in the 12 o clock MIentatlion ai thet a position indicates the direction to the Reference and an arrow shows the direction to the Next FS Point There is also a text indicator that explains the direction to travel in a clock format HO The second graphic is a map view that shows 1 743 the Current Rod Point the Reference and the Aamu Next FS Point It also shows the Occupy Point if 95 00 00 the backsight has been set s 1 BOUNDARY H The lower left portion of the screen displays the azimuth from the rod to the Next FS Point and the horizontal distance between them lt Back returns you to the first screen Done closes the screen R 331 Stakeout Menu GPS and Basic GPS The Stakeout Menu while running in GPS mode with either the GPS module or Basic GPS module contain the routines used to stake existing points and other known locations Items shown in gray utilize the GPS Staking screen described on the following page and are otherwise identical to the conventional stakeout routines described starting on Page R 273 Stake Points Stake List of Points Stake to Line Offset Staking Slope Staking Line and Offset Curve and Offset Spiral and Offset Show Station Store Offset Points Stake DTM Where is Next Point FOA a7 ft OA ROU aD amp R 333 Survey Pro Reference Manual Stake Points The GPS Staking screen is used to navigate to a design po
371. specifies if the curve turns toward the Add Edit Curve Right or Left as you occupy the initial point and arc Spiral e Curve face the end point z Arc specifies if the arc of the curve is Small less than 180 or Large greater than 180 R 66 Add Edit Curve arc Spiral parabolic Curve 150 if lv 110 71 lv Radius Length 3 T CE west Add Edit Curve Parabolic Curve Grade atEVc Adding a Spiral Curve face the end point Job Menu Tap the tab Curve must be set to Spiral to enter a spiral curve Radius is the radius of the spiral curve The same radius of the circular curve adjacent to the spiral Length is the length of the spiral measured along the curve from the TS to the SC Turn specifies if the spiral curve turns to the Right or Left as you occupy the initial point and Direction specifies if the curve runs from where the tangent intersects with the spiral toward where the spiral intersects with the curve TS gt SC or if the curve runs from where the curve intersects with the spiral toward where the spiral intersects with the tangent CS gt ST Adding a Vertical Curve Tap the tab a Apply Curve AUto Cormpute avce eve BYL 2 338 M Apply Curve must be checked to enter a vertical at curve Grade at EVC BVC is the known grade at either the end of vertical curve or beginning of vertical curve The grade entered
372. spiral curve by the following options e TS to SC the spiral begins at the tangent Tangent to Spiral and ends at the circular curve Spiral to Curve e CS to ST the spiral begins at the circular curve Curve to Spiral and ends at the tangent Spiral to Tangent R 310 Stakeout Menu Stake Spiral and Offset Screen Two Station to Stake is the desired station on the Stake Spiral Offset 25 k spiral curve that you want to stake Seco M Station I nterval is the value that is added to Station Interval the Station to Stake after the Next Station ome Orero IF button is pressed Next Station advances the Station to Stake by rv omet Oo ulocm the Station Interval HR 7 00 ift M Offset is the horizontal distance of the offset a a e REE from the spiral curve The offset occurs on the left while viewing the spiral from the Start Point when the L is selected or on the right when R is selected Note An offset of zero would result in the spiral curve itself being staked gt V Offset will result in the elevations for the design points to be adjusted by the value entered here and will change the cut fill values accordingly Design elevations will be lower when is selected and higher when U is selected Grade specifies a slope from the spiral curve to the curve that is being staked When this is a non zero value the elevation for the staked points will inc
373. splays the current antenna measurement and measure to setting You can Occupy change the antenna measurement by entering a new value in the edit box This new antenna EEE height will be sent to the receiver with your next control or check point collection You can change both the antenna measurement and measure to setting by tapping on Set HR to open the Receiver Antenna screen Page R 184 horizontal precision of the current point If this area is tapped the GPS Status screen will open 5 a a D on in R 195 Survey Pro Reference Manual Projection opens the Projection screen Page R 204 View Points opens the View Coordinates File screen where the project points can be examined Post Process opens the Receiver Session screen Page R 202 where you can occupy a point for a post processing only session This allows you log a session in the post processing file using an existing point name without changing that point record in the job file Check opens the Check Control Point screen where the local coordinate computed from the measurement is compared to the local coordinate s known value Control opens the Occupy Control Point screen where geodetic coordinates are measured at a point with local coordinates and added to that point record in the job file Check Control Point Screen Check Point or Data Collection Check Point The Check Control Point screen is used to check a
374. sts in the source TXT file The coordinates types displayed here can either be for plane coordinates or geodetic coordinates depending on the selections made in the previous screen If a coordinate has a checkbox which is unchecked it is assumed that the source TXT file does not contain columns for that type of coordinate M Specify Missing Elevation Threshold if the source file was created from coordinates with no elevations but the file contains an elevation column with values such as 0 check this box and indicate the value in the field that will appear to the right Preview opens the ASCII Import Preview window containing all the point data that will be imported This is useful to check for errors before actually importing new data lt Back returns to the previous screen Finish imports the new point data into the current project R 19 Survey Pro Reference Manual Import LandXML Coordinates Points alignments polylines and parcels can be imported from a LandXML file The way the LandXML data is imported depends on how the data is stored in the source file and how the settings are configured in the two screens described below Consult the User s Manual for more information on the conditions that affect how the data is imported On specified layer will import all the data on the specified layer Import LandxML File y Please specify layers which the objects will On different layers by groups
375. system for reference Use this function to set the localization coordinate system parallel to a selected mapping plane The calculate rotation function uses the Projection Calculator screen Page R 242 Note Survey Pro versions prior to 3 5 allowed users to calculate rotation using either a known mapping plane or relative to the first base setup This function is now used only to calculate orientation from a known mapping plane Older jobs that had orientation relative to the first base were automatically converted into a localization solution when first opened with Survey Pro versions after 3 5 R 215 Survey Pro Reference Manual Solve Localization Results The Solve Localization Results screen is used to display the results of the horizontal and vertical adjustment and how the adjustment was derived Horizontal Card The Horizontal card shows results of the horizontal localization solution Status displays the status of the current Solve Localization horizontal solution This will be one of the Horizontal vertical following Status Control points solution e Control points solution is displayed Scale 1 000006523 when the parameters were calculated Rotation 1912 33 922 from the selected control points Delta N 94 973 739 m Delta E 95 083 188 m e Current horizontal site is displayed Origin N 102 624 531 m when there is a horizontal solution and Origin E 100 312 573 m Solve H was not selected on this p
376. t Solution Quality displays the quality of the current measurement the solution type the number of satellites used and the horizontal and vertical precision computed by the receiver These values are explained with the GPS Status screen Page R172 R 194 Survey Menu GPS Module Session Time displays the total occupation time so far for this measurement Count Status displays Measuring when you have current coordinates from the receiver and the screen is updating with the latest measurement If you are using Epoch Averaging Averaging is displayed after you tap while the number of epochs is averaged in Survey Pro Suspended is displayed if you are not receiving valid data from the receiver Store prompts you for description layer and attribute depending on your Survey settings for the new point then returns to the previous screen GPS Status opens the GPS Status screen Page R 172 Control Points Control Points or Data Collection The Control Points screen is used to measure GPS control points to use in the localization adjustment or to check the location of exiting points against GPS measurements and the latest coordinate system Control Points GPS Status displays the current solution type radio signal quality number of satellites Fix Radin 99 _Sv 07 HRMS 0 02 used and the receiver s estimate of the Point f M Page R 172 Set HR 2 0 m to Slant measure mark Utilities Set HR di
377. t Shoot New Traverse to re shoot the traverse shot R 126 Survey Menu Conventional Mode New Occupy Point After traversing to a new point the New Occupy Point dialog box will open that informs you of the points that have been updated and computes the azimuth to the new backsight New Occupy Point New Backsight Circle displays the horizontal angle that should be displayed on the total station once it is set up over the New Occupy a Ss aa Point and facing the New Backsight Point This New Backsight Paint S angle is typically zero unless you are surveying New Backsight Circle O 00 0O in true azimuths as set in the Surveying Instrument Height Settings screen Page R 45 Height of Instrument is the new height that The Occupy and Backsight points have changed Setup on the new Occupy point and sight the new Backsight point and press Send Circle to Instrument the total station is above the ground Backsight Setup Send Circle to Instrument can be used once the instrument has been moved to the New Occupy Point and is aiming toward the New Backsight Point The New Backsight Circle angle will then be sent to the total station so its horizontal angle will display this value Backsight Setup opens the Backsight Setup screen Page R 118 where the current backsight can be modified R 127 Survey Pro Reference Manual Point Exists or When performing a traverse or side shot and the foresight
378. t 5 907 74 Circle Zero is used to modify the circle on the a pict 1 273 839 total station so that the angle right reading JE tu Pod 7e6e57 95 will be zero when it is facing toward the design point which can sometimes be easier than OCC 1 Hi 5 50 BS gegg ao turning to an obscure angle value When this button is tapped the following actions will occur From Gun to Design Point lists the direction and distance information used to aim the total station toward the stake point R 326 Stakeout Menu 1 Anew backsight circle value is computed sent to the instrument and stored in the raw data 2 The Angle Right value is changed to zero to reflect the change The instrument now needs to be turned horizontally to zero to face the design point 3 To prevent errors the backsight set up is invalidated when exiting the Stakeout dialog if this button has been used A circle zeroed on a design point is meaningless once the design point has been staked 4 The first time is used during a stakeout session a dialog will appear to warn that the original backsight reference will be lost Note The button is not available when using a robotic total station lt Back returns to the previous screen Stake gt opens the final Station Staking screen used to perform the shots to stakeout the point This is identical to the third Stake Points screen described on Page R 276 R 327 Survey Pro Reference Manual D
379. t Point The Where is Next Point screen is used to assist the rod person in locating another point given the current rod point a reference point and the point to locate Current Rod Pt is the current rod point Where Is Next Point Next FS Point is the point that the rod person wants to locate A Current Bod Pt lv Increment is added to the Next FS Point value WA NextFS Point Px 3 after pressing the Next Point gt button A i i Ee lr negative integer can be entered to have point cara ate numbers advance in descending order Next Point gt advances the Next FS Point A ca value by the specified Increment replaces the current rod point by the previous FS point and opens Screen Two Note If the Next FS Point does not exist and the Increment value 1 pressing the Next Point button will access the next existing point If the Increment is greater than one and the next point does not exist a warning is displayed Reference Point Reference Azm is the reference point azimuth used to determine the direction to the Next FS Point Solve gt computes the direction and distance to the Next FS Point and opens the second screen R 330 Stakeout Menu Where is Next Point Screen Two This screen shows two graphics that indicate the direction and distance that the rod person must travel to reach the Next FS Point The clock style graphic shows the current rod salle
380. t are within 100 meters are then put into the drop down list below Select the RINEX file or NGS data sheet point Allows you to select any valid data sheet point found from the drop down list Details opens a screen that lists the selected OPUS Solution Report or NGS data sheet point details Next gt Opens the final screen Enter Control Coordinate Key In The purpose of this screen is to manually input the control point coordinates This is the Point 1 23 GPS1 second screen that appears when Key In _ Coordinate was selected in the first screen Coordinate Type LocalLLH 7 Point n x displays the name of the selected Latitude fo job point that the control point source will be merged into A counter is included where n is the number of points set so far including the Height one you are working on and x is the number of total points to set in this sequence GPS Import Control Enter a coordinate to create control for Longitude R 232 Point Name GPS1 Mew Location Survey Menu GPS Module Coordinate Type is where you select the type of coordinates being entered Grid Local LLH or WGS84 LLH The selection made here determines the format for the following three fields Latitude North The Latitude Northing of the control point source Longitude East The Longitude Easting of the control point source Height Elevation The Height Elevation of the con
381. t distances Store Offset Points that will be used to compute the offset point 1 2 Road Width L R coordinates X Slope L p 1 2 Road Width is the Left and Right width Stake Curb Ditch of the road respectively from the centerline to Height the edge of payment X Slope is the Left and Right slope of the road respectively from the centerline to the 100 R edge of payment calculated from Run R 316 Stakeout Menu Note A negative slope will result in water running from the centerline toward the edge of payment M Stake Curb Ditch When checked a curb or ditch and an offset can be defined beyond the edge of the pavement Height is the height of the curb or ditch in feet or meters A positive value is considered a curb and a negative value a ditch Offset From Edge of Road is the distance that the curb or ditch extends from the edge of pavement Note The specified curb or ditch height and offset will be applied to both sides of the road lt Back returns to the previous screen Next gt opens the next screen Store Offset Points Screen Three The third Store Offset Points screen is used to define which offset points will be stored From Station is the station where the stored Store Offset Points P w offset points will begin From Station oe i G i To Station is the station where the stored To Station 27 78 508366 27 78 508366 offset points will end Seen
382. t is appended to the end of the list Change to is available only when the screen is accessed with the button This is used to stake the point currently selected in the point list R 281 Survey Pro Reference Manual Stake to Line The Stake to Line screen allows you to locate any location in relation to a predefined line The line can be defined by two points a point and direction a polyline or the centerline of an alignment Distance direction and cut fill information is provided so the rod can locate the line by traveling the shortest possible distance a perpendicular offset to the line Define Line gt Polyline When set to Define IIE 5 shown here a line can be defined by two iaa Aa ok Defi didana a Line points or a point and a direction When set to Polylinel shown below the line is defined by errr z aco Ra an existing polyline or alignment Pointi Eaa Start Point defines the first point of the line rron Es oo to be staked Begin Station Rd gt Point gt Direction defines the second point OCC 1 HI 5 50 BS 0 00 00 on the line or the direction of the line to be staked respectively Begin Station defines the station associated with the Start Point Tap Line displays a map ofall the polylines PFEF D q and alignments in the current job Simply tap Define Select a Line the line that you want to stake to and then tap l Taplin
383. t new base Set Hew Base gt and set it as an ETE base Use remote base station base is already set and Lise R te B gt broadcasting RTK Se Remowe Base Corrections Choose base base already set R 179 Survey Pro Reference Manual Base Point displays the current RTK base point configured in Survey Pro If no base is set this box instructs you to start with one of the other two options Use Current Base gt skips the Base Setup screen and opens the next screen required for survey setup This could be the Rover Setup screen the Start GPS Survey Solve Localization screen or the Data Collection screen Set New Base gt opens the Base Setup screen Use this option when you want to set an RTK base to begin broadcasting corrections and also possibly begin logging GPS raw data for post processing Use Remote Base gt opens the Rover Setup screen Use this option when an RTK base is already set and broadcasting corrections or when connecting to an Ntrip server when using VRS and you will start by connecting to a rover to begin the survey Select Geoid Model The Select Geoid Model screen is used to select Seer a geoid model to use with your coordinate Geoid Model system This screen will open when or Use Remote Base is selected in the previous screen and you have not previously File Name Suibgricl of Geoid99 Conus selected a Geoid Model File Oregon G99 gqf Geoid Model is wh
384. ted the Text TXT File points are exported to a TDS CR5 coordinate O Comma Separated Values CSV File file format 2 LandxML XML File Text TXT File when selected the points are exported to an ASCII text file Comma Separated Values CSV File when selected the points are exported to an ASCII text file that is comma delimited and the file is automatically given a CSV extension LandXML XML File when selected the data is exported to a LandXML file and automatically given an XML extension R 22 File Menu Next gt opens the next screen which is determined by the selected file type Export Screen Two The second Export screen will open for any file type that was selected in the previous screen except LandXML This screen is used to select the points from the current project that you want to export to the selected file type Exporting to a LandXML file is described later To From Opens the Point List screen Page R 443 where a point list can be created Select the Points to Export D points selected Tap Points allows you to select the points to aca export by tapping them from a map view The power button provides additional point selection options which include selecting all control points all non control points and selection by description lt Back returns to the previous screen Next gt opens the next screen which is determined by the selected
385. ted template can be edited Copy opens the Save As dialog box where a copy of the selected template can be saved with a different name Delete deletes the selected template Import opens the Open dialog box where a template can be copied from one folder to the current folder and imported into the job Roadbed R 400 Roads Menu Edit Template Roads Edit Templates Edit or The Edit Template screen is identical to the New Template screen and is used to create a new template or edit an existing one sca Ee PETIA isted in the screen The list shows the name of a i Ta each segment the horizontal and vertical Segments offsets lengths and the slope name rere st vertmt sen A Roadbed 0 400 Sidewalk 0 000 0 000 greater than zero Curb o 500 a Note The length of the first segment must be 0 800 40 000 F Cut Slope is the slope that will be used when locating the catch point in a situation where the existing terrain is above the level of the hinge point Fill Slope is the slope that will be used when locating the catch point in a situation where the existing terrain is below the level of the hinge point Insert opens the Edit Segment screen where a new segment will be added prior to above the segment selected in the Edit Template screen Note To add a segment to the end of all existing segments furthest away from the centerline be sure lt End gt is sel
386. the total station to the stake point falls on in the alignment Vert Dist is the vertical distance from the total station to the stake point ZE to Rod is the zenith angle from the total station to the stake point Circle Zero is used to modify the circle on the total station so that the angle right reading will be zero when it is facing toward the design point which can sometimes be easier than turning to an obscure angle value When this button is tapped the following actions will occur 1 Anew backsight circle value is computed sent to the instrument and stored in the raw data 2 The Angle Right value is changed to zero to reflect the change The instrument now needs to be turned horizontally to zero to face the design point 3 To prevent errors the backsight set up is invalidated when exiting the Stakeout dialog if this button has been used A Circle R 417 Survey Pro Reference Manual zeroed on a design point is meaningless once the design point has been staked Note The button is not available when using a robotic total station lt Back returns to the previous screen Stake gt opens the final Stake Road screen where the shots to the stake point are performed Stake Road Screen Four Height of Rod is the length of the rod Stake Boad Design Elev displays the current design HR 7 00 it E ied eae elevation which can be modified with the Beate ee ange i button Sk FORWA
387. the source file Back returns to the previous screen Import imports the specified data into the current project A results screen will open listing the details of the imported data Confirm Point Replace If a point being imported has the same name and the same coordinates as a point that is already in the current job it is ignored and a message will be displayed after the remaining points are imported to indicate this Confirm Point Replace If an imported point is encountered with the There is an existing point in the job with the same same name but with different coordinates as a name but different coordinates Existing Point 1 point in the current job the Confirm Point Replace screen will open Would you like to replace the existing point with the new one Yes will replace the point in the current job with the point being imported Yes to All will replace the point in the current B R All 41 l l i hd job with the point being imported and perform the same action for any remaining duplicate Compare Coordinates stop Importing y 8 p points No will not import the duplicate point keeping the coordinates for the existing point unchanged No to All will not import the duplicate point keeping the coordinates for the existing point unchanged and perform the same action for any remaining duplicate points Renumber will store the new point in the current job under the
388. the Has Snapshot Yes 1 37 pm View Snapshot file sizes displayed represent the compressed Fies Type f Size files or the amount of space actually being ETOS job Job used by the file s on the data collector TDS RAWW Raw Data View Snapshot will display the snapshot from the selected archive if one was included when the archive was originally created Laas 2 000 if R 28 1159 3207 1 File Menu Backup Restore Backup Backup Restore eee 3 When performing a backup all the files backup associated with the current job are listed and TDS job will be included in the archive to archive Backup1 M Create Snapshot When checked the next KJ Built in Storage Survey Pro Jobs TDS job screen will prompt you to create a snapshot of Built in Storage survey Pro Jobs TDS RAW the current job s map view which will then be included in the archive lt Back returns to the previous screen Warning Archive will be overwritten Create Snapshot Backup opens the next screen Backup Restore Create a Snapshot The Create a Snapshot screen is a map view Create a Snapshot 96 that is used to configure the map as desired BOUNDARY and the resulting image will be saved in the archive as a snapshot along with the job files will create the archive along with a snapshot of the map as it is configured on the OP screen will create the backup archive without a
389. the N S R 334 DE D 3 Stakeout Menu GPS amp Basic GPS Module indicator will stop updating to assist you in more precisely locating the design point as illustrated below Q a Q siesta NOAA T 4m A E e E 20m Rover is greater Rover is between 0 3 Rover is within 0 3 m Rover is within the than 3 m 10 ft and 3 m 1 and 10 ft 1 ft of the design horizontal tolerance from the design from the design point point specified in the point stakeout settings When using the method your reference point or azimuth will always appear at the top of the screen and that is the direction you should be facing while navigating Like with the other navigation method the graphic will change as you get closer to the design point Each graphic is shown below emer kil a 1 20 m Sy 1 20 m Rover is greater Rover is between 0 3 Rover is within 0 3m Rover is within the than 3 m 10 ft and 3 m 1 and 10 ft 1 ft of the design horizontal tolerance from the design from the design point point specified in the point stakeout settings GPS Status displays the current solution type the number of satellites used and the horizontal and vertical precision computed by the receiver When this area of the screen is tapped the epoch count stops and the GPS Status screen opens Page R 172 Go SOUTH NORTH displays the distance the rover must move ina south or north direction to reach the design point Go EAST
390. the desired station on the curve that you want to stake Station I nterval is the value that is added to the Station to Stake after the Next Station button is pressed R 306 Stakeout Menu Stake Curve And Offset fP r E3 Next Station advances the Station to Stake by the Station Interval Station to Stake lv Offset is the horizontal distance of the offset Ste neal from the specified curve The offset occurs on Offset OL R Rd the left while viewing the curve from the PC when the L is selected or on the right when OD u y the R is selected HR 7 00 ift v OCC 1 HE 5 50 BS O 00 00 Note An offset of zero would result in the specified curve being staked gt V Offset will result in the elevations for the design points to be adjusted by the value entered here and will change the cut fill values accordingly Design elevations will be lower when D is selected and higher when U is selected gt Grade specifies a slope from the specified curve to the offset that is being staked When this is a non zero value the elevation for the staked points will increasingly differ from the corresponding design elevations on the specified curve as the Offset value increases Height of Rod is the length of the rod lt Back returns to the previous screen Solve gt opens the third Stake Curve and Offset screen described next Note A motorized total station will automatically t
391. the northing easting and elevation of the current rover location Result shows the computed elevation of the DTM at the current location and the cut or fill necessary to bring the elevation at the current location to the elevation of the DTM at the current location R 346 Data Result amp L station O 6 7 046 Offset Dist 0 569 Offset Right Segment Line Stakeout Menu GPS amp Basic GPS Module C L shows the current station and offset information for the rover location relative to the selected centerline The type of line segment in the polyline at the current station is also displayed This card is only available if the With C L checkbox was checked in the previous screen Note Tapping anywhere within the map view will open a larger map view which provides zoom controls Where is Next Point The instructions for the Where is Next Point routine for GPS are similar to the conventional method except that the Backsight button is replaced with a Setup HRI button to configure rover antenna and the backsight information is replaced with rover antenna height information See Page R 330 for details R 347 Inverse Menu The Inverse Menu contains routines that compute the direction and distance between two objects The following screens are available from the Inverse Menu Inverse Point to Point Inverse Point to Line Inverse Point to Polyline Inverse Point to Multiple Points H F Roye Invers
392. the previous Stake Points screen where the Design point is advanced by the Increment value R 277 Survey Pro Reference Manual Instrument Stakeout Instrument Stakeout is a special stakeout option only available when using a Nikon DTM or NPL series total station while the Send Stakeout Data to Instrument option is checked in the Instrument Settings screen When using Instrument Stakeout a new stakeout screen shown below will appear after you tap from the Stake Points Screen Two described above The stakeout data is then sent to the total station where the controls on the total station are used to stake the point Once you are satisfied with the stake location tap Take Final Shot gt to shoot the final stakeout location and proceed to the Stake Points Screen Three as described above If you tap from Screen Three to take another shot you will return to the Instrument Stakeout screen where you can once again use the controls on the total station to stake the point HR is the rod height Instrument Stakeout Update HR on Instrument If a new rod height Stakeout data has been sent to the instrument and is entered in the HR field or if a new Smart it is now ready for staking Target is selected this button sends the new OCC 1 HI 5 50 BS 2 0 00 00 HR information to the total station Stake Point 3 azimuth 10 00 00 Northing 5 001 736 ift Take Final Shot gt Once you are satisfied with Easting
393. tical criteria to use in the RTK engine s fixed ambiguity resolution algorithm The settings of Low Medium and High correspond to confidence levels of 95 99 5 and 99 9 respectively There are three choices e Low R 104 Job Menu GPS Module e Medium Note It is recommended you set this value to High This will usually mean the RTK engine may take longer to resolve a fixed position It might even mean not being able to resolve a fixed solution in some situations However the consequence of a lower confidence level is that it makes it more likely to resolve an incorrect fixed ambiguity The results of using an incorrect fix are usually much worse than the results of using a float solution Antenna is where you set the source for antenna input There are two choices e Internal e External Note This setting is only available when your receiver model is Hiper Set Rx To OFF mode Disables all RTK operation base and rover and puts the receiver into a standalone autonomous position mode R 105 Survey Pro Reference Manual Measure Mode Settings The Measure Mode card is used to configure the RTK data collection settings Receiver Dynamics is where you control the Settings receiver dynamics for point occupations There are two choices Receiver Dynamics Sem e Static on occupy On starting a point Accept Salutian Quality occupation receiver is put in static Acceptance Criteria mode where it
394. tical distance from the reference point to the new point Store point When this is checked the computed point will be stored with the name specified here Solve will compute the location for and optionally store the new point R 358 Cogo Menu Intersection The Intersection screen computes the intersection s of two lines given the direction s and or distance s from two existing points See illustration below Once solved the intersection points can be viewed from the Map view and optionally stored Point 1 Point 1 Point 2 Direction Direction Direction Distance Distance Distance Intersection Intersection Intersection Point 1 is an existing point that locates the Intersection first line First Point Point 1 Point 2 is an existing point that locates the second line Sendon J Distance Azm or Brg is the length or Ont 20 0 ift z l direction of the specific line tangent to the zoor specified point synsey i Z Store Sect 2 available after solving the screen Once solved ae the computed intersections can be viewed from the Map card where you can decide which intersecting point s to store in the Input card M Store l Sect 1 2 These items are only Store Stores the intersecting points checked above which were computed after solving Solve will compute the intersecting point s and open the Results card R 359 Survey Pro Reference Manual
395. tieinatammatininnmeiaeanen 132 Radial SIO SS IOUS aana a N 133 Distance Offset Shot ssssssssssssssnssrrrrrrrrrnrnrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrnnns 134 Horizontal Angle Offset ccececssssssssesssseessseeesseenesneess 135 Vertical Angle OFFSEL ccccssssecssresessresssseesssneessseenesneess 136 AUO COIE e a a 137 Corner amp 2 I Sc ee nee ee 139 CONT AANGE anane 140 Corner amp 1 ko ee 141 Comer amp c Prane eRe ep orn oe On en on ct 142 2s fi Sis C aana ea aE oR Ra Oe EN eo Te 143 Video SC i 147 SNOOE PONT TWO ENOS sorionoi rE 151 FR CON Gi IM OCLC aie crs triste an N 152 ROCO re ceet tetris cot E E cece anat coc enen ce eneneneee ahaa 153 Remote Elevation aiccceattetesescteciees pence atiteciesinei ecuteca sauces 155 Gin el PON Gee ene Ine nnn Pees One 8 en PES Oe 156 Solar Observation issesi eed sacs as ease eases ch eles Geet 157 FREMMIOULE CONE Ol nasien claro tented etic dalend ate deavede 162 Survey Mini GPS isaisa aaa aaa 171 ORSU ia a ee aR oo ON 172 SLOPE GPS SUL ie aa 178 Data Colet ON nensnnarinn a ae Ca ees te 190 Ge 16 66 Bea 0 Cee pene ener ec ne nr an ee ARE ee ere rte 195 POSE PIOCeSSING iticatinnni anima R 199 Base SAUD iea tloea deed vuctteridtateseieleantiuecdduchdecausutales 204 PROV Gl SGUD sanar a 205 Project ON soa taatenantnaaninellaeranaatbiuals 205 Remote Elevation ssssssssssssssrrrrssssnnnnnnnrnnnrnrrnrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrns 229 IMPO GPS CONTON icii 231 Receiver Information
396. tive value offset is applied at the specified distance from each node toward the centerline Note If an offset occurs past the edge of the road no vertical or cut fill information will be computed for that point Subgrade When checked allows you to specify a vertical offset from the actual node locations Positive values result in the stake location occurring below the selected node Negative values result in the stake location occurring above the selected node Backsight opens the Backsight Setup screen Page R 118 lt Back returns to the previous screen R 416 Roads Menu Next gt takes you to the next Stake Road screen where the direction and distance information to the stake point is displayed Stake Road Screen Three The third Stake Road screen displays distance direction and other information about the point to be staked Station displays the station where the stake Stake Road P vf point occurs and the type of line segment it Station 0 25 000 Line Segment Roadbed Right Fram Gun to Design Point Segment displays the name of the segment Angle Right 38 39 35 tangent to the point to be staked if the point is Horz Dist 32 016 on the Left or Right side of the road and the VertDist 0 600 specified offset if any ER CE Bos bats 3 Angle Right is the horizontal angle from the OCC 1 HE 550 BS cedo oo backsight to the stake point Horz Dist is the horizontal distance from
397. to reflect the change The instrument now needs to be turned horizontally to zero to face the current target location 3 To prevent errors if this button is used the backsight set up is invalidated when exiting the Stakeout dialog A circle zeroed on a design point is meaningless once the design point has been staked Note The button is not available when using a robotic total station lt Back returns to the previous screen Stake gt opens the next screen Offset Staking Screen Five Height of Rod is the length of the rod i Offset Staking Design Elev displays the current design zoi E From GUN to ROD elevation which can be modified with the BACK 0 072 button Go RIGHT 0 055 FORWARD BACK indicates if the rod must sil ae at move forward toward the total station or A backward away from the total station Shot Data Store 4ngle Right 35775500 Go RI GHT Go LEFT indicates if the rod must _ Zenith 89 42 00 move to the right or left from the total station s 592 Dist 1 203 400 Topo 55 point of view Stake Next gt EDM This button can be toggled to shoot in various EDM modes The options available depend on the total station being used Consult the total station s documentation for more information on the EDM modes that it supports CUT FILL displays the required amount of cut or fill to bring the stake point to the design point s elevation R 290 Store Tape
398. to the job in the form of control points Point Name is the name of the initial point Northing is the Y coordinate of the initial point Easting is the X coordinate of the initial point Elevation is the elevation of the initial point Description is the description of the initial point lt Back returns you to the previous screen Finish stores a new job file and raw data file using the specified information R 11 Survey Pro Reference Manual Create a New Job 5 External or No Control File Point Name is the name of the initial point Create a New Job Northing is the Y coordinate of the initial SEE o point Point Name Easting is the X coordinate of the initial point Northing Elevation is the elevation of the initial point Easting Description is the description of the initial Elevation point Description lt Back returns you to the first screen Finish stores a new job file and raw data file using the specified information R 12 File Menu Open The Open screen is used to open an existing job o A list of all the jobs in the current directory is displayed Simply tap on the job name that you want to open and then tap amp Open New ae Open a Recent Job T S 1 1 2005 12 10 p E a ta ceam Note TDS CR5 files can be opened just like any Survey Pro JOB file When a CR5 file is opened it is automatically converted and stored to a JOB file with the sam
399. tor post processing session status while others simply Status Recording no session record event markers in the log file If your receiver does not monitor sessions some fields Interval 1 0 sec are not displayed Elapsed No session Free Memory 1 KB Satellites Status displays information about the e eck recording It will be one of four values VDOP 2 10 Locked 6 e No Communication we are not receiving a response to commands J i Be e No Data we are receiving an unknown or a bad response to commands R 174 GPS Status Survey Menu GPS Module e Recording a file on the receiver or in the data collector is open and recording GPS raw data If this receiver monitors sessions this field will display session in progress when a session is ongoing e Not Recording no file is open and there is no raw data recording Last Site ID displays the Site ID of the current session if a session is in progress If your receiver does not monitor sessions the Site ID is the last Site ID used by Survey Pro Interval displays the current recording interval set in the receiver Remaining displays the time remaining in the current session if a session is in progress This field only shows when your receiver times sessions counting down Elapsed displays the time elapsed since this receiver was put into static mode if a session is in progress This field only shows when your receiver times sessions count
400. trol point source Next gt Re starts the wizard if more control points need to be set or opens the final screen if all control points are set Review Results and Finish The final screen of the wizard shows a preview of the control point coordinates to be created If there is only one point selected the Single Point Results page will open If there are multiple points selected the Multiple Points Results page will be open Single Point Results This page displays the values to be used to create the new GPS control point New GPS Control Point to be Created This shows the new NEE location for the selected point the existing LLH location the existing 102 175 851 NEE location and the deltas between the new 2 200 023 108 and old locations This will also include data sheet details if the control point source comes Tap Finish to create the control point listed above from an NGS data sheet or an OPUS Solution and then then take the following action Automatically solve calibration Report file Tap Finish to determines what will occur a after tapping Finish from the following options e Automatically solve localization calibration e Open the solve localization calibration wizard e Solve the localization calibration later lt Back This opens a prompt asking if you want to reenter the control source for the selected point If Yes the control point source is R 233 Survey Pro Reference Manual
401. ts all of the control points to be used in the least squares solution Clear All un selects all of the control points R 210 Survey Menu GPS Module Fix scale to 1 0 check the Solve Rotation Only control to constrain the least squares solution to a scale of 1 0 Do this when you want to orient your GPS to an existing grid but you want to hold the scale of the GPS measurements Note You must choose exactly two horizontal control points for a fixed scale localization Solve H check Solve H to use the selected control points in a least squares solution or to use the horizontal values from the manual entry card Solve V check Solve V to use the selected control points in a least squares solution or to use the horizontal values from the manual entry card Manual Entry gt opens the screens used to manually enter a set of localization parameters for a horizontal and or vertical solution Calculator gt opens the manual entry screens in Localization Calculator mode This interface only available when using Ground TDS Localization horizontal mode is used as one technique to do one point setups on new jobs Solve gt computes the localization parameters using the least squares solution with the selected control points then opens the Residuals screen R 211 Survey Pro Reference Manual Solve Localization Residuals The Solve Localization Residuals screen is used to display the residuals from t
402. ttings Screen Two The second Instrument Settings screen opens whenever a new instrument profile is being created or when an existing profile is being edited The options available on this screen will vary slightly depending on the total station model selected Name is the name of the instrument profile Instrument Setup being created or changed This is the name that appears in the list on the first Instrument i Settings screen Brand Trimble Legacy Models Brand is where you specify the manufacturer Model 2600 DR200 Remote of the instrument that you are using from a e r dropdown list j i i id faul Model is where you specify the model of the Aea instrument that you are using from a Baud Rate 9600 7 dropdown list Parity Instrument Settings opens the settings that are specific for the selected total station Send to Instrument applicable only on specific total stations will send the selected instrument settings to the total station This is particularly useful with robotic total stations after the total station has been reset Serial Port is the serial port on the data collector used for communications with the total station Bluetooth can also be selected for wireless communication between the data collector and a compatible total station Baud Rate is the speed at which communication occurs with the total station This must match the baud rate configured within the total station
403. ty when applicable Mode Displays the last radio base mode when applicable Configure Modem Establishes communication with the radio firmware and opens the Radio Settings screen Page R 100 where you can change the radio channel and sensitivity settings Select Modem Allows you to select an existing data modem configuration for your cell phone or IP modem IP modem is only available when RTK Rover is selected for the receiver Create Opens the Cell Phone Settings or IP Modem Settings screen Page R 102 or R 103 respectively depending on if Cell Phone or IP Modem is selected for the Data Modem where a new data modem configuration can be created R 99 Survey Pro Reference Manual Edit Opens the Cell Phone Settings or IP Modem Settings screen Page R 102 or R 103 respectively where the selected data modem configuration can be modified Delete Deletes the selected data modem configuration Modem Serial Comms Screen The Modem Serial Comms screen is used to change the settings for communication between the base or rover receiver and the data modem serial port the receiver will use to communicate with the modem Communications GPS Receiver Port p iy Baudrate fosoa Parity Baudrate is where you select the baud rate the receiver will use to communicate with the modem None Parity is where you select the parity the receiver will use to communicate with the modem
404. u can solve for an elevation at a specified station or solve for a station at a specified elevation Results PVC sta is the station at the PVC PVI sta is the station at the PVI PVT sta is the station at the PVT Hi Lo sta is the station where the vertical curve has a tangent equal to zero the crest of the curve elev is the elevation for the respective point R 391 Survey Pro Reference Manual Parabolic Layout The Parabolic Layout screen allows you to compute an elevation at a specified station or a station at a specified elevation Beg Grade is the percent grade at the PVC Parabolic Layout End Grade is the percent grade at the PVT Bega aroge A Curve Length is the horizontal distance Se eat soe between the PVC and PVT PYT Station 0 00 0 baji levation 1200 ift PVC Station is the starting station at the eset PVC Salve O Elevation Station PVC Elevation is the elevation at the PVC tee M Current station ly Solve for is where you select to solve for an unknown Elevation or an unknown Station Solve Sta Sta Layout The selection made here determines which of the following choices will be available der gt snsex a M Interval When checked the Current station can be incremented by the specified interval by using the and buttons and then re computed with the button Current station is the station that will be solved for with the button
405. up The Start GPS Survey Choose One Point Setup screen is used to select one point setup mode This screen shows when you have a new job with only one point and when you have not yet selected a coordinate system Use one point setup when you want to start a new survey at ground level with no extra steps required to solve the coordinate system One Point Setup displays a description of one point setup mode Start Survey With One Point Setup gt opens the Choose Base Setup screen which will guide you through starting the survey with the default ground coordinate system Start Survey Wizard Cancel One Point Setup This is a new job Use One Point Setup to set the base and rover and begin collecting data in a new ground coordinate system for this location Regular Setup displays a description of Regular Setup mode Start Survey With Regular Setup gt opens the Choose Projection Mode screen which is used to help you solve the coordinate system for this job Use Regular Setup to choose a projection mode set base and rover and solve the projection Start Survey with Regular Setup gt R 178 Survey Menu GPS Module Choose Projection Mode The Start GPS Survey Choose Projection Mode screen is used to select a horizontal projection mode This screen shows when you have not yet solved a coordinate system for this job Start Survey Wizard E Choose a projection mode If your job is
406. urn toward the design point after tapping Solve gt depending on the configuration of the Stakeout Settings screen Page R 47 R 307 Survey Pro Reference Manual Curve and Offset Screen Three Station displays the current station that is Stake Curve And Offset iia x being staked Station 1 00 000 H Offset displays the offset distance of the H Offset 15 000 R v Offset curve being staked from the specified curve Fram Gun to Design Point and if it is on the Right or Left side of the Angle Right 121 38 30 specified curve Horz Dist 84 014 Angle Right is the horizontal angle that the Ce D ee total station must aim toward so that it is ZE to Rod 90 00 00 facing the current station OCC 1 HE 550 BS pognon Horz distance is the horizontal distance from the occupy point to the current station Vert Distance is the vertical distance from the occupy point to the current station ZE to Rod is the zenith angle that the total station must aim toward so that it is facing the current station Circle Zero is used to modify the circle on the total station so that the angle right reading will be zero when it is facing toward the design point which can sometimes be easier than turning to an obscure angle value When this button is tapped the following actions will occur 1 Anew backsight circle value is computed sent to the instrument and stored in the raw data 2 The Angle Right value
407. us 0 174 Offset 0 009 Mem Threshold O S Threshold 5 HOOP 12 00 Recording Status displays the current state of receiver recording Start Recording Stop Recording this button will activate the action which is opposite to the current Recording Status Tap Start Recording to open a new log file begin logging raw GPS measurements for post processing to the file and then open the Receiver Session screen Page R 202 where you can input the station name and description Tap the Stop Recording button to close the open log file Note The location of the file is usually on the receiver s built in memory However some models support collection of post processing data to a file on the data collector For those receivers that support it the location of the log file is specified on the Receiver Settings General screen Start Static use this setting if you want to start a log file in static mode where the receiver will remain over a single point for the duration of the session R 199 Survey Pro Reference Manual Start Stop Go use this setting if you want to start a log file in stop and go mode where the receiver will rove around In stop and go mode the GPS raw data is continuously logged to the file to maintain the initialization while roving around this is the go part Then static Sessions are marked when the receiver is stationary over a point this is the stop part R
408. user s manual for more information on setup groups SET sets the receiver as an RTK base and configures the base reference position in Survey Pro If there is a Recording Interval set on the Job Settings Post Process page a file will be opened and logging of raw GPS measurements for post processing will start The base name and antenna measurement will be recorded in the file for this static session R 187 Survey Pro Reference Manual Rover Setup The Rover Setup screen is used to set the RTK rover receiver and to configure or check the base reference position in Survey Pro Rover Status displays the status of the rover irae T ES AFA El setup in Survey Pro Rover Status Rover is set Base set at monl Base set at displays the current base point Lat 44 33 07 69000 N Height This will be empty if the base is not set Long 123 16 06 57000 W 55 0000 m EET Antenna set Antenna displays antenna setup for this ae ee receiver It will be in one of three states Measured To Bottom of mount Measured 2 0 e Last Antenna for this receiver is displayed when you have not yet set Offset 0 000 the rover in Survey Pro This value is 7 c the previous antenna measurement you used with this receiver e Selected Antenna is displayed when you have entered new antenna measurements using the Receiver Antenna screen Page R 184 e Antenna Set is displayed when you have already set the rove
409. ust be listening for same format the base is broadcasting Baud displays the baud rate the radio is currently set to There is no way for Survey Pro to change this value so you must set the receiver to radio communications to match what you see here Parity displays the parity the radio is currently set to Set sends commands to the radio firmware to configure the settings selected on this screen Note some settings on the radio cannot be modified with Survey Pro To fully program the radio modems you need to PC software that should be supplied with the radio R 101 Survey Pro Reference Manual Cell Phone Settings Screen The Cell Phone Settings screen is used to create or modify a cell phone data modem configuration Cellphone Settings Cellphone Settings Base Rover Auto Answer Command Dial Command Cell Phone Settings Base Card Cell Phone Settings Rover Card Use Advanced Settings Base Card When checked allows you to specify alternate Hayes AT auto answer command If unchecked the default AT auto answer command of ate0s0 1 is used Auto Answer Command is the alternate Hayes AT command to use for auto answering Number to Dial is where you enter the telephone number of the RTK base receiver s cell phone Use Advanced Settings Rover Card When checked allows you to specify alternate Hayes AT commands to hang up and dial If unchecked the default AT command to hang up of athO an
410. ut slope e Force FILL Slope forces all computations to be based on a fill slope HR is the rod height a opens the Smart Target options Page R 449 Topo SS will store the last shot taken as a side shot Shot takes a shot lt Back returns to the previous screen Store gt opens the next screen Point Slope Staking Screen Three The third Point Slope Staking screen is identical to the fifth Slope Staking screen and is described on Page R 297 R 302 Stakeout Menu Stake Line and Offset The Stake Line and Offset screen is used to stake stations on a line or at an offset to it at fixed intervals i opens the Stakeout Settings screen Page R 47 Stake Line And Offset p t amp Start Point defines the first point of the line to Define a Line be staked Start Point Ee e End Point Direction defines the second point of the line or the direction of the line to MN A eecpcctvcly Begin Station lv Begin Station defines the station associated with the Start Point occ 357 HI 5 50 BS 0 00 00 Backsight opens the Backsight Setup screen Page R 118 Next gt opens Screen Two Stake Line and Offset Screen Two Station to Stake is the desired station that you want to stake z Station I nterval is the value that is added to take Line And Offset aes ee es S the Station to Stake after the Sturn M Next Station button is pressed SEa Ne
411. ver Station displays the station on the line associated with the offset location It is relative to the Start Point defined in the first screen gt N E Z toggles the display between Results and Current Location Store prompts you for a point name and description and stores a point for the current location R 338 Stakeout Menu GPS amp Basic GPS Module Slope Staking The Slope Staking screen is used to locate the catch points for a roadway in any terrain The first screens of this routine are similar to the conventional method except that the and Circle Zero buttons are replaced with a button to configure rover antenna and the backsight information is replaced with rover antenna height information See Page R 298 for details Once the centerline of the road is selected and the road profile is defined the fourth Slope Staking screen is used to locate the stake point at the current station Slope Staking Screen Four The graphic portion of the Horizontal Map and Vertical Map is updated continuously This allows the user at the rover position to watch the movement of the rover in relation to the slope and easily position the rod over the catch point 11 Note You can tap in the graphic portion of the Right FILL Slope screen to open the graphic in a larger window Obs Slope 30 924 Des Slope 3 000 Above DS 4 283 Toward CL 9 583 Ahead Sta 21 789 HD to HP 14 229 F
412. when there is a geoid model selected but no vertical adjustment e No vertical site is displayed when there is no vertical solution and Solve V was not selected on this pass Slope N displays the slope of the inclined plane along the local north grid axis in parts per million Slope E displays the slope of the inclined plane along the local east erid axis in parts per million Separation displays the separation between the inclined plane and the local elevation Origin N E displays the origin of the inclined plane This is in local coordinates and it will be the local coordinate of the first control point used in the solution or your manual input location Accept opens the Adjust with Projection wizard where the latest coordinate system adjustment will be applied to your job file points and you can review the results When you accept the results the coordinate system is updated in the job the raw data is written and the projection adjustment is applied to job points R 217 Survey Pro Reference Manual Projection Mapping Plane Mode The Projection screen is described below for when the horizontal projection mode is set to Mapping Plane Use this setting when you want your coordinate system to be a conformal map projection chosen from the coordinate system database file Projection Mapping Plane zone Based Calibration Solved Yegas UTM calibrated Transverse Mercator See Page R 206 for when the pr
413. when the adjustment mode is set to Adjust From Source to Destination Adjust with Projection Prompt Adjust The Adjust with Projection Prompt Adjust screen is used to describe the difference between the source and destination record and to prompt you whether or not you wish to adjust the job with the change of projection This screen only shows when the wizard is opened because of a change of projection record Adjust With Projection Ez Adjust With Projection E Adjust job with new projection adjust job with new projection Adjust Horizontal and Vertical The plane NEE location of points with geodetic locations will be updated Do not adjust job gt gt Projection readjust with select new record Adjust only points with geodetic coordinates Do not adjust job gt gt Projection readjust with select new record gt gt Readjust Transformer Method gt gt Readjust Transformer Method Prompt choose points Prompt geodetic points only Adjust job with new projection is where you choose to adjust the job file points with the change of coordinate system Adjust Horizontal and or Vertical is where you choose how to update the horizontal and vertical coordinates in the job There are two choices R 239 Survey Pro Reference Manual Adjust All Points use this setting when you want to adjust all points The method used to adjust plane and geodetic points is described on the Select Points page
414. work Note The auto linework information described below is not written to the raw data file If using a conversion routine that only uses a raw data file all linework commands must be i manually entered into the raw data file in the form of a note by using the Add Note Quick Pick See the User s manual for details on customizing the Quick Pick list Description lists the descriptions defined from using the button which when used during data collection will generate the specified polyline segment linework The following two wildcards can be appended to a description where each one performs a special function e Asterisk when a description entry ends with an asterisk any description entered during data collection that begins with the same characters before the asterisk will be joined to the previous linework entry For example if CURB were used as in the screen shown here and a description for a point was called CURB5 or CURBSIDE the line segment associated with CURB would be appended to the previous line segment e Pound sign when a description entry ends with a pound sign any description entered during data collection that begins with the same characters before the pound sign will generate the associated line segment type but if the next R 75 Survey Pro Reference Manual description is at all different from the previous use a new independent line segment will be drawn For example if LOT w
415. xt Station advances the Station to Stake by Offset OL r e the Station Interval Qo u Ra Offset defines the offset distance and if the offset occurs to the right of the line when R is He 7 00 ift I selected or left when Lis selected The right OCC 357 HI 5 50 BS 0 00 00 or left side is referenced while viewing the line from the Start Point R 303 Survey Pro Reference Manual gt Vertical Offset is the offset distance that is below the design location when D is selected or above the design location when U is selected specifies a slope from the specified line to the parallel line that is being staked When this is a non zero value the elevation for the staked points will increasingly differ from the design elevations as the Offset value increases Height of rod is the length of the rod Backsight opens the Backsight Setup screen lt Back returns to the previous screen Solve gt opens the third Stake Line and Offset screen described next Note A motorized total station will automatically turn toward the design point after pressing depending on the configuration of the Stakeout Settings screen Page R 47 Stake Line and Offset Screen Three Station displays the current station that is being staked Stake Line And Offset Station 10 00 000 H Offset displays the offset distance of the H Offset 15 000 R v Offset line being staked from the specif
416. y in coordinates to define origin or Pick point to define origin on the first Ground Coordinates page Reference Point Location Locals Latitude 44 33 08 16360 N Reference Point Location Local displays the Longitude 123 16 05 95157 W local Latitude Longitude and Height of the Height 64 999 Scale Factor ground origin point _ Override scale calculated from location Scale Factor displays the inverse combined scale factor for this ground setup This scale factor is automatically calculated based on the local ground origin Override scale factor is where you can over ride the scale factor Check this control to R 227 Survey Pro Reference Manual enable the scale factor edit field and enter any other scale factor Ground Coordinates Location The Ground Coordinates Location screen is used to define the local ground coordinate of the origin point This coordinate will be used to calculate an offset from the mapping plane grid coordinates so that you can separate the grid and ground coordinates to make them recognizable This screen is used when you select either Key in coordinates to define origin or Pick point to define origin on the first page Reference Point Location Grid displays the Ground Coordinates local northing and easting of the ground origin Reference Point Location Grich North 9 117 038 061 Desired Local Ground Coordinate is the East 410 603 088 desired local northing and e
417. y of file types can be imported into the current job The first Import Coordinates screen is used to select from the file types listed below The next screen that opens depends on the selection made here e Job Files J OB import coordinates from Import another Job file os Sl lob Files J08 B e Coordinate Files CR5 import eae ES coordinates from a TDS CR5 coordinate GPS File GPS file Z e a a Text Files TXT z Text Files cS e GPS Files GPS import coordinates ea aa ales C Files ML from a TDS GPS coordinate file e Text Files TXT text files can contain coordinates in several different possible Name 01 01 2005 job formats The Import ASCII Wizard is used to define the format of the text file being imported e Text Files CSV this is a simplified text file import routine where the source file is comma delimited and has a CSV extension e LandXML Files xml imports points alignments polylines and parcels from a LandXML file Import JOB Coordinates When importing coordinates from another JOB file the Import Coordinates screen is used described above A list of all the jobs available in the current directory is displayed Simply tap on the job name that you want to import and then tap the amp button The points in the selected job will be added to the points in the current job R 16 File Menu Import CR5 Coordinates When importing a CR5 file
418. y year TDS cannot maintain the necessary set up documentation for every existing model and the models that are not yet available The set up procedure for your particular total station is better handled by the total station manufacturer or your instrument s dealer If you have specific questions on the set up of your total station you should refer to the documentation that was included with your total station The numbers listed below are provided for your convenience Trimble 800 538 7800 Zeiss 800 538 7800 Geodimeter 800 538 7800 Leica 800 327 4773 Nikon 516 547 8500 Pentax 800 729 1419 Topcon 800 223 1130 R 40 Level Method Level Method Job Menu select Manual Mode nstrument Settings Manual Entry Mode Leveling Method O Three Wire Single Wire Electronic T Trigonometric The Level Method screen is used to select the leveling method you want to use while running in leveling mode and while using Manual Mode This will affect the type of data you are prompted for when taking shots Three Wire Prompts for shot data will require upper center and lower wire readings Single Wire Prompts for shot data will require center wire readings only Electronic Prompts for shot data will require a vertical and horizontal distance Trigonometric Prompts for shot data will require a zenith angle and horizontal distance Units Settings Units for Distances Units for Angles Display
419. you will first be prompted to select the layer where you want the new data stored Select a layer and tap amp to continue Import CR5 Pou Importing DTl crs In the next screen select the distance units that the coordinates were stored in and tap amp Select the Distance Units Used in the CRS File O Meters International Feet US Survey Feet Import GPS Coordinates When importing a GPS file you will first be prompted to select the layer where you want the new data stored Select a layer and tap amp to continue In the next screen select the distance units Import CR5 ou that the coordinates were stored in and tap amp Importing Survey gps When importing coordinates from both a TDS Select the Distance Units Used in the CR5 File CRS and GPS fle fromthe same job the GPS O Meters coordinate will be linked to the coordinates in International Feet the CR5 file For more information on this refer to the GPS User s Guide US Survey Feet R 17 Survey Pro Reference Manual Import TXT Coordinates When importing a TXT file you will first be prompted to select the layer where you want the new data stored Select a layer and tap to continue Since the coordinates in an ASCII TXT file can SIREN be stored in a variety of formats two screens Ny eee er ee eee are used to define the format of the file that is coordinate tyne of the imported file being imported once
420. ype of observation to shoot next R 263 Survey Pro Reference Manual Leveling Side Shot The Leveling Sideshot screen is used to describe a leveling side shot before taking the necessary shots to record it SS Point is the name for the new point Choose a Point ta Foresight as a Leveling Side Shot Desc is an optional description for the new point u 55 Point NONE A Ee Default Location for New Points is where Description 55 _ Default Location for New Points you specify the northing and easting to use when the new point is stored since the leveling 4127 09275 ift 4747 799374 ift procedure cannot compute these Backsight Point TF1 Backsight Point Lists the details for the Elev 100 000 H Dist current backsight If this is the first Pon observation from the current set up most of the details will be unknown Next gt opens the Take Shot screen Page R 262 where the required shots are performed R 264 Level Menu Leveling Stakeout The Leveling Stakeout screen is used to measure the elevation at an existing point and compute a cut fill value 9 6 Stk Point is the point in the current job that you want to shoot to determine the cut fill value The location for this point must be A Stk Point e known in advance since the leveling routine cannot compute horizontal coordinates Backsight Point Lists the details for the Backsight Point TP1 current backsight If this is the

Results - Hayeshelp.com

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents